Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Qualities of a leader | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Secrets of client retention | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
11 tips for perfect pitch presentations | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
5 financial steps after exit | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Covid insurance: get what you’re owed | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Brexit: recruiting overseas workers | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
5 things start-ups get wrong | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
3 questions acquirers are asking | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Brexit: what are the opportunities? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Building a flexible future | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How to go social prospecting | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Capital gains tax under review | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Getting support to raise your game | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Choosing an online marketplace | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
5 start-up lessons from 2020 | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Learning resilience from lobsters | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Preparing for business exit in 2021 | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Managing Covid-19 debt | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Starting a business in the pandemic | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Funding for female founders | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Reintegrating staff | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
5 signs it’s time to sell | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Should you invest now? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
The mental health challenge | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
When you return to the office | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Is your buyer serious? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Investment in the ‘new normal’ | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Productivity and the pandemic | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Reacting to unsolicited offers | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Adapting to the new environment | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
5 steps to scaling up fast | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Funding in the age of Covid-19 | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Learning from the financial crisis | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Recruiting remote workers | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Thriving through a recession | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Is your office too big? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Marketing through a crisis | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Staying on course | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Back to work | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Winning business at a social distance | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Thriving after lockdown | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Covid-19: through investors’ eyes | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How to exit in 2020 | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Get virtual advice for Covid-19 | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Protecting your wealth | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Cash in a time of crisis | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Bouncing back fast | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Key tools for remote working | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
COVID 19 – Business Owners’ Advisory Service | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Covid-19: get the help you need | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Exit during a pandemic | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Making the most of alternative finance | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Start-up loans - the ‘bots’ have arrived | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Entrepreneurs’ Relief changes from £10 million to £1 million | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Growing by winning procurement contracts | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Five ways to benefit from a growth market | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Make your business more attractive | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How’s your poker face? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Investment bonanza | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Help… we’re scaling up! | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Six steps to boost productivity | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Crunch time for Entrepreneurs’ Relief? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How to prepare to sell your business when it’s dependent on you | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Five things you need to know | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Seven rules for hiring employees | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Five reasons loans are declined | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Starting over | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Have you protected your IP? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Navigating to exit in uncertain times | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Raising money to expand | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How to keep cash flowing | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Lacking interest? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Selling your business to employees | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
The opportunities of private equity | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Skills shortages – what’s the risk? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Do corporates want your start-up? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
The bespoke approach to borrowing | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Don’t cook the books! | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Entrepreneurs’ Relief – which way now? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Should you sell up? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
When a key shareholder departs | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Securing a start-up loan | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Be prepared for an offer | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Finding cutting-edge expertise | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Five ways to find early adopters | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
15 facts about extracting capital | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Do you know your SPOFs? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Entrepreneurs’ Relief: how it affects you | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Are you a credible founder? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
How to nurture clients | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Is your business your pension? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Could you get R&D tax credit? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Challenging the corporate bullies | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Ten changes to make at £1m turnover | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Five things affecting exit valuation | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Playing the long game | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Attack of the cyber criminals | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Borrowing from friends and family | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started
Should you start again? | St. James’s Place - Entrepreneur Club

Important notice

Although the content of this article was correct at the time of writing, the accuracy of the information should not be relied upon, as it may have been subject to subsequent tax, legislative or event changes.


Getting Started

Setting up a trust

Putting your exit proceeds into a trust for your children can help protect your money and your family

Setting up a trust

Selling a business for millions of pounds gives you the opportunity to bring financial security to your whole family for the rest of their lives.

Alongside your foreign travel and fine wines, you can ensure that your hard-earned wealth provides your children or grandchildren with stellar education opportunities or help onto the property ladder. But it’s not quite as simple as handing over regular cheques to your eager offspring.

“Some entrepreneurs don’t want to give their children immediate access to lots of money because they want them to make it on their own,” says Tony Müdd, Divisional Director, Development & Technical Consultancy at St. James’s Place. “There may also be nervousness over their children’s choice of spouse and what a divorce would mean to the family wealth. In addition, there is uncertainty about how their children will spend the money. Will it be wasted on fast cars or worse?”

To ensure more control over where the money will go you could consider setting up a trust for your children or grandchildren. These can also help with Inheritance Tax planning as gifts can be exempt if you survive for seven years after making them.

Bare trusts

You could consider a bare trust where the trustees are the legal owners of the assets holding them for the beneficiary. They can take control of these at age 18 in England and Wales or 16 in Scotland. The main benefit is that a transfer into a bare trust is potentially exempt from Inheritance Tax.

“It doesn’t provide much control for older kids because if they want the money then there is nothing you can do to stop them,” says Tony.

Discretionary trusts

Discretionary trusts are another option and the most used in financial services. “It gives you much more control including where the trust money is invested, how any capital or income distribution is made. The beneficiaries don’t have any rights,” Tony explains. 

He adds: “You could set up the trust stating that a beneficiary has a right to an income at 30 and capital at 40 but why tie yourself up? If the child is 28 but needs help with buying property now the trust won’t be able to help for the next two years. You might as well make these financial decisions and help your child when it is right and timely to do so.”
You need to be aware that a gift to a discretionary trust creates a chargeable lifetime transfer at a rate of 20%. However, this will only arise if the gift into the trust exceeds the individual donor's available nil rate band currently £325,000.

Loan trusts

A loan trust and discounted gift trust mainly come in the form of a discretionary trust. “With a loan trust you lend the trust money, say £100,000,” Tony explains. “It is operated and controlled just like a discretionary trust but, unlike a discretionary fund, you can get the original amount of money back. However, you are not entitled to access any growth which has come from investing that £100,000.”

Tony explains that the main advantage of a loan trust is that it provides more flexibility for people who may not necessarily be able to afford to gift assets away.

Discounted gift trusts

“With a discounted gift trust you have to capitalise the value of the income stream to work out the overall loss to your estate,” Tony says. “It allows you to make a substantial gift, retain an income but also have a discount on the amount of money you appear to be giving away*. The main problem with this trust is that your income is fixed at the outset and you can never change it. Although you can turn the income off.”

Entrepreneurs can also use their business to create financially beneficial trusts. Your business qualifies for Business Relief and is not subject to IHT but as soon as the enterprise is sold it is no longer exempt.

“If someone is approaching the sale of their business they could transfer some of the shares into a discretionary trust. They are transferring an exempt asset, so they could put £1m into the trust rather than the £325,000 limit,” Tony says. “It is a major advantage for entrepreneurs.”

To determine which form of trust is best suited Tony recommends seeking professional advice. “It depends on what people are looking for, their total value of wealth and how much flexibility they require,” he says.

 “I’d advise people not to make any quick decisions and to involve all of their children in the process because the worst part of my job is getting involved in family disputes over money. Brits hate talking about money with their children, but they need to know what the trust means for them from the outset. It will certainly cut down on family arguments.”

 


The value of an investment with St. James’s Place will be directly linked to the performance of the funds you select and the value can therefore go down as well as up. You may get back less than you invested.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. The value of any tax relief depends on individual circumstances.

Trusts are not regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority.

*Exact amount of discount will only be calculated if death occurs within 7 years.

Putting your exit proceeds into a trust for your children can help protect your money and your family

Qualities of a leader

We look at the skills and qualities every entrepreneur needs to take a business through significant expansion

Qualities of a leader

Launching a business and getting it off the ground against the odds is undeniably an impressive achievement, particularly in a pandemic. At some point, though, every business needs to grow, and this throws up a battery of new challenges to an entrepreneur, requiring personal qualities beyond the self-belief, passion and creativity which first breathed life into the enterprise.

But what are those qualities, and do you have them? Martin Brown of business advisor Elephant’s Child, which helps support entrepreneurs, spells out the key strengths required.

Core qualities you need

Clarity of thought. “This may seem like stating the obvious but, given the complexities of modern business, a vital first step for expansion is for the entrepreneur to actively consider and firmly decide on the company’s strategic direction and future long-term development.”

Good communication skills. “The ability to commit your ‘clear thinking’ to paper as a business plan is an essential next step. Then you must live and breathe that vision yourself for all to see. There are a lot of business plans and mission statements out there that don’t reflect the reality of the companies that produced them. Remember, you’ve other audiences to reach too, including customers, stakeholders and other investors.” 

Ability to win hearts and minds. “Having defined and communicated your strategy,  you need to ensure everyone buys into it and knows what it means for them – how it effects their role, and how it will benefit the company and its employees. You need to be able to build trust around you and your plans, which means being authentic as a leader, so you can have those challenging conversations about what needs to be done to take things forward. It’s about building strong relationships.”

Persistence. “To be persistent, dogmatic and determined is critical for successful expansion. You’re going to get curve balls thrown at you, suffer setbacks and frustrating hold-ups, but you must always focus on your desired outcomes and be resilient if you want to achieve your goals.”

Be prepared to be supportive and self-critical. “Today’s entrepreneurs are smart enough to avoid attempting god-like control of everything. Now it’s much more about coaching and motivating, sharing skills and knowledge with your team and recognising when you need to bring in third parties to support or train them – and yourself. 

“An entrepreneur needs to have the emotional intelligence and courage to assess their own capabilities and, if necessary, have someone assess their abilities,” explains Brown. “If you‘re lacking in a particular skill or quality, don’t be afraid to get the formal, or informal, coaching or training you need. And if you feel you just cannot cut it in one area, bring in somebody else who has the right qualities.”

Shining example

Leaders who are shining examples and have demonstrated all the right qualities over the past few months are those in charge of our Covid-19 hospital wards.

They are not entrepreneurs but they use modern business management techniques and approaches and apply them to their roles. They set out what each member of the clinical staff's role is within the team tackling the crisesd and communicate effectively.

They have motivated sometimes youthful and junior team members to work to the best of their abilities and have shown resilience throught the stress of the pandemic, while all the time coaching junior staff. Equally, they draw on the expertise of other medical professional when it is needed.

 


Secrets of client retention

Growing companies focused on winning new customers shouldn't lose sight of the importance of those they already have

Secrets of client retention

Depending on which study you read, and what industry you’re in, acquiring a new customer is anywhere from five to 25 times more expensive than retaining an existing one. And retaining the customers you have could be critical to your success as we emerge from lockdown.

Your company may be starting to grow through new customers, but it's important to maintain the level of service to the existing clients that has got you this far. Growing your work with them could be at least as important as finding new clients, and if your performance starts to slip, as resources and attention are focused on the growing sales funnel, your reputation and your revenues could suffer.

Client retention makes sense: you don’t have to spend time and resources convincing someone new of the value of your product or service – you just have to keep the client you already have happy. According to research done by Frederick Reichheld of global management consultancy Bain & Company, increasing customer retention rates by 5% increases profits by 25% to 95%1.

So how do you maintain relationship with existing clients and, if possible, grow your business with them?

Rich in opportunity

Martin Brown, chief executive officer of business advisors Elephants Child, has more than 20 years’ experience in business development across a wide range of industry sectors. He says: “The growth and retention of existing clients, through proactive management, is rich in opportunity, low in risk and in cost."

An existing client will often be unaware of other products and services you offer, he says, providing the opportunity for growth. Risk is low because your business already has the client won over and has established points of contact. "Therefore, another piece of business becomes relatively quick, simple and easy to process."

He continues: "It is a relationship that when working well, has your client acting as an advocate and believing that your business is an intrinsic part of their value chain." But the danger, he says, is that clients are "underserved and left to drift", which can result in poor customer experiences and high churn rates.

He suggests regularly surveying customers to understand what they want from your service or product offering. "Establish what you do well and where you can improve. And consider whether your clients would refer and recommend you to other companies."

Not paying attention to what existing customers want could mean opportunities to win new business are needlessly lost. Martin reveals: “So often we see a customer that buys product or service A from a company but would also buy B, C, D and E if only they knew the company offered this."

And he adds: "Be strong on proactively raising your prices – if the client and market can take it – and seek to increase the value and number of transactions. This notion of 'juicing' the client might sound harsh but, in reality, it is a mutually beneficial approach.”

Customer loyalty

Martin believes there is great value in customer loyalty: “Companies seeing that their peers are enjoying great service from you is a key factor in persuading them that they might want to experience the same journey.”

However, he points out that client retention calls for particular talents from your team: "The right skill set is more of the clichéd farming, cultivation approach rather than the new business hunter, so strong on building relations and a desire to deliver excellent customer service."

Serial entrepreneur Chris Sheppardson, CEO at EP Business in Hospitality, who has founded several businesses in the hospitality sector, agrees with Martin: "Service is a key differential if one wants to retain customers. Good business has always been about keeping the customer happy, yet we have lost this focus over recent years.

"Client retention is one of the most overlooked areas today and yet the cost of losing a client is far greater than the cost of recruiting a new one – particularly for smaller businesses."

 


1 Prescription for cutting costs, Bain & Company, 25 March 2021.

11 tips for perfect pitch presentations

An expert from Octopus Ventures gives advice on creating the perfect pitch

11 tips for perfect pitch presentations

You’ve grabbed the attention of potential investors and now have the chance to sell your business idea in person. How do you put together a pitch that’ll knock their socks off? Will Gibbs, Principal at Octopus Ventures, knows what it takes to start a business from scratch and shares his expertise in presenting business ideas to others.

 

1. How long should your initial pitch be?

Keep it brief. Explain your idea and what you intend to prove in the early months. Most initial pitches last around five minutes, with later meetings to secure commitment and action running closer to 45 minutes. If you have an hour slot, be ready to do a 30-minute presentation and then leave plenty of time for discussion. You need time to answer questions and gather their feedback.

 

2. What should your pitch cover?

With just five minutes to wow your audience, keep focused by talking about who you are and what your business is trying to achieve. Explain why you’re suited to running this business and who else is involved. Close by talking about how much potential you believe the business has. Cut everything down to the essentials. Investors and backers will say ‘tell me more’, or ‘OK, that’s not for me, but you should speak to this person’. Your pitch is really a sales call, so all messages to sell your product apply to your pitch too.

 

3. What do most start-ups talk about?

Will surveyed more than 60 of Octopus Ventures’ portfolio companies to identify the top ten categories included in their pitches. All mentioned their team and most their product. Many included the problem, business model, company purpose, market size, solution, competition and financials. Fewer than half explained: “why now?”.

Quality pitches contain a clear message about where the company’s competitive advantage comes from, include a “why” or mission statement, and leave the audience engaged and keen to know more. Be transparent and include the challenges and threats to your business idea too and be prepared to talk about them.

 

4. Things to leave out of your pitch

Pitches often fall flat because the presenter assumes the audience has a lot of background knowledge. Strip out the complexity and jargon and include enough information for your audience to understand the significance of your plans. Be mindful of the language you use to ‘sell’ your business or idea. During an unhealthy number of pitches, the business owner is claiming that any and every market is ‘broken’.

 

5. Make market data count

Don’t throw broad industry numbers into the presentation. Focus instead on the total addressable market. You can’t predict the future, of course, but a considered approach to your calculations will show potential investors that your team is capable and focused.

 

6. What supporting data should you bring?

Trying to squeeze everything into your first meeting with a potential investor isn’t going to lead to a quality pitch. But be prepared for the conversation afterwards. A PowerPoint pitch should communicate, very simply, what your business does, what your market is, who you’re selling to, how you’re selling, what the team is, what the plans are for the future, what’s the long-term ambition, etc. Eventually someone will ask you for a business plan and follow up with a bunch more questions.  Appendix slides are useful so you’re ready for every possible direction. Being prepared to talk numbers is simply good salesmanship.

 

7. Learn about the panel you’re pitching to

Don’t forget to do your homework on your audience. In the best pitches, presenters reference common connections they have with the panel. They put the effort in to build a bond and show they’ve done their research from the start. Search LinkedIn, company profiles and trawl Google to understand their expertise. This might be your first meeting with someone who’ll be sitting on your board for the next eight or ten years and could be the beginning of an important relationship.

 

8. Practise makes perfect

The more you practise your pitch, the more polished you’ll be. But what will really pay off is time spent preparing for a robust discussion afterwards. Investors want to see you’re in control and can make the business a success. Be careful who you choose as your test audience though. Friends can be bad at supplying feedback; they’re all too supportive and nice. Find the most commercially-minded people you can and pitch with the understanding you want really constructive feedback to make it better”.

The Octopus approach to getting feedback – asking for three positive things and then three developmental things – can be helpful. Once your practise audience has said nice things about you, they’ll probably have the confidence to talk through some of the less positive ones too.

 

9. Use stories to draw your audience in

The most persuasive pitches are those that include stories. Whether it’s talking about how you came up with the idea for the business, the vision or purpose of the business, or validation from your early customers, stories can really help to bring your business to life. If you can, include mock-ups and screenshots of your product too. Even if you don’t have many customers yet, if the people you have sold to are enthusiastic, that starts to tell a story you are building something exciting”.

 

10. You’re a big part of the offer

You are under just as much, if not more, scrutiny. Investors want to know you’ll be able to handle the pressure and challenges of start-up life. Do you have the energy and the passion to convince future customers, suppliers and employees to stay the course? You can’t say ‘there’s a real opportunity here’ without getting excited by it and need to convince people to take on the risks, especially in the venture space. Investors look for entrepreneurs who are energised and articulate about their vision.

 

11. Spend time listening to others’ pitches

If you haven’t pitched before, or you’re looking to sharpen up your delivery, you can find plenty of inspiration online. You can even pick up some tips from watching episodes of Dragons’ Den. One of the good things about Dragons’ Den is you can tell a bad pitch instantly, and it is pretty obvious when they’re pitching well. See what works and what doesn’t and use it to shape your presentation.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of Octopus Ventures.

5 financial steps after exit

How to ensure good financial planning after a business sale

5 financial steps after exit

The T’s are crossed and the I’s dotted and the business that you have built up over the last few decades has been sold.

Thoughts might turn to expensive motor cars and, pandemic permitting, sun-kissed beaches but the first thing on the agenda should be to secure your financial future. Simon Martin, Chartered Financial Planner at St. James’s Place, outlines five steps to take for good financial planning post-exit.

1. Creating income in retirement

You have sold your business, which has provided income for you for many years and now you are typically left with the cash proceeds. The questions you should be asking yourself include ‘How can I use that cash to create a retirement income for me and my family?’, ‘Have I got enough?’ and ‘How much can I take from it without eroding the capital?’

In order to help secure the retirement you want, you need to use tax-efficient wrappers such as pensions, an Inheritance Tax (IHT) efficient trust that pays an income, ISAs and other tax wrappers or rental properties.

Depending on your risk appetite and circumstances, there are also other tax-advantaged investments which may be suitable.

Another question to ask alongside this is – ‘How can I do this in a tax-efficient manner using allowances and exemptions?’ You need to think about both current taxes such as income tax and Capital Gains Tax, and future taxes such as IHT.

2. Replacement business relief

A trading business typically qualifies for 100% Business Relief, meaning it won’t be liable for Inheritance Tax on the death of the owner. However, once it is sold the owner holds cash and therefore loses the IHT exemption. Owners have 36 months from the sale to re-invest some or all the proceeds into other Business Relief-qualifying investments and assets and recover the IHT exemption.

3. Trusts for IHT planning

When you sell a business you will have a large amount of money coming into your estate. Subject to individual circumstances, IHT is charged at a rate of 40% on the portion of the estate above £325,000 so reducing the value will reduce your tax bill.

One thing we often see clients look at is making cash gifts as you can give away £3,000 each tax year using their annual gifting exemption.

Clients can also put gifts into trust for beneficiaries and if you survive for seven years after doing so the gift is not liable to IHT. Trusts can also control and protect your wealth from adverse life events. The trusts tend to be discretionary which allow for a wide range of potential beneficiaries such as extended family or even friends. The trustee makes the decisions about what gets paid out and to whom.

Some trusts also offer slightly more bespoke arrangements such as allowing the owner to draw an income from it for themselves.

4. Replacing protection insurance policies

This is more for those who might sell a business when they are a bit younger in life and have a growing family to protect.

Often owners will set themselves up protection through their business such as life or illness insurance. So, if they were to die the policies would then pay out to their family. When they sell up, those policies very often come to an end and therefore, they should think about putting in replacements.

5. Keeping emotions in check

If you have been working 60 hours a week for the last 30 years and it has suddenly gone, it can be a rude awakening. You have gone from thrusting entrepreneur to watching daytime television!

To help protect your wealth from any rash, emotionally led decisions you should start preparing for your post-business life before the exit takes place. What do you want to do with your time and money? Will you do charity work, set up a new business or just play golf all day?

Getting prepared and talking to your family and your St. James’s Place Partner will ensure you are properly organised to enjoy your well-earned rewards.


The value of an investment with St. James’s Place will be directly linked to the performance of the funds selected and the value may fall as well as rise. You may get back less than the amount invested.

An investment in equities does not provide the security of capital associated with a deposit account with a bank or building society.

Business Relief qualifying investments are illiquid investments, subject to future and retrospective tax changes and as such are suitable only for experienced, sophisticated or high net worth investors who accept that they may get back significantly less than the original investment.

The levels and bases of taxation and reliefs from taxation are generally dependent on individual circumstances.

Trusts and some areas of Inheritance Tax Planning not regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority.

Covid insurance: get what you’re owed

What does the recent Supreme Court judgment on business interruption insurance and Covid-19 mean for you?

Covid insurance: get what you’re owed

In a landmark legal case in January, the Supreme Court ruled that many insurance companies have to pay out business interruption insurance to policyholders affected by the Covid-19 pandemic. It has been estimated by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) that some 370,000 firms could be affected, with payments totalling approximately £1.2 billion1. The test case was brought by the FCA, and centres on certain disease and prevention of access clauses in business interruption policies.

But who exactly is affected, and what should you do if you think your business insurance policy is one that has the relevant clauses? “If your policy wording mentions cover for notifiable human disease within a set radius (and without a specified list of diseases), or denial of access/inability to use your premises due to restrictions/mandatory closure as a result of notifiable human disease (again without a specified list of diseases) then you might be able to submit a claim,” explains Peter Blanc, Group CEO of insurance broker Aston Lark. “In the first instance, you should contact your broker, who will check your specific wording. If you do happen to have one of the small number of applicable policies then your broker should help you to submit the claim accordingly.”

Daniel Duckett, owner of Lazy Claire Patisserie in Northern Ireland, one of many small businesses affected by the pandemic, echoes this advice. “I would advise businesses who believe they have appropriate cover to scrutinise their wording (if it wasn’t covered in the FCA test case, which couldn’t address every single wording available) and to partner with their broker closely to determine whether cover exists. If it does, they should continue to fight for indemnity and advance complaints to the Financial Ombudsman Service if necessary.”

However, Peter sounds a note of caution: “Beware though: you’ll still need to prove your loss. If you’re as profitable now as you were before the pandemic, there’ll be no claim payment.”

Making claims

Daniel’s insurer declined his business interruption claim, as a result of which he, along with two other owners of small businesses, Mark Killick from Media Zoo and Simon Ager from the Pinnacle Climbing Centre, formed an action group of companies who had been denied a business interruption payout.

“Our members range from cafes, hair salons and aestheticians to recruitment companies, and there doesn’t seem to be any sector that isn’t represented,” says Daniel. “Nearly every single business was depending on this cover to continue to survive. Many were in dire straits and desperately needed some form of payout.” The group’s legal team at Mishcon guided them through the process, and by compiling information the group itself also became an important source for other affected businesses.

The Supreme Court ruling means that many of these businesses should now receive a payout. Lazy Claire’s policy wording was one of the categories covered specifically by the legislation, meaning its claim should easily be advanced. “The Supreme Court ruling is in principle great, and does provide clarity,” notes Daniel. However, he points out that others have not been so lucky, and that, thus far, his company has not received an interim payment or final settlement offer.

Planning for the future

Although it is impossible to plan for every eventuality, Covid-19 has highlighted for many the importance of getting a strong, comprehensive insurance policy suited to their needs.

“I still see the value in insurance and understand that not every single situation may be covered by a policy,” says Daniel. “This has formed my view that all stakeholders in the insurance industry – policyholders, insurers, the Association of British Insurers and the FCA – must begin strong dialogue to ensure expectations are being met and that policies are written in such a way that it is clear what is covered and excluded.”

“Using a good broker who helps businesses to understand their risks, mitigate them and then transfer the remainder to insurers is always the best advice,” says Peter. “Comprehensive coverage might be the right answer for you, but equally a carefully crafted self-insurance programme could work and prove to be more financially viable. Make sure that your broker is a true risk advice partner to your business and work with them to protect your world.”

But he highlights in particular “early engagement” as being of paramount importance. “The insurance market has been hit by an array of challenges in recent years – Solvency II, Covid, storms/floods – and capacity has reduced dramatically, resulting in a very ‘hard’ insurance market. It is vital that your broker engages early in the market on your behalf to avoid any unpleasant shocks.”

If you’d like to find out more about business insurance, talk to your St. James’s Place partner


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Source

1. Arthur Cox, Briefing, January 2021

Brexit: recruiting overseas workers

As of 1 January, the rules on recruiting staff from the EU have changed. What do employers need to know about the new system?

Brexit: recruiting overseas workers

Like it or not, Brexit is now a reality, and it is already having an impact on businesses of all sizes. One of the key changes is in the recruitment of talent from abroad: previously, workers could live and work anywhere in the European Union without restrictions, but as of 1 January, staff from outside the UK (excluding the Republic of Ireland) must meet a specific set of requirements in order to obtain a visa.

“In essence, this will mean that all EU nationals and non-EU nationals will be treated equally for the purposes of entering the UK, and will be subject to the same immigration rules,” explains Lisa Alexander, Senior HR Consultant at HR outsourcing consultancy Fitzgerald HR. “This means that EU nationals will be required to pay for and apply for a visa well in advance of their travel.”

Points mean placements

Although there are other routes by which workers can become eligible to live and work in the UK (the Global Talent route for highly skilled workers; the graduate route for international students completing a degree in the UK; intra-company transfers; and specialist visas for those working in start-ups and innovation, health and care, the creative industries, sport and horticulture), the majority of businesses will employ staff through the Skilled Worker route.

“The skilled worker visa is granted to individuals with a job offer, who are required to earn a minimum of 70 points to be eligible,” says Lisa. “There is a two-stage test for those points. For stage one, an applicant must meet all of the criteria, which will gain them a maximum of 50 points, and then for stage two an applicant must earn a minimum of 20 points to make them eligible to apply for the visa. The criteria in stage one are mandatory, whereas those in stage two are interchangeable and can be traded for another.”

The mandatory criteria are as follows:

  • The applicant has a job offer from a Home Office licensed sponsor
  • The job offer is at the required skill level – RQF 3 or above (A Level and equivalent)
  • The applicant speaks English to the required standard

In addition, a salary requirement must be met, which is the higher of either:

  • The general salary threshold of £25,600, or
  • The specific salary requirement for their occupation, known as the ‘going rate’

If the job offer is less than the minimum salary requirement, but no less than £20,480, an applicant may still be eligible if they have:

  • A job offer in a specific shortage occupation
  • A PhD relevant to the job
  • A PhD in a science, technology, engineering or mathematics (STEM) subject relevant to the job

Obligations for employers

Under the new regulations, employers must apply to become a registered sponsor if they wish to recruit through the Skilled Worker scheme – a process that takes eight weeks. There are also associated costs – for medium and large organisations sponsoring a worker for the maximum five years, this could be as much as £5,000.

A key consideration for businesses, Lisa emphasises, is preparedness. “Sponsorship needs to be in place before you recruit a worker from outside the UK. So, if you don’t currently hold a sponsorship licence, you should consider applying for one,” she advises.

In addition, it’s important to be aware that your existing employees who are EU nationals are now obliged to register under the EU Settlement Scheme. “Employers should encourage them and qualifying family members to register under the EU settlement scheme as soon as possible; although they can’t enforce that, they can encourage and promote it. Employers can also consider ramping up internal communications about what the recruitment process will look like in future and reviewing their internal processes to factor in the relevant timelines for going down the sponsorship route,” says Lisa.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

5 things start-ups get wrong

Richard Murray of business growth advisors Elephant’s Child looks at classic errors made by small businesses… and how to avoid them

5 things start-ups get wrong

1. Failing to understand the purpose of the business

Many entrepreneurs fail to determine the core purpose of their business and pursue ideas they think will be good rather than finding out what customers actually want or need. Every business needs to define its purpose by asking hard questions. What’s the core proposition and why should customers be interested? What are you offering that people will pay for and what demand does it satisfy? Businesses need to set this thinking against a wider social purpose; why do we exist and what does the world lose if we don’t do this?

Asking these ‘what and why’ questions and doing your research will help define your purpose and, armed with that, create a much better chance of reaching your target market.

2. Not having a business plan 

Creating a written business plan seems like a given, yet the vast majority of companies don’t have one. It’s vital to have this formal road map for your company, providing a defined, clear sense of purpose, direction and vision for the business. The plan should outline key objectives, targets and strategies for every aspect of the enterprise, including marketing, sales investment and growth. In this area we see huge contrast from no plan at all, through plans that live in people’s heads to a plan that runs to hundreds of pages, which may feel like more of an ideology than a plan.

Making it work requires a culture that embraces planning and sharing the business plan with staff. By showing people their role in it, the journey you want to take them on and the potential rewards engenders a feeling of belonging, stability, a sense of direction and being valued. Many studies show both a plan and supporting culture are crucial to commercial success.

3. The ‘story in numbers’ is missing

Even more enterprises fail to define their ‘story in numbers’ – the hard, factual figures that underpin the success of a business plan. These might, for example, include determining the value of your market and level of new business needed to make a profit, defining how many staff you need, operating costs, marketing and sales budgets and capital investment levels.

Determining these key ‘numbers’ and being acutely aware of them enables you to know what has to be achieved to keep the lights on. Initially, it’s about defining as much detail as possibleon a sort of trial profit and loss budget basis – essentially, a forecast. However, as more concrete data and results emerge, it becomes easier to refine and change the business to optimise it.

4.  Unclear ideology and values

Businesses frequently feel behaviour and values aren’t really a priority – unless they’re a specific selling point. However, they determine how a company fulfils its purpose and plan, what it will and won’t do as a business and signals that it does things the right way – particularly on ‘hot’ issues like ESG, diversity and inclusion.

In today’s environment, having clarity about behaviours and values is good for business but also for recruiting talent, as people today increasingly take company values and ethics into account when seeking employment. Produce a statement of values and make it available to your staff and externally. Employees should understand what it means to work in the organisation, and your values must be projected externally through your marketing, social media channels and all aspects of your output. Use your values and behaviours to create a business environment that provides psychological safety, something companies tend to get wrong or overlook.

5.  Winning business is not made a priority

A big issue for many start-ups is that, rather than focusing on winning business, they try to create a niche for themselves too quickly, which can actually be self-limiting and make it difficult to generate income.

You need to prioritise winning new business and consider any potential openings that materialise, because all your core objectives, including ideological ones, are much easier to deliver with income. While it’s important to have a purpose, plan and values, you need to be agile and pivot to exploit new opportunities and changing markets as they emerge.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

3 questions acquirers are asking

In extraordinary times buyers want to know how your business has traded through the pandemic and more about its future prospects

3 questions acquirers are asking

Despite the pandemic, good quality merger and acquisition (M&A) deals are still being done, but buyers are asking searching questions around companies’ responses to Covid-19 and their prospects for success beyond the pandemic, says Andrew Shepperd, Co-Founder of business broker and corporate finance advisory firm Entrepreneurs Hub.

“There are two things you might assume,” he says. “Either that deals aren’t being done or if they are being done, they are opportunistic deals. But actually, what we are finding is that good M&A is happening, good acquirers have still got strong balance sheets and they are acquiring in a very responsible way. The obvious question is, ‘are they cut-price deals that are unfavourable to the vendor?’ And the answer is ‘no’.”

While these acquirers continue to behave in a responsible way, they have three Covid-19-related questions as part of their due diligence: How have you performed through the pandemic? What are the future prospects of the business? To what extent did you leverage Covid support and how have you reported it in your books?

1. How have you performed through the pandemic?

Acquirers are generally very understanding about the challenges companies have faced during the outbreak, says Andrew. In many ways they now feel more confident about the businesses they are buying because those that are still trading have already demonstrated real resilience.

They anticipate contracted revenues through the worst months and so also want to know what business was like beforehand and what it looks like in the months ahead. What they are looking for is a trend line that will enable them to value based on business norms rather than the depressed period of lockdown.

Andrew says: “They will want to understand what the pandemic was like for you. What did it feel like in the business? What did your customers do? What did you do with your staff? They’ll also want to know whether you kept operating fully or closed down, how you maintained customer obligations, what happened to your cash, did your projects pause or get cancelled altogether, did you pick up different kinds of work, and was the size of your orders bigger or smaller than normal?

Overall, they are looking for the colour that will give them a clearer understanding of your business.

2. What are the future prospects for the business?

Inevitably, acquirers will want to understand how you will continue to be successful when the pandemic is over. If your products have been in demand during the crisis, how will you maintain sales, and if you pivoted to produce products like hand sanitisers or perspex masks, will demand remain or how will you return to your previous business model?

But acquirers will also want to understand how you’ve embraced the digital transformation in order to meet the demands of an altered business environment. Andrew is regularly hearing questions from acquirers, particularly in the tech sector, about a target company’s cloud strategy and how they are addressing customers’ problems through the cloud. They want to know about online information, online ordering and ordering support and how online orders are fulfilled.

Andrew says: “I’ve seen a number of businesses that I work with, and these are privately owned SME businesses, whose revenues have gone through the roof by going online. If you went back 10 months ago when Covid was starting and some of their traditional customers and traditional ordering and fulfilment were jeopardised, revenue flows were highly disrupted. By going online not only have they recovered but they have grown more quickly.”

3. To what extent did you leverage Covid support?

Acquirers don’t just want to know whether you took advantage of the Job Retention Scheme, the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme or the Bounce Back Loan Scheme. They also want clarity around how these are reported in your books.

Having taken advantage of this support is not seen negatively and it is often viewed as just good business sense, since the loans were offered on extremely favourable terms and could be used to finance expansion. While businesses are generally considered to have demonstrated resilience by continuing to trade through lockdown, acquirers will want to reassure themselves that your success doesn’t rely on government support.

“They are assuming that businesses have taken the support and generally acquirers are very supportive, says Andrew. “They just want it reported clearly. Generally, it is broken out onto a separate line of your profit and loss report and they are fine with it.”

Finally, don’t be surprised if an acquirer asks you how you are with real feeling. Perhaps a positive outcome of the pandemic is that a touch of humanity has returned to mergers and acquisitions, says Andrew. He has seen genuine concern for business owners from acquirers who recognise the pressure they have been under in recent months.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Brexit: what are the opportunities?

UK SMEs are in a good position to exploit markets beyond Europe, regardless of any trade agreements

Brexit: what are the opportunities?

Now the UK has fully transitioned from the EU many SMEs are understandably looking to global export markets to expand and strengthen their businesses as the dust settles on the new trading arrangement with Europe.

Unsurprisingly, much has been made about the necessity of securing trade deals – but this should not be the only factor for entrepreneurs thinking of exporting goods and services overseas, argues Liam Smyth, Director of Trade with the British Chambers of Commerce

“The reality is that we ultimately had trading agreements with 64 countries via the EU, yet in 2019 UK traders actually exported to 192 countries, including the US – one of our biggest markets despite having no trade agreement1."

Market opportunities

While international agreements help reduce trade barriers, Liam says that when considering exporting to non-EU countries, the starting point is market opportunity. “Having worked out the value proposition for your product or service, you need to identify the best market that will enable you to move fast and grow.

“Part of that is about identifying how easy it will be to sell your products and find a market in a particular country. You need to understand its business culture, local competitors and what makes your product unique and ease of ‘repatriating’ profits and making investments. Other key factors are access to a good supply of local talent with appropriate skills and expertise, effective communications and technology, and rules on ‘local content’.

While opportunities are market and sector dependent, Liam believes there remains great potential for the UK‘s SME exporters in the US under its new more outward-focused administration. Other vibrant markets include an increasingly economically liberal India, and African countries already trading with the UK.

And he predicts there could be strong demand for UK companies operating in food and drink, advanced manufacturing, engineering, technology, and professional and financial services.

Networking and advice

Liam advises: “Before deciding your market, exploit your LinkedIn and other networks to make contacts with business people from the UK, preferably from your sector, for dispassionate advice and inside knowledge about operating ‘on the ground’ in your target geography.

“Consider consulting with professional advisors and utilising the excellent export-related resources and expertise provided by the Department for Trade & Industry (DiT), and organisations like British Chambers of Commerce that can help with tricky trading paperwork.”

Demystifying trading fears

Entrepreneur Nick Devine is founder and Managing Director of JS3 Global, an SME helping businesses across the world to implement Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solutions.

For him, the emerging economies of South America, the Gulf States, Indonesia and Vietnam offer great exporting possibilities for UK entrepreneurs, who should take advantage of their nation’s global reputation for knowledge, services and advanced manufacturing expertise.

“However, there’s a need to demystify fears over trading overseas,” he says. “The global market has become much closer and more aligned in its business practices and it’s now easier to work in other countries, that are actually very open to British companies.

“Language doesn’t need to be a barrier – decision makers in most countries tend to speak English or will endeavour to do so. Social media has made international networking with potential overseas business partners possible for even the smallest start-ups. Take advantage of that and visit the potential markets and contacts you’ve made, pandemic restrictions permitting.”

He adds: “Logistically, SMEs should lean on technology to help them establish and manage robust supply chains with new, non-EU trade partners."

Lastly, he advises SMEs to set up a central, international, multilingual website along with ‘local’ websites in each country they operate in.

“This will raise your company’s profile and google ranking, generating more attention from potential clients, customers, suppliers and partners in your overseas markets.”

 

 


1. Annual report on the implememtation of EU trade agreements, European Commission, 12 November 2020

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Building a flexible future

Will emerging from the pandemic see businesses head back to the office, or will flexible working become the status quo

Building a flexible future

You must stay at home.” It was these five words from the Prime Minister on 23 March 2020 that transformed the working world. Prior to the pandemic, 87% of people wanted to work flexibly in the hope of achieving benefits including better work-life balance, more job satisfaction, reduced stress and increased productivity. Yet just 11% of jobs were advertised as being flexible, according to the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)1. Then overnight the UK became home to a largely remote workforce – a silver lining amid a global crisis for those employees who had been craving more flexibility in their working lives, but whose employers were resistant.

“Companies who previously were not open to such flexibility have had their eyes opened to what’s possible, and a lot of companies are viewing this as an opportunity to change the way they work,” explains Claire Ward, Founder of SME HR consultancy The HR Hub. And that changes business, too. The CIPD says that improved engagement – one of the benefits of flexible working – can account for the generation of 43% more revenue and improves performance by 20%. The normalisation and support of flexible working, moreover, can help reduce an organisation’s gender pay gap and encourages a more diverse workforce, which, according to McKinsey, could add £150 billion annually to the UK economy by 20252. Offering flexible working also means businesses get the best of the bunch. Some 92% of people want to work flexibly, so offering this opens up a business talent pool, not to mention expanding your geographical talent pool too3.

There are of course some limitations, in particular when it comes to businesses that rely on creativity – brainstorming sessions, when done remotely, simply aren’t as effective. But this won’t necessarily be the case for long. “We’re already seeing technology that helps to break those creativity barriers, which have likely had their development accelerated over the past few months,” says Ward. Other disadvantages include increased loneliness and, for some companies, the financial outlay of supporting flexible working – though in the context of the bigger picture this cost is minimal.

“Generally, the advantages outweigh any disadvantages,” explains Claire McCartney, Senior Resourcing and Inclusion Adviser at the CIPD. “Organisations should see a boost in productivity, a more engaged workforce, a diverse workforce and the ability to attract top talent.”

The four-day week

While working from home took the flexible working spotlight in 2020, prior to the pandemic the four-day week – whereby employees work four days instead of five without having their salary reduced – was gaining in popularity.

Henley Business School’s pre-pandemic white paper Four Better or Four Worse delved into the world of the four-day week and revealed that the combined savings to UK businesses that had implemented this was £92 billion4. However, Professor James Walker, Director of Research at Henley Business School, points out a notable concern for business owners.

“While 75% believe a less rigid working structure is key to a harmonious and diverse workplace, for some the benefits are either unnecessary or not substantial enough to warrant implementation. The biggest concern for business leaders is customer availability,” says Professor Walker. The white paper reveals that 82% of businesses don’t offer a four-day week as they believe employee availability to the customer outweighs the need for more flexible working, while nearly three quarters feel it would be difficult to implement, particularly in the case of small businesses.

Emerging from the pandemic

Remote working has become the go-to of flexible working, but it’s important to remember that this was forced upon us as the result of a global crisis. As we emerge from this pandemic and businesses reassess their working practices, they must consider all options. “There are many forms of flexible working, from remote, part-time and term-time working, to compressed hours, flexi-time and jobs shares,” says McCartney. “Employers will have to look beyond working from home otherwise risk creating a two-tier workforce of those who have the opportunity to benefit from remote working and flexibility and those who don’t.”

It could be, as Ward believes will be the case for SMEs, that there will be a shift towards businesses implementing core office days, which, as with any alternative that doesn’t require a full-capacity office, offers the bonus of reducing a business’s carbon footprint.

But before any decisions are made, a dialogue needs to happen. “There is an imperative to open up conversations between employers and their employees, to trial and evaluate different forms of flexible employment which best suit the contexts and workplace roles,” advises Professor Walker. After all, shifting an entire sector into a particular form of flexible working is not only what Professor Walker describes as a “drastic step” but, ironically, not very flexible at all.

 

1,2,3. Felxible working: the business case, CIPD, November 2018

4. Four better or four worse, Henley Business School, July 2019

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

How to go social prospecting

Using social networks to find, engage and win customers is key to success in the pandemic and beyond

How to go social prospecting

When PR agency Harvey & Hugo lost a third of its financial sector clients at the start of the first lockdown, owner Charlotte Nichols took to social media for salvation.

“I was panicking,” she says. “But as I sat on my sofa in my pyjamas, I began to rekindle my love for social media. It had helped me build my business after launching in 2009 and once again it was winning new clients.”

Charlotte was social prospecting, using social media and online networks to identify, research and engage with prospective new customers and sales opportunities.

“When we first launched, I followed Twitter hashtags from our region and built up a little community of potential clients. I created website content and shared little snippets on social media,” she explains. “As time went on even though we created good content we became complacent in generating leads. Last March I researched which sectors were doing well and started prospecting again. This is something any start-up can do.

Building up prospects

Phil Hawkins, founder and director of social media agency Colour Me Social, says the first step is determining who you are going to target and which social media channel you will find them on. This includes Facebook, LinkedIn, Instagram, Twitter, YouTube and TikTok, which apart from keeping families entertained over the pandemic with ping-pong videos, has created TikTok For Business, helping SMEs create stories and set up ads on the site.

There are several social prospecting tools entrepreneurs can use, including LinkedIn Premium with its unlimited searches on potential prospects and Ninja Outreach which can find social media influencers. But it is also about just getting on Twitter and LinkedIn and searching for keywords and topics relevant to your business.

“Look through the posts and comments to find conversations that you can join,” advises Phil. “Join LinkedIn groups and share advice. Show yourself as a helpful expert.”

Charlotte says ‘listening’ on social media can also help uncover opportunities such as people asking for recommendations in your sector. “There may be a complaint from a customer giving you an opportunity to approach them,” she explains. “Hopefully, you will soon build up a list of prospects who you follow and who follow you.”

Engaging potential customers

The next stage is engaging the prospects. “Don’t give it the ‘hard sell’. Instead, do it softly through liking their content and putting up your own articles, thought leadership pieces or case studies,” Charlotte explains. “You need to build trust and credibility. Without that it will be hard to progress to sale.”

You need to research where and when your target consumes their media. Typically, Facebook and Instagram are very video and image-led, whilst blogs and whitepapers work best on LinkedIn.

Jonathan Wagstaffe, tech entrepreneur and visiting fellow at Cranfield University, advises following the BBC’s founding principles. “It is about educating, informing and entertaining,” he says. “Think about the 20 questions you get asked a lot as a business and develop content pieces which answer them. This should lead to questions from prospects about what your product is. The key is to get potential customers talking about you.”

Securing the deal

The final stage is turning the prospects into new business. “In the old world I would invite prospects offline to meet up and have a coffee. What are they looking for?” says Charlotte. “They may not want to do business now but if they are the right client then keep trying both on and offline.”

That contact is especially important now that those face-to-face coffees seem a distant memory.

“It’s important to remind people that you are here,” Charlotte says. “Be human, genuine and authentic. Sometimes on social media you can forget you are talking to real people. Alongside our educational content we have also introduced the lockdown diary of my dog Hugo playing scrabble and eating noodles.”

Phil says building such a personal brand is fundamental both now and post-pandemic. “People buy people,” he says. “Be yourself, post regularly and be patient and social prospecting can help your business grow.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Capital gains tax under review

The government is considering a report that suggests a big increase in the tax may be needed

Capital gains tax under review

Chancellor Rishi Sunak is considering a report1 which says that dramatically increasing capital gains tax could make it simpler and fairer. Although no decision has yet been taken, a worst-case scenario for additional rate tax paying entrepreneurs could see some of those who currently qualify for Business Asset Disposal Relief facing a CGT rise from 10% to 45%.

In the face of the report from the Office of Tax Simplification (OTS) it’s important that you begin careful tax planning to ensure you don’t pay more tax than is necessary.  There is a variety of measures you can take, from changing your remuneration strategy to a partial sale but a strategy tailored to your needs requires expert advice.

The report suggests aligning CGT more closely to income tax. Basic-rate taxpayers currently pay 10% CGT on assets and 18% on property, while higher-rate taxpayers are charged 20% on assets and 28% on property. These rates are considerably lower than income tax, which is charged at rates of 20%, 40% and 45%.

Simon Martin, Regional Technical Manager at St. James’s Place, says: “Currently, if you sell a business for £1 million, as long as it qualifies for Business Asset Disposal Relief you pay a maximum £100,000 in CGT. But if you’re an additional rate taxpayer and CGT is aligned with income tax, you’d pay £450,000, so it could be a significant increase.”

Slashing the exemption

The OTS has also suggested reducing the annual CGT exemption from £12,300 to around £5,000 and reassessing Business Asset Disposal Relief and Investors’ Relief, which it says are not working as an incentivise for investment. The report also looks at the way CGT and inheritance tax work together, and in particular the CGT benefit someone receives when they inherit an asset.

Simon says that if you are planning for a business exit in the near term  ensuring you qualify for Business Asset Disposal Relief will help limit your CGT liability. If you’re close to a sale, getting the deal done before any CGT changes would also be prudent, he says. Alternatively,  When you plan to continue your business for the medium to long term, CGT changes alone may not push you to dramatically change your exit timescales. However, other planning such as pension contributions and an efficient remuneration strategy can help the ultimate CGT position by extracting capital from the business over time. 

A St. James's Place Partner will be able to help you develop an overarching  financial plan that encompasses both your personal and business assets. Taking advantage of your annual CGT exemption, which currently stands at £12,300 (£24,600 for a couple), could play an important part in limiting your overall CGT liability. And a St. James's Place Partner could help you use your dividend and savings allowances.

Tax-efficient remuneration

It’s also important to ensure that you have a tax-efficient remuneration structure within your company. This involves more than simply taking the maximum £50,000 a year in dividends to stay within the 7.5% tax bracket. You could, for example, give your spouse a 50% shareholding so that he/she can also withdraw dividends at the lower tax rate and help to reduce your CGT liability over time. Maximising your pension contribution is also a useful way of removing capital from your business.

More fundamental approaches could include simply holding on to your business and growing it further to limit the impact of any tax charge. A share buy-back could also form part of your strategy but this is highly specialised tax planning and you would need expert advice. Alternatively, you could consider a partial sale that could see you taking some money from the business at the current CGT rate and planning longer term for the rest.

Nigel Fox, an adviser at business growth consultants Elephants Child says: “There’s always a middle ground. Do you sell 25% of your business today, take some money off the table, accept the tax that you pay and continue to build either as an executive or just as a shareholder? Ultimately, when you come to retire, you sell the rest, accept that there is some tax to pay but you might have been able to put in some inheritance tax planning or structure around trusts that will minimise it at that point.”

Crystalising losses

Nigel also suggests crystalising any capital losses to offset against your capital gains. For example, if you have shares that have fallen in value you may be able to offset these against your tax charge when you exit.

“How you plan your taxes is entirely down to your personal circumstances, your personal risk appetite, your situation in life and what you want to do,” says Nigel. “What I would say is the devil is in the detail. Until you know the detail of what any legislation says, it’s difficult to make those plans.”

If you would like help with tax planning, talk to your St. James’s Place Partner.


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time and are dependent on individual circumstances.

Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.
The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

1 OTS Capital Gains Tax Review: Simplifying by design, 11 November 2020

Getting support to raise your game

We take a look at some government-backed schemes designed to make SMEs more competitive and resilient amid economic uncertainty

Getting support to raise your game

The government has provided many valuable financial support measures to help firms weather the storm of the pandemic, ranging from furlough to CBILs loans. But businesses cannot afford to just take the money, hunker down and wait for pandemic-driven economic uncertainty to pass, argues Martin Brown of leading business growth advisers Elephants Child.

“Enterprises must be pro-active and agile to remain competitive and resilient,“ he says. “One way to start is to take advantage of government-funded training schemes designed to make companies better able to compete within their own markets or pivot to new ones.”

Leading the way

A relatively new and government scheme worth considering is the Small Business Leadership Programme (SBLP), designed for companies with two to 249 employees. Delivered via 20 leading Business Schools, the free 10-week programme is designed to help businesses deal with the impact of Covid-19 while developing their productivity and long-term growth potential.

Two senior managers from each company take part in interactive weekly webinars and peer-to-peer sessions and receive personalised support from a range of business school experts covering areas including HR, operations and supply chains, productivity and profitability, sustainability and how to be more resilient.

Driving performance

Jane Pallister, Entrepreneur in Residence at Staffordshire University Business School, manages the SBLP scheme for Staffordshire and beyond. She says: “The programme removes senior managers' feeling of isolation in dealing with the commercial impact of the pandemic and consolidates steps they’re already taking. 

“We share new marketing, finance, operations and employee engagement models to drive performance and productivity, while also focusing on employee support and wellbeing. We’re currently recruiting for the next cohort, due to start in January 2021.” 

Participant Kevin O’Mara, Managing Director of Staffordshire-based specialist executive chauffeuring business, Advanced Journey Chauffeuring, says the scheme has been a lifeline.

He explains: “We were losing revenue and visibility through the pandemic but the course inspired us to launch a communications exercise to let our customers know we were back in action and the steps we’d taken to ensure Covid-safe travel, and really put ourselves ‘out there’ on social media platforms and virtual business marketing groups. 

“As a result, we’ve attracted major new corporate clients who’d lost their incumbent service-providers through Covid-19. We couldn’t have turned things around without the help, expert advice and support we received to navigate us through some critical decision making.”

Peer networks

Another programme designed to strengthen businesses is peernetworks.co.uk, which brings together small groups of SME business owners across the UK to collaboratively develop solutions to common business challenges, such as EU transition, recovering from Covid-19, HR, technology and finance.

Led by the UK’s 38 Local Enterprise Partnerships, Peer Networks is free to join and offers access to one-to-one mentoring, coaching and advice, with each group led by a skilled professional facilitator. Martin says: “It provides the benefits of group learning in a collegiate and non-intimidating environment, offering the benefits of knowledge-sharing and being in a team to examine business, culture and related personal issues in a pragmatic way.”

It’s also worth taking a look at the government-supported Recovery Advice for Business Service run by Enterprise Nation, which gives SMEs access to business advisers and experts on business topics across all sectors to help them bounce back from the pandemic.

Get advice

Summing up, Martin says: “The highlighted examples are just a taste of what is available – but trying to make sense of the bewildering choice of state funded and private options out there is a challenging and time-consuming task.”

Before making any decisions, speak to your St. James’s Place Partner who will work with Entrepreneur Club to find the most appropriate provider for you.


Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Choosing an online marketplace

Online marketplaces can be a fast-track route to grow sales. But meticulous planning and execution is essential for success

Choosing an online marketplace

Marketplaces such as Amazon, eBay, or Etsy can be lucrative sales channels for SMEs. Andy Geldman, founder of Web Retailer, a website dedicated to providing information and research about marketplaces, says the primary benefit is the huge number of serious buyers on these websites which provide ‘ready-made’ large audiences to tap into. 

Research by ChannelAdvisor conducted in August 2020 actually shows that since the outbreak of Covid-19, 58% of UK consumers who have purchased online, discovered those products by browsing marketplaces – higher than any other method of finding products (such as brand or retailer websites, search engines or social media) .  

It is also relatively easy for businesses to get up and running, and what Andy has found is that being on a marketplace is often a trigger to start selling internationally. He says: “If businesses start selling on an Amazon or eBay in the UK, they will quickly realise that adding countries to that sales channel – using these same marketplaces – is not that big a leap.”

But, says Andy, it’s not all upside: “With large marketplaces comes lots of competition. This is ultimately why they are so successful. They are pitting sellers against each other to compete on price (primarily), but also on service and quality of information. It can be really difficult and expensive to stand out, particularly if you don’t have a recognised brand.”

Sifting through the options

“There are plenty of online marketplaces, but that doesn’t mean there are plenty of strong marketplaces. And they won’t all be appropriate for your business. It takes a lot of careful thought and planning to select the right one(s) for you.” says Andy. In fact, Web Retailer recently published an article reviewing the top 17 online marketplaces for selling to UK customers.   

He says for most businesses targeting UK customers, Amazon and eBay are the obvious choices, simply because they sell such a wide product range and because of their size. Amazon has more than 20 times, and eBay more than 10 times, the number of website visits than Etsy, the third most popular marketplace in the UK . 

Outside of the ‘big 2’, most marketplaces could be described as semi-niche or niche. Etsy and Notonthehighstreet have an emphasis on arts, crafts, and gifts. Then there are category-specific niche marketplaces such as Wayfair (homewares), Game (e-gaming) or Zalando (fashion).

For businesses interested in exporting, Andy says this is very country specific. In the US and Europe, Amazon is again the market leader. It is also expanding rapidly in other markets such as Australia and Latin America. 

For those looking to China as a market, the Chinese ecommerce giants have marketplaces set up specifically for overseas businesses. The main options would be Alibaba’s TMallGlobal and JD Group’s JD Worldwide. Royal Mail has even set up a ‘store within a store’ for UK businesses to sell through TMallGlobal. Andy recommends businesses considering ‘e-exporting’ look at the UK Department for International Trade's guidance as a starting point. 

Businesses should also not think online marketplaces are only for business to consumer (B2C) markets. For B2B businesses, Amazon is again the dominant player through Amazon Business. According to its website, it has over a million business buyers worldwide.

Taking the plunge (or not)

Izabela Catiru, product marketing manager at ChannelAdvisor, an e-commerce cloud platform used by businesses to manage and streamline their e-commerce operations, says nearly all products can be sold through marketplaces and that there are hardly any unsuitable products. But she does highlight a number of categories that consistently perform the best: clothing, fashion and accessories; health and beauty; and home and garden products.

She says it’s probably easier to say which businesses would not be a good fit – those which operate with very thin margins: “Marketplaces take a percentage of sales, so do the payment providers such as Paypal or Stripe. On top of that, investing in advertising on the larger marketplaces is really a prerequisite for success. These costs add up and can make the channel unviable.”

The other caution she sounds is that businesses should make sure they are able to meet the fulfilment requirements of their chosen marketplaces, which are often quite demanding: “Marketplaces will have minimum standards for things like delivery times. If you persistently fail to meet these or if you run out of stock, you might be removed from the marketplace which can be hugely damaging.”

However, says Izabela, this is precisely the reason that the fulfilment services provided by some of the marketplaces (Amazon in particular) are so popular. For a fee, businesses can have their products collected by Amazon and delivered to customers, or they can ship a bulk pallet to Amazon for it to manage the fulfilment process. 

But she also stresses that the smaller or niche marketplaces shouldn’t be ignored: “Even though they won’t have the volume of sales going through them and they may not have the logistical support offerings of the larger marketplaces, they might be better because it could be easier to generate sales. These niche marketplaces tend to have ‘high intent’ audiences, and the competition might be less too.” 
 


Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab.

5 start-up lessons from 2020

What new businesses can learn from those that have survived and thrived through the past few extraordinary months

5 start-up lessons from 2020

Ian Duffew, a consultant working with business growth advisors Elephants Child, has advised companies as they grappled with the challenges posed by the Covid-19 pandemic. He previously worked at a senior level across industry sectors and has served as a non-executive director on the boards of several SMEs and believes there are some essential lessons that start-ups can learn from those that thrived in 2020. 

1. Stay close to your customers

Start-up companies have enjoyed real success by staying in regular dialogue with their key customers and providing a responsive and supportive service.  As a result, these SMEs were in the right place at the right time to assist clients who needed help. Companies that survived prioritised their key customers, continuing to meet with them on a planned and scheduled basis. Normal service continued. 

Where it was possible, they met in person, obviously taking precautions and sticking to strict social distancing rules, wearing PPE and washing hands regularly. However, where face-to-face meetings were not possible, these companies made maximum use of technology by becoming proficient with Teams, Zoom and other meeting applications. They looked for new and innovative ways to communicate and then adapted quickly.

2. Be prepared to step outside of your comfort zone

In 2020, smart businesses responded to requests for support that were not necessarily part of their original offering. With the pandemic throwing up many different types of challenges, customers needed (and still need) support that probably wasn’t in any initial business plan. Successful SMEs took the risk, stepped outside of their comfort zone, and learned quickly.  

Ian says: “A great example of this is an engineering SME that set up to provide equipment maintenance. They secured an order and started work on a client site, servicing assets.  Within a week, the client came to them and explained that another supplier he regularly used for general site infrastructure maintenance was temporarily unavailable. The client asked if the SME would be prepared to take this work on. After an internal Teams meeting that afternoon, and an assessment of the potential risks, they agreed to take on the extra work. As a result, the original order was extended by 90 days, the SME has a new string to its bow, and a significant amount of goodwill is now stored up with that client.”

3. Look after your cash 

Start-ups that survived 2020 managed their cashflow very carefully. Overheads were kept to an absolute minimum and robust plans were in place to drive down debtor days. Those that are still trading frequently took the opportunity to negotiate better payment terms, both with customers and suppliers. Some moved to pro forma invoicing as standard, significantly reducing the risk of the bad debt that has seen some start-ups fail in the last 12 months.

Making good use of government support, such as the Bounce Back and CBILS loans has also been an important ingredient for success. Ian says: “Many companies have taken these loans in order to survive but some have used this cash injection to grow, looking at ways to invest this money and make it work hard for the business.” 

4. Keep on trading

In the early days of the pandemic, when the furlough scheme first provided the opportunity to get people off the payroll, a lot of start-up SMEs took the decision to ‘mothball’ for three or even six months. Others opted against this, recognising instead that this was an opportunity to grow into competitor space and, whilst some scaling down may have taken place, these businesses took the decision to keep trading and were there to fill in the gaps being created.   

Re-starting any business, having spent months out of action, is always difficult. Many of those re-entering the marketplace faced competition from active and thriving SMEs who had maintained a presence, stayed close to their clients and responded to additional requests as a result of gaps in the supply chain. Ian adds: “If you’re still operating when others aren’t, there will always be more opportunities available. Those that succeeded made sure clients knew they were open for business and were not afraid to ask for the work. The smart start-ups didn’t just assume they would automatically fill the vacuum, they were pro-active and positioned themselves to respond.”

5. Cash in on goodwill

Many customers that were well supported remained loyal to those who stepped up during 2020. In an unprecedented year, the creation of customer goodwill was hugely prevalent for those start-ups that kept going, and in difficult moments, some were able to cash in on the credits they had previously earned, both with customers and suppliers.

Ian recalls: “I was so encouraged recently by the news of a nine-month start-up that was struggling to continue. They had bent over backwards for a major customer throughout the summer but other orders they were expecting had been pushed back to 2021. They approached the customer to ask if there was anything he could do to help. Reflecting on the excellent support he had received from this business, he decided to bring forward and award them a project from his 2021 budget, with favourable payment terms too.” 

Many organisations generate high levels of goodwill.  Those that survived were not afraid to cash in on it. There have been few periods in recent decades that were as difficult for businesses than 2020. Start-ups that want to succeed in the future need only look at those companies that have thrived to find lessons that can underpin their own success long into the future.
 


Elephants Child Consultancy provide a consultative, analytic approach to leading, developing and implementing successful business strategies, and they are a corporate partner of St. James’s Place. Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Learning resilience from lobsters

What an unlikely alliance between a Welsh fisherman and a portrait photographer teaches us about business in the pandemic

Learning resilience from lobsters

A photoshoot for the Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs on a windy beach in North Wales may not be the place you’d expect a lockdown-beating business idea to be hatched. But with export routes shut down, fisherman Sion Williams and photographer Jude Edginton formed an unlikely alliance to save the lobster season and build a more resilient fisheries business.

Around 90% of the lobsters caught in Welsh waters are exported to China and Europe1. With Sion unable to reach these markets and Jude finding photographic commissions cancelled as lockdown loomed, the pair agreed on a classic business pivot. Jude promised to use his experience of marketing and storytelling to help sell Sion’s catch directly to consumers in London.

The agreement saw the creation of new business Lockdown Lobsters and demonstrates how seeking out new partnerships and different skills can help businesses to survive and thrive in tough times. While Sion, a proponent of sustainable fisheries, provided the lobsters, London-based Jude set about marketing them on What’s App, building a website and developing a plan to get the lobsters from the Irish Sea to dining tables in the capital within a few hours.

Marketing on What’s App

During an initial three-week period while the lobsters were being caught, Jude, whose regular job involves taking portraits of people ranging from Boris Johnson to Boris Becker and from Little Mix to Gogglebox stars, approached friends and business contacts in a What’s App campaign – some of those contacts were celebrity chefs and food critics. The approach was a success and by the time Jude made his first run from Wales to five drop-off points in London, socially distanced queues were waiting for the deliveries.

After the first three weekly deliveries there was a natural break when the lobsters shed their shells and fishing stopped. Jude used the time to develop the website and refine the operation, which now uses Zip cars for rapid delivery across the city. During this period his initial focus on business contacts paid off when a food and wine writer, who had received some of the lobsters, wrote a  three-page article on the experience in the FT magazine – helping them to sell-out the catch for the next six weeks.

Sion explains: “The lockdown due to the virus had a devastating effect on my business. Firstly, the merchants I sell a high percentage of my catch to stopped buying as their markets in Europe and Asia had closed, with no guarantees that they would be buying for the next five weeks, possibly five months. On top of this the local shellfish processor and restaurant closed due to the requirements of the lockdown. 

“Through Lockdown Lobsters I was able to carry on fishing and earning a living. I have also sold all my lobsters within the UK, reducing air miles and carbon footprint. Furthermore, we have established a connection with our customers by selling our story and giving our customers provenance of their seafood. I have learned that there is a market within the UK for our lobsters, it is a matter of making the customer aware of the availability of the high-quality seafood that is on their doorstep and getting it to them.”

Changing business models

Associate Professor and Head of Enterprise Education at Kingston University Martha Mador cited Lockdown Lobsters as an example of how some entrepreneurs were changing their business models to build resilience in the face of challenges such as the Covid-19 pandemic and Brexit. She explains that new relationships, greater use of digital and finding new ways to reach customers are all ingredients of the resilience that is needed for companies to thrive.

To help your business become more resilient, you need to find partnerships and supportive networks where ideas and concerns can be shared, she explains. You should also aim to use digital technology as much as possible, whether that’s how you interface with your customers, how they purchase your products or how you communicate. You can also look for new markets and prospect for clients digitally. New market opportunities can be tested easily with targeted advertising on Facebook and LinkedIn.

And make sure that you are managing your website so that it can easily be found in searches, says Martha. You could also consider developing a marketing app to make it simpler for customers to interact with you and buy your products on their phones. Another way to make your business more resilient is to put your products and services onto platforms which attract more customers, such as Etsy, eBay, Amazon or the many more specialist sites.

Martha explains: “You need to do something new which addresses this online world which we find ourselves in and make something of it. So, you need to redesign your services or your products, reconsider how you are getting to people, how you are reaching your customers and maybe pivot into different businesses or business models which are more heavily digital than previously. And I also think partnering and finding new people to work with and to develop new ideas and services with is important.”

Lockdown Lobsters is going from strength-to-strength and has recently begun delivering lobsters from Bridlington in Yorkshire, while fishermen in Inverness have sent lobsters on the overnight sleeper train to London to be distributed across the city.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

1. www.fishingnews.co.uk, 19 March 2018

Preparing for business exit in 2021

What to expect from buyers and how you can prepare if you want to sell your business in 2021

Preparing for business exit in 2021

While some businesses that have proved resilient in the pandemic have continued to be acquisition targets, for others exit plans were put on hold as Covid-19 disrupted trading. If you’re now thinking that 2021 could be the year for exit, we look ahead to see what to expect from buyers and how you can prepare.

Craig Hewitt-Dutton, Partner, LockDutton Corporate Finance, says: “No one can predict the future, but positive news about the pandemic – like a Covid-19 vaccine – could bring strong market growth in 2021, making it a very good year to sell a business. And it’s always the case that potential buyers will pay a premium price for the right business.”

There’s still demand, says Craig, from private equity investors, and some interest will be motivated by businesses protecting themselves against Covid-19 by diversifying. He also expects a new focus on acquiring UK companies as a reaction to the end of the Brexit transition period.

Whatever the business environment, Crawfurd Walker, Chief Revenue Officer for business growth advisors Elephants Child, says the same basic rules still largely apply if an entrepreneur is looking to exit in 2021. “Potential buyers will want to see a three-year business plan, sound trading figures and a good senior management team. As ever, they want to be confident about what they’re investing in – but even more so in this pandemic era.”

Proof of resilience

Both Craig and Crawfurd agree that how a business has responded to Covid-19 challenges is the new factor in determining how attractive it is to a prospective buyer. Crawfurd explains: “Buyers will want strong management that changed the business model to make it more flexible and resilient to something like Covid happening again and whatever the future business environment will be.”

Pre-sale negotiations and due diligence checks in 2021 could take longer than usual, says Crawfurd, and deals might be delayed until buyers have seen “six months’ of ‘new normal’ trading” so that a business can prove its resilience. “It depends on the company, and the changing pandemic situation, but that could be six months from October 2020, or from 1 January 2021.”

Business owners looking for a 2021 exit should bear in mind that a company saddled with debt will be even more off-putting for buyers than in previous years, says Craig, while the Covid-19 working-from-home revolution has reduced the importance of a company’s property assets. “The need for large, expensive-to-maintain offices is receding and buyers prefer leased property rather than anything owned outright.”

Entrepreneurs who mean to quit their business straight after its sale should also remember buyers need to feel sure the company can thrive without the person who created it. Crawfurd says: “Sometimes, the whole business is based around the owner so, in the nicest possible way, you need to ensure that you’re ‘redundant’. Have structures in place so the board can run it without you. Otherwise, the buyer could insist you stay on for a number of years.”

Contingency plans

A business will also be more attractive to buyers in 2021 if it can show it has contingencies in place for the UK’s new relationship with the EU. Craig says: “That includes ensuring employees who are EU citizens have applied for the right to stay in the UK by the June 2021 deadline.”

But Crawfurd stresses that preparation sooner rather than later is the way to put a business in the best position to sell at a good price: “There are exceptions but preparing properly for sale takes 2-3 years. If you temporarily put exit plans on hold because of the pandemic, review them again as quickly as you can so that you’re ready to sell in 2021.

If any of the issues in this article apply to you, contact your St. James’s Place Partner who can help you explore your options.


Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Managing Covid-19 debt

Businesses have borrowed heavily during the pandemic. Owner-managers face a whole new set of psychological and practical challenges

Managing Covid-19 debt

UK businesses borrowed five times more from banks between January and August 2020 than in the whole of 2019. According to EY Item Club1, over that eight-month period, new borrowings (net of repayments) totalled £43.8bn, compared to the £8.8bn of 2019.

Small businesses have increased their debt levels the most. While EY forecasts the total stock of business loans from banks (which includes outstanding balances of loans taken out in prior years) to be up 11% in 2020 (compared to 2% growth in 2019), it reports the jump in SME lending stock at around 20%2.

Sanjay Bowry, business growth advisor at Elephants Child, says this isn’t surprising: “SMEs don’t typically operate with large cash buffers and even a small drop in business activity can create a cash crunch very quickly. So, with the large and sudden impact of the pandemic, they have quite rightly been taking up the debt support that has become available – mostly from the government-backed Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) and Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS)”.

But, says Sanjay, this is presenting owner-managers with new challenges, both psychological and practical.

Psychological challenges

Sanjay says that for many business owners, taking on debt is anathema: “They have financed their businesses successfully from day one without debt and never even considered borrowing money. For business owners with this mindset who have now taken on debt, it can be a time of enormous stress. Others have a diametrically opposite view. Debt isn’t seen as a negative but as an enabler for survival and growth.”

What Sanjay stresses to clients though is that debt isn’t a good or a bad thing, it is simply a business tool that should be used appropriately – be that to survive or to grow. His advice to business owners who have reluctantly taken on debt during this crisis, and whose natural disposition is to worry about it, is that the most effective stress reliever is to plan rigorously for how you will manage that debt and its repayments. He says: “Just knowing exactly what actions you need to take and what scenarios you have planned and prepared for makes the whole situation much more manageable and less stressful.”

Another tip for stressed-out business owners is provided by Rob Warlow, founder of SME loan broker Business Loan Services. He says that one of the things entrepreneurs and business owners are often not so good at is putting their hand up and saying they need help. “It’s just not in their DNA”, says Rob, “but probably the top tip from me is to take some outside advice. Good advisers will act as a sounding board, will bring ideas to the table you may not have thought of, and will be supportive from an emotional point of view.”

Practical tips

Miguel Calabrese, managing director of Blue Rocket Accounting, gets into the nitty-gritty of Sanjay’s point about rigorous planning. He suggests doing detailed cash flow projections for a 13-week period (90 days).

He says: “We like 13 weeks as a timeframe because if you do spot a cash crunch, there is enough time for you to do something which will have an impact on the cash position at the end of this period, such as finding more funding or cutting costs. And it is a short enough timeframe to make the cash flow projections fairly easy and accurate.”

Miguel recommends making this a ‘rolling’ forecast. At the end of week one, add week 14 to the forecast and update the intermediate weeks’ forecasts. Cash flow planning then becomes a weekly exercise for business owners who quickly build up a very detailed knowledge of their short-term cash position and get more and more comfortable because there is less uncertainty.

His suggestion for starting the forecast is to begin with outgoings. These should be fairly predictable for the next 13 weeks. Revenues are likely to be less certain, so Miguel suggests looking at scenarios. Look at a best-case scenario, where the Covid recovery really takes off and how you might capitalise on that. Then look at a worst-case scenario where revenues are badly affected and make sure you have a contingency plan so that that cash crunch can be survived.

His other top tip is around credit control. Miguel says: “Many people went a little bit soft on their credit terms in the first lockdown which is understandable but that can’t go on. Put a proper credit control system in place and make it consistent. People tend to be scared off by having to chase for money but don’t be, if payments are due to you, chase them up. That’s just normal business.”

Managing payment terms is also a point stressed by Rob Warlow. He says: “Are you maximising your creditor terms – if someone is giving you 45 days are you taking it? In this case there’s no need to pay in 15 days. Yes, you need to keep good relationships with suppliers, but you have to look after number one, and as long as you don’t go over your payment deadline, there’s nothing wrong with that.”

A last tip from Rob is about communication. He says: “Keep your suppliers and lenders in the loop if there is a problem on the horizon. If you see a cash crunch coming, sometimes the natural reaction is to keep it quiet. But you actually get much more credibility and deepen your relationship with suppliers and lenders by engaging early in the event of a problem. Remember they will also be wanting to know where their cash flow position stands. The last thing they want is a call from the blue saying I can’t pay you this month. Their reaction will probably be ‘why didn’t you tell me earlier?’.”

 

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.​

Sources

1 EY

2 EY ITEM Club Outlook for financial services, Autumn 2020

Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab.

Starting a business in the pandemic

Counterintuitively, progressing with a new enterprise now could be a smart move

Starting a business in the pandemic

The number of businesses starting up has increased dramatically during the pandemic. Latest government figures show 51,269 new UK businesses launched in Quarter Three this year – 30.2% more than in the same period last year.1

Take husband and wife team Guy and Abi Fennell who, in June, launched Pura, an online-based company direct-selling their own brand of affordable, eco-friendly, plastic-free, compostable baby wipes and nappies via mail order and subscription.

In their first week of trading they took 27,000 orders, and have since seen sales growth of between 150% and 200% week-on-week and their subscription base expand by 70% weekly, and now employ 30 people. Passionate advocates of the green agenda, they’re expanding into Germany this year and will launch in France, Spain and Italy early in 2021 with long-term plans to enter the US and Canadian markets.

Formidable challenges

Having identified a huge hole in the baby care products market three years ago, they set about developing eco-friendly products and finding reliable, capable manufacturers with a reliable supply chain to make them, aiming to launch in 2020. Then Covid struck; yet despite the formidable challenges it posed, they pressed ahead anyway.

“Extensive research and preparation is important, but you need to set out to be a serious market disruptor from the outset. Our decision to adopt an online, direct-sales model, cutting out retailers so we can control our prices and margins to compete against big players, has been critical to our success,” explains Guy.

Furthermore, any successful start-up in the current environment needs to be as flexible, nimble, agile and as resilient as possible to meet rapidly changing consumer demands, he argues.

Embrace e-commerce

“With people increasingly turning to online for their purchasing, it’s essential to embrace e-commerce and utilise the growing power of social media for your marketing as well as conventional advertising,” explains Guy. “It’s relatively cheap and you can use it to attract celebrities and influencers to become ambassadors for your business. 

“Good communication is key but obviously difficult with social distancing issues. However, our team has trained and operated virtually right from the outset, using tech such as Zoom and Microsoft Teams and mobile video and we’ve successfully built team spirit and forged a company identity. Of course, you have to have personal passion and belief in the business you are trying to create.”

Rebel rouser

Fellow entrepreneur Cordelia Kate wholeheartedly shares that self-belief philosophy, having successfully founded Rebellious Business Network after lockdown in March to help entrepreneurs running small, service-based businesses make more money.

A mother of three, she’d been running her own freelance affiliate marketing business since 2017, but with the onset of the pandemic, decided to rapidly redefine her enterprise for the new environment and launched Rebellious from her home with a simple virtual networking event. Nine months later, her brainchild has mushroomed, generating six-figure sales and acquiring two employees by providing free networking and additional paid-for support services to a 500-strong – and growing – community of small businesses.

Passionate

One-to-one coaching, expert talks and virtual business boot camps are offered, along with a training and coaching programme to help clients achieve six figure incomes, and the company’s first virtual networking conference took place in November. This time next year Cordelia expects sales income to treble.

“If you’re planning to start a service-focused business, you need to feel passionate about what you do because, ultimately, ‘you are your business’ and remember, operating online is the new normal for enterprises, thanks to the pandemic.”

She adds: “It’s vital to understand where your clients stand in this rapidly evolving market and what they need. So, before spending on marketing and advertising campaigns, work ‘organically’ by leveraging your existing social media networks and contacts and converse with other businesses and your potential customers.”

 

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.​

1. ONS

Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab.

Funding for female founders

Networking and powerful presentations are needed to overcome unconscious gender bias and unlock venture funding, say entrepreneurs

Funding for female founders

The question of why, in the start-up capital of Europe, female entrepreneurs have so much difficulty getting access to funding to start and scale their businesses is the subject of Government reports and ongoing debate. The Government-commissioned Alison Rose Review of Female Entrepreneurship (March 2019) found that while UK companies attracted more venture capital than those in any other European nation, just 1% went to all-female founding teams.

It is a complex problem that affects the whole of the UK economy, not just those women seeking to grow their enterprises. Rose points out that up to £250 billion of new value could be added to the UK economy if women started and scaled new businesses at the same rate as men. So why does the disparity exist and how can female entrepreneurs go about levelling the playing field and attracting the investment they need?

According to businesswomen who have successfully scaled and sold companies, women often face (mostly) unconscious sexism from largely male investment teams. Only 13% of senior people on UK funding teams are women, according to Rose. Sue Nelson, who founded niche SME tax firm Breakthrough Funding five years ago and sold it to EY in March, says these investors often fail to recognise the value of opportunities being presented by female founders.

Focus on finance

She explains that while men are often very confident in a pitch and paint an extravagant picture of the opportunity, women are sometimes less comfortable in a pitch environment and that can make their presentations less compelling. Female entrepreneurs , therefore, not only need to have all the figures at their fingertips and know exactly what they want from the investor, but they may also need to work hard to develop a more confident presenting style. This could mean seeking out the support of a business advisor or mentor and your St. James’s Place Partner can help you find the right support.

There are many ways to get over your nerves before a pitch – Sue gets “pumped up” by listening to The Prodigy loudly in the car on the way there – but practicing your presentation ahead of the meeting is critical. “And when you get there you have to take up all the visual cues of what that person or that panel is looking for,” she explains. “Are they very formal? Are they quite informal? Are they chatty? Are they in listening mode? And then you need to go with it. Don’t be rigid about presenting. You know it all, you’ve practiced it and practiced it and when you get there it’s time to relax and do whatever it is that you think they want at that time.” 

She adds that it’s essential for women to focus on the finance and not to  overly emphasise the other important topics such as social purpose and community benefit. “Investors primarily want to make money,” she says.. If they are investing £100,000, they want to know when they are going to get their £100,000 back and when they are going to get more than the £100,000, they put in. They want to know whether they will double their money in five years or in two years, and they want a compelling story that convinces them that will happen.”

Lacking confidence

Emmie Faust, an entrepreneur turned business growth consultant, won £200,000 in funding on the TV show Dragon’s Den at the age of 25 with a male business partner. Although that venture was unsuccessful, she has since sold two businesses for seven figure sums and has never had difficulty attracting funding. 

She says: “What I say to my clients is that in order to secure funding, you need to start networking. I’m part of loads of female networks but it doesn’t have to be just female networks, you just need to start networking and you need to start getting out there. That’s one thing that I believe is massive. You’ve got to be incredibly proactive. It’s very hard to get funding, it doesn’t just land in your lap.” 

As a mother-of-four Emmie says that another issue holding businesswomen back is that they often take on the lion’s share of responsibilities in the home and take time out to have children. She says that when she had each of her children, she returned to work lacking in confidence and it took time to build that up again.

Sue and Emmie now mentor female entrepreneurs and help them to win funding. Sue explains: “I think I have spent quite a lot of my career with men not listening to me and talking over me or across me. What I do now is help women get into business, make sure they are getting into it for the right reasons and that they know what they are doing. I think as a successful female founder it’s your job, as they say in America, to send that elevator down and try and help other women.”


Sue and Emmie were both speakers at a recent WealthiHer Network event, alongside St. James’s Place, in which they discussed the topic of presentations for funders and clients.

Reintegrating staff

The Job Retention Scheme is now expected to come to an end next month when lockdown is eased, and many furloughed employees will be heading back to work for the first time since March

Reintegrating staff

The Job Retention Scheme, which has seen the government paying for 80% of furloughed workers’ salaries for months, has now been extended until the beginning of December. Its replacement, the somewhat less generous Job Support Scheme, will then take its place.

Through the new scheme the government aims to protect viable jobs – those where employees are working at least 20% of their normal hours. The cost of hours not worked will be split between the employer (5%), the government (62%) and the employee, through wage reduction. There are slightly more generous arrangements for businesses forced to close because of local restrictions.

Chloe Carey, who last year sold the human resources consultancy she founded in 2003, now works with business growth consultants Elephants Child to help SMEs tackle the HR challenges of the pandemic. She says that those who have been on furlough may have to be reintegrated into a business that is very different, having pivoted rapidly and developed new products and services during the Covid-19 crisis.

At the same time, she adds, there is evidence of increased mental health concerns among those who have been furloughed for long periods. And Chloe warns that there is the potential for resentment among staff who have been forced to work through the crisis, often with increased workloads and responsibilities, while their colleagues have effectively been on paid leave.

Hold appraisals

While many SMEs don’t have a formal appraisal process, planning in a one-to-one discussion with all employees can be a good first step towards reintegrating staff. This provides a useful opportunity to focus on training, align the goals and responsibilities of returning staff to the new business priorities, and even to encourage them to volunteer during the hours that they aren’t working to improve their mental health.

Chloe explains: “I think it would be a good time for such a discussion even though people aren’t at work for their full working hours because it’s a great opportunity to focus on their learning and development. Create a plan which they could begin during this period of reduced hours. The priority really is to ensure the staff feel supported and valued whichever camp they are in and that their health and safety, and wellbeing, is the priority of the company.

“You can find out so much about someone’s aspirations, fears and anxieties from having a discussion like that. But you should make it a more formal, structured process rather than just a bit of a catch-up about Covid or furlough. They will still have a number of issues going on around them while they are trying to hold down a job where they feel disconnected and they are not really sure what is going to happen next.

“You might take the opportunity to reset objectives because the actual focus of the business may have changed and the product set may have changed. The businesses that are doing well are pivoting quickly and making changes to their direction and that’s a really good opportunity to make sure all your employees are on the same journey and to tweak what your requirements of them are.”

Individual plans

A formal discussion is also a good opportunity to find out more about each individual. Some may be fearful of infection, or social isolation, while others may also be struggling to juggle childcare if schools close. Those who have been on reduced salaries may have financial worries, while some may have underlying health issues that make them vulnerable or may have suffered a bereavement during the pandemic. Chloe explains that understanding these issues can help employers put together a plan which is specific to the individual.

One thing that all companies are doing at the moment is planning and forecasting and ensuring they can see the affordability of staff. However, Chloe points out that many staff are reconsidering their priorities during the pandemic and may be open to more flexible or part-time working that would both meet their aspirations and the company’s cash flow needs. The discussion would also provide an opportunity to gently investigate such options.

“The discussion could be couched in such a way that it’s not just about what the business goals and objectives are and where the company’s focus is,” says Chloe. “It’s also about what the employee’s objectives are, their personal objectives, their aspirations, and their career plans. How can you marry those two things together to make sure it works for you and your employee?”


5 signs it’s time to sell

Recognising the clues that you’ve reached the end of the journey with your business

5 signs it’s time to sell

Despite the challenges of Covid-19 and the continuing uncertainty around Brexit, there are still buyers who are ready and willing to snap up the right business.

As Martin Brown, founder of business advisors Elephants Child, says: “There’s still an awful lot of money to be invested – and we’re working with buyers that want to do progressive things around purchasing to grow.”

Julian Goulding, of legal firm Blake Morgan, agrees. “I’ve seen more activity in recent weeks than I’ve seen in the previous six months with plenty of buyers out there. Of course, it depends on the industry sector – some are doing better than others. Some buyers are looking for bargains, some are looking to expand their business and some are looking to buy as a strategy to help their business survive.”

It’s clear, whatever their motivation, that there are buyers in the marketplace – but as a business owner, are you ready to sell? Here are five common signs that it might be time to exit.

1. Aspiration 

One tell-tale indication is the realisation that you’ve achieved your business ambitions, or that you expect to hit those targets in the next 12 months to three years. “Those aspirations could be defined by time, the owner’s age or the monetary value of the business,” says Martin, “but if they’re coming to fruition, it’s time to at least consider your exit options.”

2. Passion

Another sign you should step away is finding you’ve lost the passion – the energy and drive – that helped you launch the business. Julian says: “It can happen any time, but in the current circumstances, for example, it can’t be underestimated how draining it has all been and some people are concluding they can’t and don’t want to run a business anymore.”
He adds: “Other business owners realise there’s no-one in the family to take on the reins, so sale is there only alternative if they want to step down and realise the value of what they’ve put into the company.”

3. Glass ceiling 

Building a company is a journey with very different phases of growth – or “glass ceilings” as Martin calls them – along the way. He explains: “We often see entrepreneurs or business leaders who take the business through two or three of these ceilings but then find the next stage unattractive because the commitment required isn’t justified by the rewards it will bring.” 
Julian adds: “A business owner may find they’re reluctant or unable to put funds in or make hard decisions like making long-standing staff redundant as part of a restructuring. So maybe it’s time to hand over to someone else to do these things.”

4. Market cycle 

Martin sums this up by saying: “This is about not ending up being the guy who’s selling Filofaxes when the iPhone is launched!” He continues: “You want to be selling when you can maximise the value of your company. That could rest on the state of economy, a change in legislation or the relevance of your technology in the marketplace. 
“Timing – and a bit of luck – are key. We’ve all read about the start-ups that aren’t even making profit but then get bought for big bucks by a giant like Microsoft because their technology is the hot property at that moment.” 

5. Forced

Sometimes the sign you should sell is that matters in your personal life simply become more pressing than your business. Martin says: “It’s a horrible place to be when you’ve toiled for years but, sadly, sale can simply be forced on you by death, divorce or illness.”

With plenty of buyers and finance still in circulation in the UK economy, if any of the above is relevant to you, perhaps it’s time put up the ‘for sale’ sign.

 


If any of the issues in this article applies to you, contact your St. James’s Place Partner who can help you explore your options.

Should you invest now?

Why spending money on your enterprise during the pandemic could pay in the long-term

Should you invest now?


Bank of England chief economist Andy Haldane is urging entrepreneurs to invest in their businesses now to be in a strong position for when the Covid-19 crisis passes.

As latest figures from the Office for National Statistics reveal, business investment fell by 26.5% in the quarter to June 2020, Haldane argued in The Times that it is counter-productive for business leaders to hold back on investing in their enterprises.

His concerns are echoed in the report Post-Pandemic Economic Growth, compiled by Continuous Improvement Projects in collaboration with Middlesex University and Brunel University London and published on 8 October by the Government’s Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy Committee. 

Based on a July 2020 survey of 122 businesses of different sizes from 16 different sectors, the report found business investment fell during the course of the pandemic. 

One of the authors, Dr Monomita Nandy, Associate Professor of Accounting & Finance at Brunel Business School, says: “Judging by the responses, most organisations appear to be looking at ways to recover and manage what they already have.” 

Many have been somewhat short-sighted and failed to “turn fear into opportunity” by investing in their own organisations, she explains. Instead, they passively rely on the government for direction, implement short-term fixes and stockpile cash, and often don’t take advantage of government financial help and low interest rates.

Best strategy

Surprisingly, 82% of businesses surveyed say they’re confident they’ll grow within the next two years, with digital solutions and extending flexible working cited as top post-Covid priorities. Dr Nandy says: “That’s encouraging of course, but the best strategy for surviving and achieving growth after Covid isn’t waiting until things get better but investing in your business now. 

“That includes improving business operating systems, securing your supply chain and introducing new technology. Revise your business plan and operating model if necessary, ensure you have a development strategy in place and perhaps consider expanding internationally or even making acquisitions. This will put you ahead of reactive-only competitors.”

Dr Nandy adds: “Customer expectations are rapidly evolving in the crisis, so companies must be flexible to meet them. That involves much more than just implementing digital solutions though. It also means investing in people – retaining and hiring the right employees and training them to help deliver agile responses to customers’ changing needs.” 

Meeting the challenge

One person who believes in investing in his business now is Steve Witt, co-founder of franchise travel company Not Just Travel, which has expanded its network of self-employed online travel advisers across the UK.

During the pandemic the company has been reinvesting business revenue into recruiting, training and supporting up to 15 new advisers every month, and now has more 750 advisers and more forward bookings on its books than ever before.

Steve explains: “We’ve remained very pro-active throughout the pandemic. We revisited our business plan, put a survival plan in place, set aside money to keep things going and, critically, determined changes we needed to make to meet the challenge.

To help the business grow during Covid, the company doubled its marketing budget and expanded its leadership team with two new positions – Chief Business Development Officer and Head of Operations and Experience. 

“Given face-to-face interaction isn’t possible, we invested in new, high-quality technology to deliver virtual training and redirected support staff to assist our corporate training team,” says Steve. 

Not Just Travel also brought in mind and business coaches to support employees, recognising the importance, and business value, of maintaining people’s wellbeing and mental health during this stressful time.

Pole position

Steve concludes: “Since lockdown, high street travel businesses have suffered, and self-booking holidaymakers found themselves dealing with frustrating and time-consuming rebookings, refunds and cancellations. 

“That puts our customer-friendly online model in pole position for the recovery – and we’re investing hard now to exploit that.”

If you are considering investing in your business or need support with any other business issues, contact your St. James’s Place Partner, who can help you explore your options.


The value of an investment with St. James’s Place will be directly linked to the performance of the funds selected and may fall as well as rise. You may get back less than the amount invested.

The mental health challenge

Business psychologist Julie Brophy explains how leaders can manage workplace wellbeing and spot the signs when an employee is struggling

The mental health challenge

If your employees have been working at home for months the isolation and new ways of working could be taking a toll on their mental health, which may lead to personal difficulties for them and to a fall in performance at work. As a remote leader it can be more difficult to spot the signs that someone is struggling when they are working from home but there are signals to look out for.

Julie Brophy, a business psychologist and Principal Consultant at Cambridge-based business management consultancy OE Cam says that at some businesses the structures that were put in place at the start of lockdown to support social cohesion and enable regular informal contact with employees have fallen away over time. Owners need to reassert these and put in place reminders for individuals to be contacted to see how they are. There are red flags that can alert you of a remote employee who is struggling mentally, if you take the time to look.

  • One indicator is a decline in the quality or speed of their work. That’s got to be balanced, however, with whether they are busy because there’s a lot of anecdotal evidence that people are going from video conference to video conference and so their days are absolutely packed, says Julie. It could be that an employee who isn’t working as well as they were before lockdown is just very busy and this may be compounded if they are taking on extra work because you have fewer people in the business.
     
  • When your people are on calls you should look out for a change in the use of language, tone of voice and manner. Do they seem quieter and more subdued and are they using fewer positive adjectives than you would expect? Again, this has to be balanced against other factors. They may not be responding in the same way in a video conference just because that’s not the way they are used to holding meetings.
     
  • Is an employee making less of a contribution in discussions than you would expect? One of the more difficult things about being on a video conference rather than being in a room is that it’s harder to read body language. The non-verbal cues are harder to pick up but you need to look out for things like whether they are sitting back more or coming forward into conversations. How are they compared to how they would normally be? Once more the employee could just be responding differently to a different medium, sitting back to reflect before getting involved.

So, it’s up to business owners and line mangers to look out for these warning signs and decide, on balance, whether someone is struggling in the ‘new norm’. Julie explains: “If you are seeing that someone isn’t contributing as much in a meeting, that’s the kind of discussion to take offline. Reach out to them one-to-one and just ask how they are doing. It shouldn’t be a performance-related conversation, just ask them how they are doing and how things are at home.”

Not everything has changed

Part of the leadership role is to reassure the team. Point out that not everything has changed, highlight what they are good at and give them anchors by explaining what in their life is the same. Leaders should be role models when it comes to behaviours in a remote environment. “Perhaps at the end of a call you should say, yourself, ‘I’m just going to take half an hour and go out for a walk because I’ve been on calls all day and I just need to clear my head’,” says Julie. “You should model that kind of behaviour.

“We’re working with one company that has actually started to have meetings that you attend while you are out for a walk. It’s nothing confidential but it’s that kind of checking-in conversation that they have while they are walking so they can make sure that everyone is getting away from their desks and taking time to relax a bit and get outside.” This idea was echoed in a previous Entrepreneur Club article in which Kristen McNamara, Senior Director of Staff Development and Talent Acquisition at recruitment agency Robert Half, explained that she took the time to speak to some of her remote staff while walking as part of an informal dog walking group.

Video conference overload

OE Cam has also been talking to companies about how they use video conferencing, which many assume is the way forwards. The challenge with such technology, however, is that it’s much more intense than a simple telephone call because you’re forced to keep eye contact all the time. Taking turns in the conversation also becomes more difficult, it’s easy to end up talking over each other and you often end up with gaps in the conversation. So, considering more carefully how often you use different kinds of technologies, including the telephone, could help employees cope more easily with new ways of working.

OE Cam is currently carrying out pan-European research into agile organisations, looking at dimensions such as leadership, innovation, and the mobility mindset needed by people so they can thrive in an agile environment. Among the insights to emerge that are particularly important while people are working remotely is the authenticity of communication; don’t pretend to know something that you don’t. Focus, perspective and autonomy are also key. “Your people will cope better if they can say: 'I feel part of something, I know where I’m going and I have control over how I achieve it',” says Julie.

As an entrepreneur it is important to continually reach out to your people not just to see how work is progressing but also to see how they feeling and coping with the situation.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

When you return to the office

Despite the current situation, sooner or later you'll return to the office and keeping staff safe will be the top priority

When you return to the office

Government advice is now for people to work from home if it’s possible to do so. It has been the norm for many staff to stay away from the office since March, when businesses were forced to make rapid decisions about a shift to remote working. As the pandemic spread at speed, compliance with the law and the safety of employees was paramount, and business continuity plans were formulated almost on a day-to-day basis.

In fact, home working has become so much part of the ‘new norm’ that even before the threat of a second wave loomed large, 50 big employers surveyed by the BBC in August said they had no plans to return their staff to the office until at least the new year. But many business leaders and their employees are eager to get back as soon as conditions allow, craving face-to-face collaboration with colleagues and clients, the separation of work and home, and even that Pret-a-Manger baguette.

Business as usual?

When you are able to open up the office again, the safety of staff will be the top priority and it will be vital that businesses make their workplaces Covid-secure. The Chartered Institute of Personnel Development (CIPD) offers comprehensive guidance on the steps business leaders should take to make their workplaces safe, and the advantages and disadvantages of a full return to the office, continuing with remote working, and the stages in between. It urges businesses to consider three key questions before bringing people back into the office: is it essential, is it sufficiently safe, and is it mutually agreed?

“The response businesses will get from their staff will vary,” notes Lianne Lambert, MD of human resources consultancy Lighter HR. “It will depend on how they have been finding home working and what their personal experience of Covid has been. Some people have been hit quite hard, perhaps they’ve lost a relative or been particularly ill themselves. And they’re going to be more fearful of returning to an office than others, who might be quite blasé about the whole thing. You need to engage with your staff and understand how they’re feeling and what reaction you’re likely to get when you ask them to return.”

One business that successfully brought all its 35 staff members back to work after the initial lockdown was eased is London-based design agency Blacksheep, which undertook a three-phase return beginning in July. The Entrepreneur Club spoke to them before the latest Government advice on home working.

“One thing I didn’t understand when we entered lockdown was the issues working from home presented for some people,” says founder Tim Mutton. “The average age here is around 27 and as much as they live very close to the studio, they might be in a bed-sit that’s not even big enough to get a desk in. We were telling people they could take their computers home and they said, ‘You don’t understand. All I’ve got is a bed.’ I had a massive epiphany at that point: they absolutely love the studio because it offers them more than they have at home. They’ve got the internet, a desk, a kitchen, somewhere where they can sit and eat. I empathise more with our people and understand their circumstances a lot better now than I did before.”

Listen and learn

However, some businesses may have a different experience. Even once risk assessments have been carried out and your business premises made Covid-safe, some staff might be reluctant to come back.

“First, you will need to understand their reasons,” says Lianne. “Have a look at their contract and see if they’re contractually obliged to return. If they refuse, you can go down the disciplinary route. But that should be a last resort. What we've seen is there may be quite a lot of push-back initially, but once you begin bringing people back and they see that the workplace is safe, they feel differently.”

Tim foresaw one significant barrier to business as usual: the limited availability of Covid testing.

“In all the time we’ve been back in, we had one case of someone who tested positive for Covid in the studio. That was something I had to manage – I knew the risk was there. Luckily at that point we were able to get everyone tested, and they all came back negative. If it happened now, we’d have a different issue, because the test stations aren’t available,” he says, citing their only staff member who hasn’t been able to get back into the office because a relative has contracted Covid and she has been unable to obtain a test.

Lianne agrees that a Covid-positive team member shouldn’t be every manager’s worst nightmare. “We have had a couple of clients go into a flat spin at that point, shut the office and send everybody home. By doing that, what you’re in effect saying is that you have not provided people with a Covid-secure workplace. The idea is to make the workplace safe if someone comes in with Covid, not only as long as no one does,” she says.

Creating a safe workplace

The Government offers some key advice on making your workplace Covid-secure, including: 

  • Complete a Covid-19 risk assessment and share it with staff.
  • Clean more often and ask staff and visitors to use hand sanitiser.
  • Ask visitors to wear face coverings.
  • Make sure everyone is social distancing. Make it easy by putting up signs or introducing a one-way system.
  • Increase ventilation by keeping doors and windows open and running ventilation systems.
  • Turn people with coronavirus symptoms away.

In addition, workspaces should be arranged to keep people apart, the number of face-to-face meetings should be reduced, you should consider booking systems for desks and rooms to avoid overcrowding, and make sure that all staff and visitors are kept up to date with your safety measures.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Is your buyer serious?

What homework do you need to do on a potential buyer to ensure their interest is genuine?

Is your buyer serious?

Receiving an offer for your business can be exciting and potentially life changing. But don’t get too carried away with the flattery and talk of sky-high numbers from your business suitor. An offer can be time consuming, distracting and value destroying if the potential buyer isn’t serious and chooses to walk away.

“It can take you away from focusing on the day job,” says Richard Murray, chief commercial officer at business growth advisors Elephants Child. “You spend all that time and then find out that the buyer was a competitor trying to have a look at your business or tyre-kickers casting their net out with no great intent. Either way by the time you properly re-focus on your business your valuation has been eroded as performance suffers. You have taken a step back just by looking at the opportunity.”

As such it is vital that you determine how serious your buyer is before you start giving up your time and opening the books. That can be difficult for entrepreneurs, most of whom have never sold a business before.

First step

Henry Campbell-Jones, managing director of Hornblower Business Brokers, says the first step is to carry out desk-top research on a potential buyer as well as asking them direct questions. “Find out what their acquisition strategy is,” he says. “What attributes are they looking for in a business and why is your company of interest to them? What do they already know about your company, what is their strategic interest and how would they take it forward?”

Owners should also ask whether the buyer is looking at any other companies and what their track record of acquisitions has been. “Depending on how they respond you can build up a picture of whether the plan has been thought through and whether it is viable and rings true,” Henry adds.

You should also find out whether the buyer knows your market and whether they, or a colleague, have the necessary sector skills, expertise, licences, or qualifications.

Financing a purchase

It is also important to determine how the buyer intends to finance the purchase and what form of deal structure they have created. Is the buyer backed by private equity or loans, or will it be their own capital? Do they intend to put down any money at all? Some buyers look to structure deals in which the seller provides loans to facilitate the process.

“When it comes to funding, look them up at Companies House or a credit rating database where you can see their balance sheet assets for the last financial year,” Henry says. “Look particularly at their cash in bank and net current assets figures.”

Another key is gauging how ready and prepared the buyer is if you agree to more detailed discussions. Do they have professional support and a due-diligence checklist in place? Do they have a timetable for any deal?

Are you serious?

Henry, however, cautions owners not to be too suspicious.

“There are not many firms pretending to buy just to garner information,” he says. “If there are then they will probably be known in the industry already. I’d advise not to be too searching at the initial stage because the buyer might just disappear. For example, asking for the buyer’s financial statements and detailed deal structure would tend to come at the next stage, once you have had the initial high-level discussions to establish compatibility.”

Richard adds that owners must also carry out a ‘seriousness’ test on themselves. “Stop and think about your own personal circumstances,” he says. “Am I at a stage where I want to sell or indeed can afford to sell? Is this right for the business?”

Seek advice

Owners can carry out all these processes themselves but often securing professional advice from a broker can be helpful.

“It is very difficult as a business owner to get this right yourself,” says Richard. “You need the skillset of people who have been there and done it. Brokers can hold your hand and help you avoid pitfall after pitfall.”

If you’d like support as you work towards an exit, talk to your St. James’s Place Partner


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Investment in the ‘new normal’

Investors’ doors are still open, but the landscape has changed

Investment in the ‘new normal’

“The level of investment activity during the pandemic has surprised me,” says Rod Beer, managing director of the UK Business Angel Association. “While some angels have understandably backed off investing altogether or avoided some sectors, they have been replaced by others sensing an opportunity – particularly in sectors that are enabling digitisation.”

Even where interest has dropped off, such as in food-related sectors, there are success stories. Digby Vollrath, CEO and co-founder of Feast It, an online platform linking event hosts with suppliers (for events ranging from weddings to corporate conferences), says: “We had to deal with the question – why would anyone put money into a business dependent on face-to-face gatherings?”

But Feast It did raise money during the pandemic – a £1.2 million funding round in August 2020. Its story shows that investment is available, but to bag it, entrepreneurs have to be agile.

Deal flows recover

Data from SeedLegals1, a digital platform that produces the legal agreements for early-stage funding rounds, shows that deal flow suffered during the pandemic, but has very nearly returned to pre-lockdown levels.

In March, the number of new signed shareholder agreements dropped to 75% of the February level, rose to 120% in April (the usual seasonal tax year-end spike), and then fell off again in May and June to around 60%. Encouragingly, July saw a sharp recovery to a few points off the February level.

Also encouraging, says Nicholas Richards, head of investor partnerships, is that EIS and SEIS advance assurance applications – which are indicative of deal activity two to three months in the future – have recovered steadily since a March drop-off. Applications on the SeedLegal platform fell from around 25 per week to 10 after lockdown, but at the end of July were over 80% of pre-Covid levels at around 20 per week.

Rod does however caution that investments into companies raising money for the first time has remained low. He says: “Angel investing is a very personal thing; you want to look someone in the eye before you write a cheque. That couldn’t happen during lockdown and the opportunity to do that is still limited.”

Different sectors, different stories

Businesses that stand to gain from the pandemic, such as technology companies in the health and education sectors (health-tech and ed-tech), have benefited. The number of health-tech investments in May and June was around five times higher than average pre-Covid levels while the number of ed-tech investments in June was around three times higher. However, activity in both sectors returned to pre-Covid levels in July, so the jury is out on if elevated levels of deals will continue.

Rod also flags continuing strong investor activity in sustainable investments, such as green technologies, and growing interest in ‘deep tech’, which are companies that use highly advanced scientific or engineering innovations such as quantum computing.

Conversely, SeedLegals data shows the number of investments in the food-sector collapsed after lockdown with the number of deals falling by around 60% and remaining low.

Still raising money

But Digby’s experience with Feast It holds some valuable insights.

First, he had to convince investors about longer-term and medium-term prospects. Digby says that while no investor actually believed that Covid would spell the end of events, they needed reminding that Millennials had become the largest customer segment in the events industry, that this segment values experiences over possessions (so are more inclined to spend on events), and they are getting wealthier as they get older, so will probably spend more on higher-value events.

He also suggests that there is likely to be a rapid recovery: “We have had close to 100% cancellations because of the pandemic. But people haven’t reverted to weddings with six guests or weddings over Zoom, they have simply delayed their weddings. Next year is potentially going to be a bumper one.”

So, Feast It was able to present a bullish view over a five-year horizon, with an interesting opportunity over a 12-18-month horizon too.

Second, a dose of realism was important to build credibility. Digby says: “We were openly negative about the very short-term prospects. We projected zero revenue this year. That convinced investors we had thorough plans to survive a worst-case scenario, be ready for the recovery when it comes, and not need to come back to investors in a few months, desperate for money.”

Third, the financial deal had to make sense. Digby says it was almost impossible to value the company in the midst of such uncertainty, so Feast It structured its funding round as a loan, which converts to equity at the next investment round, with investors to be allocated shares based on a 20% discount on the price of that future funding round.

This was done in conjunction with using the government-backed Future Fund which matches private investor funding. This structure, he says, was fair and logical for both parties: “As a founder I am backing my vision and our ability to perform by the time we need to raise money again. If our next round is concluded at a lower valuation, then it really hurts us. But for investors, by coming on board now, they get a better deal in the next round of funding.”

And fourth, fundraising tactics had to be adapted. Digby says: “We started with existing investors. We ran webinars and provided them with detailed and brutally honest documentation on the impact of the pandemic and our plans to deal with it.” Many of these signed up quickly, which inspired confidence in new investors.

Rod thinks the start-up funding scene is relatively strong, but uncertainties remain. He says: “I think investment into digital businesses is very strong, driven in part by the forced adoption of technology by organisations. In other sectors, we don’t know how it will pan out. We’ll only get a clear picture next April, at the end of the tax year, which sees a peak in investment activity to qualify for EIS and SEIS.”

 

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

1 SeedLegals​​​​​​​ (4 August 2020)

Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. The existence of a link to another website does not imply or express endorsement of its provider, products or services by St. James’s Place. Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab.

Productivity and the pandemic

Now is the time to focus on strengthening productivity

Productivity and the pandemic

Many smaller businesses have successfully weathered the storm of the pandemic so far but no one can afford to let productivity slip in these uncertain times. Covid-19 has highlighted the importance of embracing constant innovation and agility for survival in business.

David McLaughlin, Chartered Fellow of the Chartered Management Institute (CMI) and Chartered Management Consultant, argues now is the time to at least carry out a “quick and dirty review” of the health of your business and make the changes to strengthen and improve productivity.

He says: “Keeping customers is more vital than ever, so you need to re-evaluate your business goals. Use social media, your website, technology and every feedback tool at your disposal to determine your customers’ needs and to see if you are meeting them in productive ways. Be prepared to drop products and services no longer wanted and offer different products and services where you can be more productive.”

Supply chain security

Of course, it’s vital to have a sound, reliable supply chain to maintain productivity, particularly when they’re based outside the UK. Dr Elaine Garcia, Senior Programme Leader at the London School of Business and Finance, recommends diversifying your supply chain as soon as possible. “It’s wise to identify and select more than one supplier for essential products or services as a back-up so you’re not left stranded if they let you down, or fold.

“In these volatile times you need to anticipate both shortages of products and potential surges in demand, so good communications with suppliers is essential to ensure that you can have what you need to remain productive.”

Employee engagement

Keeping employees engaged is vital too, Elaine argues. “A worried workforce is not a productive workforce, so you must keep them on board and informed on the direction of the business.

David Mclaughlin agrees that productivity and employee engagement are intrinsically interlinked. “Employees need to know what outcomes the business needs, how they can deliver them, and how they’ll be supported in that,” he says.

The main reason people are unproductive is usually poor management, so evaluate your management team carefully and consider providing coaching and training to help them get the most out of your workforce, many of whom may now be working in very different environments, remotely or from home.

Tech solutions

In the face of these new challenges, technology has an important role to play in improving productivity but this involves much more than giving everyone a laptop and asking them to work remotely.

Elaine advises: “Assess your needs and if technology can help increase your productivity, acquire it now. At the same time, see what you can access quickly, free or cheaply, particularly social media. For example, use Facebook to provide automatic answers when people message you, learn google analytics, exploit cloud systems and instant messaging, and make more effective use of phones and tablets.”

Entrepreneur Ben Michaels, MD of digital marketing agency ThinkEngine, has found that cloud-driven business chat software combined with project and task management software has improved internal productivity of his business during the Covid crisis. “Chat software replaces email, internally and with clients and business partners, who really like it. Chat is more immediate and responsive and has speeded up communications, leading to a 25% reduction in time spent emailing.

“Task management software allows us to manage projects in a collaborative way, improving efficiency by keeping projects moving at a greater rate, enhancing the overall pace of work by about 15%.” Both technologies fit together neatly to provide a joint productivity boost.

Summing up, he says: “Entrepreneurs should always be looking ahead to embrace the next new technologies that will make them more productive in the face of unforeseen challenges like Covid.”

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Reacting to unsolicited offers

What should you do if you receive an unexpected offer to buy your company during the Covid-19 crisis?

Reacting to unsolicited offers

Despite the Covid-19 crisis there are still acquirers out there with cash on their balance sheets, and with bank interest rates low they are looking for companies to buy that will bring them a better return. While the pandemic offers them the opportunity to drive a hard bargain and pick up small firms for a relatively low price, they don’t hold all the cards when it comes to a negotiation and you can still get the deal you want if you know how to go about it.

If you get an unsolicited offer it can be flattering, says Andrew Shepperd, a Director of Entrepreneurs Hub, which advised on two recently completed sales. But with the initial approach the buyer may already have seized control of any negotiation because they will be the only ones in the running, and if you want to take the opportunity to sell you may need to redress the balance by seeking out more potential purchasers.

But before you make any decisions be patient, listen to what they have to say and sleep on it. Then, if you decide to take it further find advisers who can guide you through the process and may even be able to identify other potential buyers. Andrew explains: “We’ve found that often those unsolicited approaches seem decent but on review, and with the context of a proper market process where you get other interested parties, the consideration can double, or even quadruple.

“There are some very, very good serial acquirers out there that are proactive and what they want to do is deal with the seller directly without advisers because they’d rather not be in a competitive situation where it may be harder for them to achieve the best terms or the lowest price. What you find is the value that people will often pay in a competitive situation will be higher. So, the initial offer may be £2 million but when you bring another potential acquirer in it may go up to £4 million.”

Know your acquirer

Another Entrepreneurs Hub Director, Malcolm Murray, explains that there are also organisations now offering courses on how to buy a business without spending any money and says that offers of this sort, which are often funded from seller assets and seller future receivables, can be low value for the seller and in effect the seller is funding their own purchase. He says that you should find out who your potential buyer is before proceeding and if you are comfortable, get a non-disclosure agreement in place. You should create and supply them with a sales document that provides them with a future value of the business, so that they can make an initial offer. You only need to enter into a formal due diligence process if that offer meets your expectations. It is much better to get an advisor alongside you in the process.

Nigel Fox, former Chief Financial Officer of Avanti Communications, now advises SMEs with business growth advisors Elephants Child. He agrees that entrepreneurs should avoid a knee-jerk reaction to an offer. He says: “My advice to anyone receiving an unsolicited offer would be to acknowledge it, say that the business isn’t currently for sale but you are open to a strategic discussion and suggest a follow-up conversation. That puts you in a position to take a deep breath, consider it.

“The vast majority of businesses, with some notable exceptions, will be to some extent distressed. They will have had to furlough people, work remotely and work in a different way. Some will have had capital structure issues in terms of cash flow and therefore a smart acquirer with deep pockets will say ‘now’s the opportunity to see what we can pick up on the cheap’. Cheap may only be 10% or 15% cheaper than they would otherwise have been able to buy the company for but that’s a significant amount if you are a business owner.”

Due diligence

He agrees that you should do your own research to understand who the acquirer is and whether they really are likely to complete a worthwhile deal. Once you’ve done that you should set up a data room, either physical or virtual, where the buyer can access the information they need for their due diligence. However, he says that some approaches are made by competitors with no real intention to buy, who just want to gain information about your company, so acquirers should be given information in stages with sensitive details only made available late in the process.

Nigel adds: “If you agree a sale, you’ll need your accountants or tax advisers to make sure that your exit is structured tax efficiently. This is the sort of thing that business owners tend to forget about. They might agree a £10 million sale but they don’t realise that without proper tax planning it might only be £4 million in their pocket because they haven’t done it properly.”

This is a worst-case scenario and it is unlikely to be so extreme. However, good advice when you are valuing and selling your biggest asset is essential and should more than pay for itself, says Andrew. 

If you need support through a sale, talk to your St. James’s Place Partner.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Exit Strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

Adapting to the new environment

Graeme Quar, Entrepreneur-in-Residence at the University of Portsmouth, explains how you can thrive by pivoting your business model

Adapting to the new environment

The Covid-19 pandemic and the dramatically altered commercial environment have been a shock to entrepreneurs but there are plenty of opportunities in the ‘new normal’. There are new products to be made, digital sales channels to exploit, government grants to take advantage of, and a wave of money from families who weren’t able to spend in lockdown and who had earmarked thousands for now-cancelled foreign holidays.

Perhaps the most obvious way to take advantage of these opportunities is to pivot your business model to offer something new. Consider, for example, how companies like Dyson rapidly developed new ventilator designs in the early days of the crisis. These may not now be required but demand for products like Perspex screens to protect shop workers from the virus has soared. And Hotel Chocolat increased its annual revenue by 3%1 after ramping up its online sales during lockdown, reducing the online product range and introducing pre-selected bundles so that its distribution centre could handle the surge in demand.

Graeme Quar, Entrepreneur-in-Residence at the University of Portsmouth, also helps small businesses grow and thrive through his work with business growth advisors Elephants Child. He says: “I think most good businesses are very focused. They find their market and their customer base and they exploit it well. Now, some are finding that their customer base has disappeared, so they need to sit and take stock and say ‘what have we got here, and could we use this talent or these assets in a different way?’

“If you think of a manufacturing company that carries out injection moulding. They may be making a particular mould for a particular type of product but actually, what the economy wants, is a different type of product. It may not take that much to rejig the machinery. The staff on the shop floor and the engineers have probably got the skills to adapt to do that.”

Beyond manufacturing

But it’s not just manufacturing companies that are pivoting their offerings. Graeme is a non-executive director of a company that operates a research laboratory that has switched its operations to meet the demand for testing linked to developing a vaccine. And while the entertainment industry is suffering, Elephants Child works with a production company that switched to filming broadcasts for social media platform TikTok when the crisis caused normal production to stop.

Sales is another important area where companies can modify what they do to improve their performance through the pandemic. Graeme says that salesmen and women who used to getting in their cars for face-to-face meetings need to learn to sell on Zoom. One business he is involved in was used to picking up leads by attending exhibitions. Yet its sales are improving without a sales rep on the road because it has adapted to working online.

“I also have a business friend who owns vape shops,” he says. Rapidly he’s gone from zero to 32 units in two-and-a-half years. He had already begun wondering how efficient the shops were and whether he should build up his online business. But he said he would never have dared to close down every single unit to test out the online market, but the government made him do it. And, of course, he’s discovered that online sales are really quite interesting.”

Government support

And companies shouldn’t overlook the opportunities offered by ongoing government support. It has been keen to help small businesses through the crisis and Innovate UK has already handed out £210 million2 in continuity grants to businesses it was supporting prior to the crisis and has several other support packages.

Graeme adds: “I’m also the NED of an R&D business. It actually has no customers because it is still developing the product but we managed to raise additional funding through Innovate UK. Because of Covid, the government has been handing more money out more quickly and that has accelerated our development process. We won’t be going to market for another year but we’ve actually recruited.”

And while there are many ways to pivot or accelerate your offering, you should do your research carefully because many consumers currently have a lot of money to spend. Graeme points to the opportunity offered by the pent-up demand from families stuck at home for months and forced to abandon their summer holidays, and the need to meet their demands. He says: “That £5,000 trip to Disney has been cancelled, so what are we going to do with the money? Builders are getting busy, for example, because we are spending our money on new kitchens or extensions.”

The Government has also inspired consumers to spend, perhaps most notably through its Eat Out to Help Out scheme but also through a temporary reduction in Stamp Duty Land Tax, which is helping to revive the housing market.

Martin Brown, CEO of Elephants Child, explains: “My sense is that there is an opportunity for the vast majority of SMEs, if they are prepared to step back and think and get their strategy and their plan right.”

If you need help to adapt to the ‘new normal’ talk to your St. James’s Place Partner.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Sources:

1. Hotel Chocoloat trading update, 21 July 2020

2. UK Business Angels Association, 19 Mary 2020

5 steps to scaling up fast

The Covid-19 pandemic has battered the UK economy, but some businesses continue to grow fast

5 steps to scaling up fast

The Covid-19 pandemic has stalled the growth hopes of thousands of UK businesses. According to the Future of Growth Capital report, published in August 2020 by the ScaleUp Institute, Innovate Finance and Deloitte, over 70% of fast-growing scale-up companies are now in sectors most affected by the lockdown such as construction and retail.

But not all owners are on their knees. There have been crisis winners including, online retailers as shoppers shun the high street, and health tech firms helping to fight the virus.

One firm not being handicapped by the pandemic is Play More Golf, which links up with UK golf clubs to offer less expensive, flexible membership for players. Since launching in 2016 it has scaled quickly to partner with 250 clubs, attract 10,500 members via its app and doubled revenues year-on year to £4 million.

Crazy increase

When courses closed in March, we quickly offered people extra time on their membership to stay,” explains founder Alastair Sinclair.  When we got to May and golf was one of the first activities to re-open we got a crazy daily increase of enquiries of 1,500%.”

Another firm which has continued to flourish is Remedy Health, which produces and sells bespoke 3D printed nutritional food online. Founder Melissa Snover says its first product – Nourished – has recorded 30% month on month growth since lockdown. There is a bigger focus on people getting healthy,” she says.

Both firms are determined to keep scaling in the months ahead. Play More Golf aims to once more double revenues this year as the recession hits and golfers seek cheaper playing options. It also aims to expand its product internationally into Spain, Portugal, and France next year and launch new white-label products to attract more luxury golf clubs. 

Focus on R&D

We are working on our software and new R&D to ensure we can meet the demand,” Alastair says.  “But scaling is also about being nimble and listening to your customers needs. Its a rapidly changing marketplace.”

Melissa is also continuing to scale and expects 500% revenue growth this year. The expansion includes launching a new kids range this Autumn using its patented technology. We listened to our customers saying their kids would love it and we are delivering,” she says.

Paul Excell, managing director of the ScaleUp Group, says Alastair and Melissa are following many of the key scaling up steps vital in troubled times.

One main area is focusing on cashflow and capital and securing finance to fund investment. Every pound counts in marketing, sales or customer acquisition,” he says. You need to maximise recurring revenues and look at streamlining your processes to be more efficient.”

Obsess over customer needs

Paul also emphasizes the need to ‘obsess' over customers both existing and new. “How are your customers feeling, what do they need to be successful, are your delivering your promise? Plus, how can you develop business processes, models, product portfolio, and people to cost effectively address  new growth markets and customers?”

Indeed, start-ups should create a strategic plan with clear growth targets and communicate it well with all functions and departments to ensure they are on board with it. They should also identify any skills and knowledge gaps in their teams and invest in training.

But a growth plan is not enough. Execution is key. Owners need to build a scale-up collaborative growth and delivery culture throughout their organisation.  “Lead by example and inculcate a supportive, empathetic growth mindset, cause or purpose within your team and partners. Your people should be getting up in the morning ready to face tough challenges and enjoy their successes,” says Paul.

Melissa agrees that the team is crucial. “We hire executive level people who buy into our way of thinking,” she says. “They are very experienced in their individual field, so I let them go away and run with it. At the speed we are growing you can’t expect to know every detail. I’ve never been in such a fast-moving business before, but we keep getting stronger.”

5 key steps

If you think you’ve got an offering that is likely to be in demand through the current crisis, here are five steps to scaling up your business so that you can take advantage of the opportunity.

  1. Identify customer needs and new market opportunities
     
  2. Make the most of new technology
     
  3. Fill in knowledge gaps by training or hiring
     
  4. Build a culture focused on growth
     
  5. Always keep an eye on cashflow

If you’d like to find out more about scaling up, speak to your St. James’s Place Partner.

 

 

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Funding in the age of Covid-19

With so much coronavirus uncertainty, investors may be even more careful about where they put their money. So where should start-ups be looking for capital?

Funding in the age of Covid-19

The Covid-19 pandemic has been a shock to start-ups that previously had a reasonable expectation of being granted loans or raising capital from investors. At this critical stage of the business lifecycle an injection of cash can be essential if a company is to get its products and services to market and realise its full potential.

Since the March lockdown sent the economy into a tailspin, however, investors are being forced to consider much more carefully where they invest their cash. Some have seen the value of their existing portfolios plummet and now have less resources to draw on. Yet options remain for those entrepreneurs that can demonstrate they have a really promising proposition and here we’ve considered the likely sources of funding available today.

Government loans

Government-backed loans have been introduced to help businesses. Three schemes are available through a range of lenders and partners accredited by the British Business Bank:

• Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme – loans up to £5 million for SMEs

• Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme – loans up to £200 million

• Business Bounce Back Loan Scheme – loans up to £50,000 for SMEs.

However, many promising start-ups operate at a loss in the early days, which has meant that they have been unable to access these loans. A fourth scheme, the Future Fund, delivered directly by the British Business Bank, is aimed at them. It is open to firms that have raised at least £250,000 in equity investment from third parties in the past five years. Loans of up to £5 million need to be matched by private sector investment and will convert into equity unless investors choose to repay the cash.

By mid-July, loans totalling £45.3 billion1 had been delivered by the four government schemes – something that is “obviously a positive”, says Crawfurd Walker, Revenue Officer for business growth advisors Elephants Child. But he adds that companies’ experiences of these schemes have so far been varied.

Investors looking for deals

Away from government loans, Crawfurd says the investment environment is “a bit more risk-averse”, but stresses there is “still money to be invested and people are still looking for good deals”.

The challenges of Covid-19 can even be a positive for start-ups pitching for funding. Crawfurd explains: “Angel or venture capital investors want to see that management have been proactive during the pandemic – either by controlling cash or by showing agility in rejigging their business model to reflect what’s happening in the marketplace. Show evidence of that and it will give investors confidence.”

Start-ups from sectors like technology, healthcare and infrastructure are more attractive, but all investors have the same essentials on their ‘shopping list’: a good proposition, a good business model and a strong management team.

Crawfurd believes investors with existing portfolios are prioritising the injection of money into businesses in which they already have a stake. But for other investors, the pandemic is an opportunity to invest in companies they haven’t had access to before. “Not only do these companies suddenly need funding, but the value will have taken a knock because of pandemic uncertainties,” Crawfurd says.

For early-stage start-ups, investment from family and friends remains an important option, but because of the higher potential risk, this will likely mean sacrificing a higher level of equity. Funding is also available through crowd sourcing, bank term loans, property-backed lending, asset finance, invoice finance, merchant cash advance on credit card transactions, and working capital loans.

Shift in attention

Dr Neil Garner is founder of physical-digital payment platform Thyngs, which is successfully raising funds through crowdfunding platform, Seedrs. He says: “We’ve seen first-hand that there is still appetite from investors for the start-up community. But there has been a noticeable shift in attention, as it’s those start-ups that are making a difference during Covid-19 that are catching investors’ eyes – specifically, businesses that are becoming increasingly relevant in a Covid-19 era, and are working towards helping good causes and making a tangible positive social impact.”

Craig Hewitt-Dutton, Partner at corporate finance firm LockDutton, agrees investment in start-ups continues despite Covid-19. And he reminds investors: “Obviously every investor has their own risk profile but if they were to look back at 2008, another challenging period, a large amount of the investments that they made then would have produced exceptional returns.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

1. British Business Bank

Learning from the financial crisis

Lessons from the 2008 crash can be helpful if you’re considering exiting or acquiring a business in today’s pandemic-impacted world

Learning from the financial crisis

The impact of Covid-19 on businesses is often said to be as hard-hitting as the global financial crisis of 2008. In fact, the two are quite different in nature but if you’re exiting a business there’s plenty you can learn from hindsight.

“The 2008 crash was like a cliff-drop for businesses,” says Sue Green, Director at Watersheds Corporate Finance, “because there was a fundamental problem with the global economy itself.” After the crash business confidence was totally shattered across all sectors, banks completely stopped unsecured lending and potential acquirers simply sat on their capital afraid to spend it.

Consequently, exiting became nearly impossible and deals that did get off the ground were largely dependent on private equity companies risking their own money, and involved very deep and lengthy due diligence processes. It took two years before a semblance of normality returned to the market.”

Hope for exits

“In contrast, if you’re looking to exit today and play your cards right, there are reasons to be positive,” argues Sue, whose firm has recently completed two successful deals in the aggregates and online retail sectors. For a start, the impact of Covid-19 isn’t due to a fundamental global economic fault, nor has there been a total cliff-drop and, although business confidence has been knocked in some areas, it hasn’t evaporated.

In contrast to 2008, Government support has shielded both buyers and sellers from the worst economic impacts of lockdown. Enterprises have been financially supported by a range of interventions, including loans – such as CBILS – business rate support grants, furloughing and other schemes. Furthermore, while lenders are understandably cautious, some are still making money available to fund deals.

Sue adds: “Deals will progress more slowly of course and be highly sector dependent. Companies supporting health, infrastructure or the distribution sectors, for example, are perceived to be doing well, while restaurants and those involved in live entertainment have suffered badly.” This means that unlike 12 years ago, some businesses remain highly sought-after acquisition targets and while some have suffered worse than others the underlying sentiment is more positive.

Lessons learned

“As we discovered in the 2008 crash, if you’re looking to exit, you should start planning the process as soon as you can,” says Sue. “The earlier you begin the greater your resilience and flexibility to act when circumstances change – don’t just wait for things get better or you’ll probably miss your opportunity.”

While not as twitchy as in 2008, buyers, banks and other funders are still nervous about how much financial risk they’re prepared to take and will want to carry out very strict due diligence. “That means you cannot simply window dress your business,” says Sue. “Take a hard look and ‘kick the tyres’ to identify and remove – or mitigate – any potential problem for buyers or funders up front. At present, even a smaller issue down the line could destroy confidence in the deal.

“A buyer will want to see evidence of stable and sustainable profitability and growth coming out of lockdown. Ensure you’ve got a sound business plan, financial projections, cash and balance sheets and profit and loss records in place.”

Previous recessions have also taught us that strong and decisive leadership is valued by acquirers, so what you do now could be even more important when a buyer comes knocking. They will be impressed if you understand and can demonstrate how your enterprise is going to recover from crisis.

“Clearly, it’s easier to exit if you’re in a less badly hit market, but whatever sector you operate in you will face arguments from buyers to drop the price because of the ‘climate of uncertainty’ and claims that they need to de-risk their financing package,” explains Sue.

Buying opportunities

If Covid-19 now means this is not the moment for you to exit but you have a strong balance sheet, you could unexpectedly find that this is the time to become an acquirer yourself to strengthen and increase the value of your business. There will be good businesses that are seeking a cash injection right now to get them through the pandemic and others that simply need to exit.

Some owners close to retirement may not want to wait until the situation improves before exiting. “If you’re prepared to put in the working capital and do what needs to be done, you could end up with a very strong business,” Sue concludes.

If you are planning an exit or acquisition, get in touch with your St. James’s Place Partner.

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Recruiting remote workers

As Covid-19 forces changes to the way companies operate, how can you integrate new colleagues into the team when they are working from home?

Recruiting remote workers

When you’ve hired a new Financial Controller, you don’t usually expect your first face-to-face meeting with them to be on a park bench and at a distance of two metres. But these are strange times and when home security business SimpliSafe decided to carry on recruiting after lockdown to meet the demands of its growth strategy, the process was always likely to be unconventional.

SimpliSafe is a home security business founded in the US. After receiving backing from private equity firm Hellman and Friedman in 2018, SimpliSafe expanded into UK, with a total of 18 employees who were working out of a shared office in Manchester (the company signed a lease on a new office during lockdown). Launched in April 2019, the UK business grew through its first year and was planning to expand its team when Covid-19 forced the country into lockdown.

SimpliSafe’s UK General Manager Jonathan Wall explains: “We already had a few people in the recruitment process and we weren’t going to stop. So, we took on a Senior CRM Manager, a Senior CRM Executive and, of course, a Financial Controller. Those people needed to be inducted and they all started after lockdown. Initially we thought that was going to be our biggest challenge but we have a headquarters in Boston, Massachusetts, so we were already quite used to remote working and having people on Zoom. It was more about making them feel comfortable and part of the team.”

The company encouraged colleagues from across the business to contact the new hires, welcoming them on board. In addition to regular team meetings, SimpliSafe also arranged virtual social events to make integration easier. They hired a personal trainer to give virtual fitness session on Wednesday afternoons and held a quiz every Friday. Jonathan finally met his Financial Controller in person in May. They held their first face-to-face meeting on a bench in Salford Quays but by this time they already felt they knew each other well.

Recruitment challenge

Kristen McNamara, Senior Director of Staff Development & Talent Acquisition at recruitment agency Robert Half says that while companies can do much to achieve similar successes, recruiting at the moment requires them to first identify candidates who are self-directed, motivated, flexible and able to deal with the new ways of working. She says: “If you hire somebody who is looking for direction, looking to be told what to do and what the next step is going to be, that’s probably not going to end well. So, during the interview process it’s important to interview for that agility and mindset.”

Claire McCartney, Senior Policy Advisor for Resourcing and Inclusion at the CIPD, adds that once a candidate has been chosen, the challenges of onboarding them are two-fold. Initially, there are the practical issues such as making sure the new employee has access to the right IT and knows how to comply with data protection principles. Then there is a need to give them a clear sense of purpose and, as SimpliSafe found, to integrate them with colleagues they may have never met.

On the practical side, Claire says that HR or payroll documents should be sent via legally binding platforms like DocuSign or HelloSign. And employers should also make sure that the new hire has checked with their mortgage provider, landlord, local authority or home insurer that they are allowed to work from home. Companies should also check that their insurance covers business equipment in the employee’s home and send new hires an electronic health and safety questionnaire as part of their risk assessment.

Integrating new hires

Kristen adds: “I would recommend really articulating and defining the contribution the new hire is expected to make and the impact they will have on the business. We also recommend that as soon as you know you are going to be hiring somebody, you assign them a workplace mentor. It should be somebody who’s not their boss, who the new hire can call and say ‘what does this acronym mean?’ because the employee is not going to want to look vulnerable to their line manager.

“They should receive a welcome email, so that when they receive their laptop they can get in and they can see the emails from their teammates. I would also suggest that when they go into their calendar on day one, they can see meetings. They should be able to see a meeting with their line manager, one-to-one introductions and time blocked out for training, so it feels very deliberate.”

Both Kristen and Claire agree on the value of less formal interactions, such as virtual coffee breaks, that help to integrate new people with their colleagues. Kristen, whose own team work remotely, even has an informal dog walking group and has informal chats with staff while they are all walking their dogs.

With remote working likely to become much more prevalent, all companies should consider how they will welcome and integrate new employees. And Claire adds: “Obviously, the last thing you want after you’ve invested in them is for them to leave because they don’t really know what they are doing and don’t feel supported.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Thriving through a recession

Former KPMG Chief Restructuring Officer Stuart Lawson used to help some of the country’s biggest businesses overcome tough times – now he does the same for SMEs. We asked him for advice on navigating a recession

Thriving through a recession

There hasn’t been a significant recession since the economic crash 12 years ago and many SME’s have never experienced a serious downturn. While the impact of Covid-19 has already been a shock and the prospect of a prolonged recession and possible further lockdowns may be daunting, there are steps you can take to navigate this new environment and emerge even stronger.

The very first thing you need to do is manage your cash position. That means forecasting three months ahead and updating that forecast every two weeks so that you are clear about your sources and uses of cash. You should consider different scenarios and be conservative in how you think your market and customers will respond to a recession. When forecasting forward make sure that you have no hidden tax bills or VAT liabilities that will be difficult to manage. Also assess whether you can strengthen your balance sheet with an equity raise or refinancing of existing debt at better rates.

You should also consider other sources of cash, such as debtors and stock. Stuart Lawson, who now works as a Business Growth Advisor for Elephants Child, says: “I’ve talked to one company with a debtor book running out to 200 days. They’ve been very supportive of their customers, who haven’t really been paying regularly or to terms. Focus on turning overdue debtors into cash, manage customers to terms and make sure you aren’t over-exposed to one major debtor.”

Strategic response

Once you have a clear view of your sources and uses of cash you can begin to think seriously about your strategic response to the recession. It can be a time of opportunity for businesses that embrace the ‘new normal’, re-focus their energies and resources and set new priorities. It’s no coincidence that some of the world’s most dynamic businesses were started during recessions, including Microsoft in 1975 and Airbnb in 2008.

Stuart says: “Take the opportunity to pivot or change your business model. We have seen many examples of businesses doing just that recently, such as restaurants that have successfully developed takeaway services or dine-at-home packs. This is a chance to rapidly introduce new products and services or to re-engineer old ones for the new commercial environment.

“Continue to focus on growth and strategic intent. There may be cheaper M&A opportunities during a recession and you can improve your chances of thriving if you act aggressively to capture market share during a downturn, rather than waiting for the recovery to begin. Acting with purpose and speed may also mean more aggressive restructuring and changes to your product and trading portfolio – right sizing for the future.

But it’s not all about seizing new opportunities, says Stuart. There will be longer term benefits if you focus on customer value and support. If you help your best customers now, they will be in a position to reward you when the economy recovers. This is also the time to review your supply chain and bring a renewed focus to managing margins by renegotiating key supplier relationships and contracts.

Showing leadership

However unpalatable, there may be a need to re-assess staffing levels, but even if there have been changes you have to maintain productivity and efficiency and that means keeping your team on-side. Stuart adds: “You’ve got to make sure you keep the right skills to maintain performance. You can’t have any performance drift and that comes down to the leadership role. You’ve got to create an environment where there’s some positivity and certainty because you don’t want people coming to work suddenly feeling like there’s no point.

“So, you’ve got to maintain the alignment and motivation of the teams even in difficult circumstances. A business leader is responsible for four things: strategy; tactics, leadership and followership. The leader of a small business sets the strategy. You are also providing leadership and making sure that everybody in the organisation knows where the company is going, what it’s doing and what’s expected of them.

“You also need to create an environment where everybody feels that everybody has an equivalent level of challenge. And the last thing is this notion of followership. So, the employees have got to believe that you know what you are doing and where you are going.”

Leading your business through a recession is challenging but when you come out the other side you should be more resilient, more agile and better able to meet the challenges of the years ahead.

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Is your office too big?

Your office requirements could be permanently altered after the pandemic

Is your office too big?

The onset of Covid-19 forced most companies to swiftly move their operations out of the office. After a few initial teething problems, it has transpired that, for many, working at home has been a smooth process. People have quickly adapted to using software such as Teams, Google Hangouts, Zoom and Trello, with productivity in many cases rising and quality of work unaffected.

But with many countries now starting to lift lockdown restrictions, what will the return to the office look like? Social distancing means we can’t return to business as usual. As working from home has been so successful, will companies decide to reduce the size of their workspaces, or even not return to the office at all?

Lewis Beck, EMEA Head of Workplace for CBRE, a real estate services and investment firm, believes that many companies will look to change their office space following the pandemic, with some even needing to increase their office footprint, following a long-term redefinition of maximum occupancy. He says that we are likely to see a “rationalised physical footprint, made up of a different composition of space that is higher quality and better-equipped to support employee needs”.

Lewis adds: “The shift we envisaged towards a more fluid workplace anchored by a high quality headquarter space and supported by a network of smaller locations will become a reality more quickly than anticipated pre-Covid-19.” 

Renegotiating a lease

But if you’re in the middle of a lease agreement, will it even be possible to make significant changes to the amount of space you have – and pay for?

In the current circumstances, your landlord might be open to renegotiation talks, but Steven Porter, Head of Commercial Property at JPC Law, points out that if a landlord refuses to negotiate revised terms, there is no legal mechanism at present to force the issue. If permitted in your lease, subletting could be an option, if a subtenant that is acceptable to the landlord can be found. “Early dialogue is key,” says Steven. “Most importantly, if an adjustment is agreed with the landlord it is essential that it is documented to avoid any future misunderstandings.”

Estate agency and property consultancy Knight Frank says it has not seen many companies looking to downsize or renegotiate their leases so far, unlike in the aftermath of the 2008 financial crash when many businesses sought to get rid of office space.

“There’s certainly been a lot of talk about the ‘death of the office’,” says William Matthews, a partner in the capital markets research team at Knight Frank. “But I think in the long run people do want to go back to the office – maybe not sticking rigidly to five days a week as we might have done before, but I don’t think it necessarily means we’ll need less office space.

“Before the pandemic, we all built up a degree of social capital with our colleagues, and without a central office where people can come together, this social capital could be eroded over time. So, having an office is almost even more important in the long run than it was in the past.” He also points out that having an office space that is appealing to employees will continue to be important in helping to attract and retain the right staff.

Changing spaces

Rather than moving away from offices altogether, William thinks firms will start to focus more on certain aspects, such as office location. Many employees will want to minimise their journeys into work, so employers might want to ensure they are located close to major transport hubs. And he suggests that firms might look to lease flexible spaces on the periphery of larger towns in order to limit their employees’ commuting time.

But overall, keeping an office space – albeit possibly a smaller space than previously – still has much to recommend it, he says. “When it comes to innovation and thinking about new business and products, it’s harder to do that when working from home,” says William. “Often people do need to be together to do more interesting, innovative work. That, for us, is a key facet of what an office can and should provide.”

Even if you do decide to return to office-based working, Lewis suggests that open-plan offices may need to be reconsidered to some degree. Companies could “compartmentalise”, creating a mix of open and enclosed spaces that will assist with limiting germs’ spread.

“Occupiers will place a stronger emphasis on building specifications and healthy workplace features as they focus on employee health to preserve long-term productivity,” says Lewis. “Long term, we’ll see a preference for buildings with ‘healthy’ credentials related to indoor air quality and ventilation, as fresh air reduces the spread of airborne germs. Currently, buildings are required to comply with a minimum 20% fresh air intake, while some choose to exceed this requirement by going up to 30%. Revisiting the minimum requirement may be a next step for facility operators.”  

If you are planning to bring staff back into the office in the medium term, it may not be possible for all your people to return to work at the same time. You should consider putting a one-way system in place, introducing phased occupation and shifts in order to ensure staff are spaced at a suitable distance from one another, and ensuring santation products are available.

 Covid-19 is changing the way we think about work and entrepreneurs may have to think more flexibly about their physical spaces and staff working to take advantage of opportunities in the post-covid environment.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Marketing through a crisis

Why start-ups need to find new ways to reach customers

Marketing through a crisis

Start-ups have been forced to reconsider how they can get their products and services under the noses of customers during the Covid-19 crisis. Marketing has never been more important for new entrepreneurs but everything from the channels you use to the tone you take must be carefully considered during the pandemic.

While you probably don’t have the resources for a major television ad campaign, many marketing success stories during the crisis have been achieved with minimal advertising spend. Cos Mingides, Founding Partner at London advertising agency True, cites snack brand Emily Crisps, which turned around what could have been a disaster – a debut outdoor poster campaign that was scheduled to launch just as lockdown hit – by introducing gently self-mocking copy highlighting their unfortunate timing.

“Social and content marketing have a role to play, particularly for a service brand,” Cos says. “Make yourself useful to your customers, make sure your content is supportive and empathetic, and be generous with your expertise. If you’re being forced to make decisions that will have a knock-on effect on your customers, be truthful. Consumers understand that times are challenging, and they respect honesty.”

Getting social

You could consider a paid for social media advertising campaign, which can be targeted at the customers you want. This has the advantages of reaching the right people and offering a measurable return on investment, and you only pay when someone clicks on your advert, which should make the whole process of reaching new customers more efficient. The important thing is to consider which social platform your customers are likely to be using. An average consumer might favour Facebook, for example, while a business contact might be best reached on LinkedIn.

It’s important to remember, however, that in the current climate your content and your advertising must be appropriate and sensitive. In March, no less of a marketing giant than KFC was forced to pull a major television commercial. The ad played on the brand’s long-serving “Finger lickin’ good” slogan, showing close-ups of diners savouring the flavour of their fried chicken by licking their fingers, and their companions’ – this at a time when public health messaging was strongly urging all of us to wash our hands and avoid touching our faces.

KFC wasn’t the only company to find its marketing and advertising strategy impacted by the unfolding crisis. The fast fashion retailer ASOS stopped serving digital ads for face mask-shaped piece of chain mail jewellery. Norwegian Cruise Lines came under fire when its sales agents were instructed to encourage customers to purchase holidays to tropical destinations, claiming the virus could only survive in cold climates. Hershey withdrew ads showing people exchanging chocolate bars, hugs and handshakes.

Cos says: “This is a challenging situation. “We’re currently coming into one of the sharpest recessions on record, with huge uncertainty surrounding everything from supply chain to customer mood. Some companies are really suffering, and have had to cease trading. Some are falling into a passive mentality. Others are being entrepreneurial and innovative, seeing opportunities in the situation. However, the key principles of advertising haven’t changed: the more famous your brand, the better your chances of survival. So now is the time to invest in your brand.”

Weak sales shouldn’t be reason to cut marketing spend, Cos advises – but that’s a bold strategy to take at a time when businesses are scrambling to retrench.

There is a direct correlation between share of voice and share of market, Cos explains. If you increase your share of voice, your business will grow, he explains. But getting the message right is more important than ever – and more difficult – in a time of crisis.

“There’s a heightened sense of emotion among consumers right now,” he says. “And the key thing is not to be seen as opportunistic. In these unfamiliar times, consumers are finding comfort in the familiar, thinking of times when things were better. Aggressive, competitive ads aren’t connecting, whereas those that emphasise a sense of between-ness, connections on a human level, and local community are resonating.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Staying on course

While Covid-19 has changed many things, it doesn’t need to alter how businesses are valued ahead of sale

Staying on course

Exiting a business can be a challenging experience for business owners, even at the best of times. But for those wishing to leave their business in the next 12 months, the Covid-19 pandemic may feel like an additional hurdle.

“We’ve been working closely with our clients, some of whom are looking to grow their business ahead of exit and some who were ready to sell their business,” says Malcolm Murray, Managing Director of Entrepreneurs Hub. “In the first few months, most business owners were affected by Covid-19. Everyone was caught out, whether it was because of projects or orders going on hold, staff sickness, supply chain issues or moving to a working from home model.”

However, as the dust settles, he believes that few entrepreneurs should need to change their longer-term exit plans, in particular how they value their businesses. “For those looking to sell, nothing has actually changed,” he explains. “They still want to exit their business. The only thing that may have changed is their timeline.”

Henry Campbell-Jones, Managing Director, Hornblower Business Brokers agrees: “Many of the business owners we’ve been talking to have still been considering the sale of their business and feel quite positive about the future.”

Sector-specific challenges

While the pandemic has likely affected all sectors in some way or another, its impact hasn’t been negative for all.

“Some businesses that are looking to sell have continued to do well, especially service sector businesses and some engineering businesses whose customers are in the healthcare sector,” says Henry. “We’ve kept going with those sales and have had a reasonable level of enquiry for those.

“Others that have been affected have put the process on hold to address issues, such as furloughing staff or working remotely if that’s possible. They’re focused on getting through lockdown and coming out the other side.”

Malcolm adds that being ready to react as the pandemic develops will be key for some entrepreneurs: “Construction clients that were hit quite hard at first seem to be coming back quite strongly and are receiving a number of enquiries about new projects coming in. They’re building some momentum.”

Bouncing back

Malcolm says while Covid-19 has changed many things in our lives, all the measures of a valuation remain the same “There is no difference in valuing your businesses now than at any other time. No matter what anyone says, it is still on a return on investment basis. Buyers may look at a multiple of revenues or earnings before interest and tax or earnings before interest, tax and depreciation and amortisation.

“You still have to look at your profit, make your businesses as profitable as possible and make your profit consistent. Buyers will possibly be looking at the dip caused by this a little more sympathetically, but they’ll be keen to see how the company has responded and bounced back well.”

With this in mind, Andrew Lock, Co-Founder and Partner at LockDutton Corporate Finance says that for most businesses, the level of valuations should not change: “Good businesses going into Covid-19 are deemed by buyers to be good businesses coming out of it,” he says.

“Trade buyers, both in the UK, Europe and the US, are saying that if they see three to four months of trading back at the level a business was at pre-Covid-19, they are quite happy to make acquisitions based on 2019 performance. If you can get your run rate back up for three to four months then buyers are ready to acknowledge that.”

Henry agrees: “In presenting businesses to the market, we will still present their pre-pandemic performance as well as the future forecast. That sets the tone that we believe the business is going to recover and where we need to get to in terms of the valuation.

“However, for those businesses more affected by the lockdown, it may require a more structured deal where an amount is paid up front and an amount is deferred or contingent on reaching previous performance.”

Building value

And if businesses have been set back by the pandemic, how can they rebuild their value to pre-crises levels? Malcolm says that the businesses that are doing this well are the ones that have shown the ability to innovate and adapt quickly.

“If you look at restaurants and pub that have thought: “well, we can’t supply our usual service but we can do something else”. We’ve seen them quickly start offering takeaways and delivery services others supplying essential foods to local communities. They have been able to think creatively and it’s helped.

“Another thing businesses can do at the moment is drive sales and marketing. Many SMEs rely on word-of-mouth and repeat business. They don’t proactively market and sell their business. You can’t wait for things to come back; you’ve got to go out and win it back because if you don’t your competitors will be.”

If you’re looking to sell, remember that everyone is in the same boat at the moment and it’s how you react to the crises that be important to buyers.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Back to work

As the government’s furlough scheme moves into its second phase, many businesses are looking to bring people back to work. Here are some points to consider

Back to work

Since the Chancellor of the Exchequer announced the UK’s furlough scheme – or the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, as it’s officially called – in March, more than a million businesses have placed staff on furlough, with a total of 8.4 million jobs having been protected under the scheme1. But it began a phase of winding down at the start of this month, which will end on 31 October.

As the scheme winds down, it gives businesses and employees the flexibility to return to work part-time, or for previously furloughed staff to work remotely, for any amount of time and any shift pattern. While this offers valuable time to prepare for returning to work, it’s essential that employers begin to plan early for the resumption of normal or near-normal business activity.

Uncertain times

Chloe Carey, a Business Growth Advisor for Elephants Child who supports business owners to achieve their strategic objectives with a particular focus on human resources, emphasises that many companies made the initial decision to furlough staff against a background of considerable uncertainty.

“Decisions around furlough were made on the basis of reduced amounts of business coming in, the risk to people’s health of coming to work, and the viability of working from home,” she says. “There was a great deal of uncertainty around how long this period would last, and people were waiting for three-week chunks of time to find out what would happen next. The government’s messaging is still changing daily, but the mood now is that if people are not able to work from home, they should be returning to the workplace if possible.”

In its guidance on returning to the workplace, the Chartered Institute for Professional Development urges businesses to meet three key tests before bringing their people back into the workplace: is it essential, is it sufficiently safe, and is it mutually agreed? In order to meet those tests, meticulous planning is needed.

“Businesses need to consider what they need in terms of resources to deliver against their order book, pipeline and new business,” Chloe says. “They should create an organisation structure to support that and forecast the cashflow incorporating the flexible furlough scheme, sanity-checking that the business can sustain these levels of staffing.”

Practical measures

The sector in which your business operates will have an enormous impact on the measures you need to take to ensure safely, as well as on the long-term viability of the business, says Chloe. “It’s a minefield to navigate the wider implications of social distancing and safety, but there are useful sector-specific guidelines and it’s essential that you stay on top of these.”

Whatever new structure your business arrives at, it’s essential to ensure that if possible staff are able to work from home, whilst doing as much as possible to rebuild team unity and collaboration.

“Communicate with staff as much as possible, talk through ideas, concerns, good news and bad news, and share plans as early as possible,” Chloe advises. “Implement informal discussions such as daily catch-ups or Friday drinks, and be as inclusive as possible to avoid divides between furloughed and non furloughed workers. Be mindful of practical concerns people may have, such as reluctance to use public transport, vulnerable or shielding relatives, childcare and other challenging domestic situations.”

More than feelings

It’s essential to consider the impact that furlough may have had on the morale of your workforce. Staff who have been furloughed may feel disconnected from their colleagues and the business, and anxious about having a job to return to at all; those who have been working throughout the crisis may feel resentful of their furloughed colleagues.

“Be ready for negative feelings and behaviours as a result of disparity from the impact of the pandemic,” Chloe cautions. “Ensure managers are skilled enough to recognise conflict and nip it in the bud, and make use of employee assistance programmes and occupational heath if you can.”

Depending on the size and nature of the business, there are various options available when bringing staff back to work. You may choose to reduce hours under the flexible furlough scheme, bring back some staff while others remain furloughed, or push ahead with redundancies if a reduction in headcount is unavoidable. In any event, communication is key. If working hours are to be adjusted, confirm the arrangement in writing. Give people reasonable notice if they’re required to return to work. And if redundancies are necessary, use robust selection criteria and follow correct legal processes.

“Commercial considerations are just part of the picture,” Chloe says. “This has been a challenging time for all of us, and some people may have experienced the loss of a loved one. Safeguarding the wellbeing of your staff is paramount.”


1 www.gov.uk, 29 May 2020.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Winning business at a social distance

Being confined to our homes has created an unprecedented business landscape that is tricky to navigate. But there’s no reason to believe you can’t build relationships from behind a screen

Winning business at a social distance

When it became clear that we were heading towards a global pandemic, the thoughts of most business owners turned towards survival. This first stage was about cash or liquidity and then cutting costs and accessing government schemes to keep the business going. For those businesses that did survive, then came the second stage: how do you go out and win work when you have to stay in?

Speaking about the Covid-19 pandemic, UK Health Secretary Matt Hancock told the House of Commons, “This is a marathon, not a sprint”, and the same, albeit overused, analogy should be applied to winning new business in the current economy.

Regardless of any pre-pandemic plans, it’s going to be much tougher than expected to win new business. It’s a difficult market for everyone, and potential clients are particularly unlikely to respond to anyone who looks as though they’re trying to profit off the back of this crisis. Instead, use this time to build relationships that will create opportunities for the future.

“We’re not out there meeting new people, so people are returning to valued relationships that they have already built up. Go around everyone and ask, ‘How are you?’ Just share some comfort and support,” explains Richard Murray, Chief Commercial Officer at business growth advisor Elephants Child. “It may be a longer burn, but any good will you can engender will pay off in the long run, because people will remember you have reached out. So, get out there and talk to the people you know. Ultimately, that will be the best route to market at the moment.”
 

Open for business

While now probably isn’t the right time for a sales pitch, it’s important to let your network know that you are up and running. “The second part of that conversation can be making sure they know you’re still open for business and that you want to win more, because not everyone will assume that you want to scale up at this time,” says Richard.

Be sure to include the fact that being open for business means having adopted new processes that tie in with government guidelines and guarantee the health and safety of your employees. Your network needs to know that you’re responsible.

For the foreseeable future the days of networking drinks, shaking hands and exchanging business cards are behind us, which means winning a cold client is unlikely. Instead, focus on client referrals through your existing network. “Mentally, signing up to a new provider is a bigger step than it was six months ago,” explains Richard. “If people are doing business and want to take on new suppliers, they will want some sort of personal recommendation and testimonial.” He advises reaching out through existing clients, offering them a value exchange on services if they refer a friend who successfully signs up.

Richard also suggests leveraging your existing network by using them as testimonials. “If you have someone who’s thinking of using your service, introduce them to one of your clients. Let them talk about their experience of dealing with you, because that’s going to start to give people that reassurance.”
 

The new normal

Now is also a good opportunity to build brand visibility by offering complimentary webinars. Make sure they’re authentic and interesting, and encourage clients to bring people along. “It may not mean business tomorrow, but the value that you would get off the back of that is tremendous in terms of building those longer-term relationships that will turn into clients,” says Richard.

By now most people are getting used to this digital business environment. For many of us, speaking to clients and potential clients over video conferencing is the safest – and only – option, which means more and more business deals and negotiations are taking place online.

Video technology has enabled the creation of a virtual meeting space that’s not too far from a face-to-face scenario. However, it does make us work harder. Research shows that it’s trickier to read body language, it’s harder to engage, as most of us don’t look directly at the camera when we’re talking, and we struggle more with silences on video than we do face-to-face. But something as simple as moving further away from your camera, so hand gestures can be seen, can make a big difference.

In fact, using video instead of in-person interaction could actually be a positive. Video conferencing does have the benefit of being a considerably cheaper means to conduct negotiations than face-to-face meetings. And amid today’s economic uncertainty, perhaps that’s not such a bad thing after all. 

Business is looking different for everyone at the moment but you can thrive. Safety allowing, most of us would rather be out there, tangibly winning business in a way that we know works. But by strengthening your existing network, having the right conversations and utilising technology to have those conversations in the best possible way, you can build not just relationships, but pipelines and return to revenues.

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Thriving after lockdown

Martin Brown, CEO of growth advisors Elephants Child, considers how businesses can return to good health after the pandemic

Thriving after lockdown

In this article, I’ve looked at how businesses can thrive when they emerge from the coronavirus lockdown. And I’ve considered what entrepreneurs must do to take control of the six strategic areas for business recovery that make up the Thrive agenda: Team, Honesty, Revenues, Innovation, Velocity and the Environment.

Team

During lockdown you may have adopted new ways of working to keep your teams safe and motivated and these could provide the ingredients of success as things get back to normal. For instance, condsider the health and wellbeing issues related to reintroducing travel to work. Is it really needed or, more over, what is the right blend with office and working from home? Lessons learned through this difficult period can provide the foundation for a new and more resilient operating model. And it’s not just the way you work with employees that may need to change. Think about your relationships with other stakeholders, such as investors, suppliers and, of course, clients. Rethinking how you work with them could lead to a greater value exchange and richer outcomes from collaboration.

Honesty

At this moment of crisis, there is a real opportunity for you to demonstrate important leadership traits, starting with authenticity. Such traits can help you to increase the positive energy each time you engage with staff, clients and suppliers and will see you evolve as a competent champion. You should also show the foresight to pivot your business model as required to ensure your company prospers. Resilience will be needed, as will a large dose of pragmatism and humour. This, mixed with honesty, will galvanise your businesses for a greater future. Use the simple who, what, where, when, why and how framework to approach challenges and respond with outstanding solutions.

Revenues

As we emerge from lockdown there will be a need to quickly return to revenues. This has to be done while staying true to your purpose and aims, whether they are charitable, or community or commercially biased. You will also need to balance sensitivity with commercial reality. While providing support in tough times may have built relationships and sentiment, this should not be confused with the need for a strong value proposition. Acting quickly and making an immediate difference will give you the ability to retain and grow client revenues. New client acquisition equally needs to be a function of a rapid sales process and effective pipeline management.

Innovation

In the Covid-19 environment, innovation has been key to the survival and stability of businesses and sticking with this mindset will also allow you to thrive after lockdown. Think of some of the non-traditional collaborations we have seen in recent months, such as the Formula One teams joining forces with open designs, to manufacturer ventilators. Many entrepreneurs have rapidly got to grips with new technologies, such as Teams, Zoom, Google Hangouts and Sharepoint in recent weeks. Continuing in this same spirit by embracing big data, artificial intelligence and the internet of things should help you to improve and automate what you do and enable your business to thrive.

Velocity

To re-start or reimagine your business you will need the urgency and mindset of a start-up, and a focus on the marketing Ps of product, price, promotion, place and people. Use this period as a time to work ‘on’ the business, to refine your purpose and to take advantage of the lessons you’ve learned during the coronavirus crisis to inform your strategy for the future. If daily and weekly video calls have brought a crispness and clarity to the way your team works, how can you best apply this after the pandemic? And if your place is informed by digital and physical appropriateness, surely this will drive velocity and a stronger, quicker recovery.

Environment

An economist might argue that macro thinking and micro action on sustainability go hand in hand, so what does your business do to improve our world? And what does it do to protect and create jobs and increase profit (and pay tax)? As a business leader, these are things you can plan for. And in the post virus world they are likely to be high on the agenda.

So, what of the business-specific environment as Covid-19 recedes? Will a large office be needed? Could it accommodate social distancing? Do you need the cost, downtime and waste of excess travel? And what about the ongoing wellbeing of the team? How do these near-term issues drive organisational development now and for your future?

And can your annual operating plan be flexed if and when Covid-19 morphs into its next derivative? The notion of a robust yet agile plan is key and for the vast majority of SMEs, a plan will allow for flexibility and adaptation with a mix of deliberate and known actions, rather than actions that are simply a response to a changing situation.

The SME business community are the risk takers and the dream makers. You are critical in returning the economy to a new normal. For business leaders now is the time to adopt the mindset of a start up, commit, strategise and plan with velocity to thrive after lockdown. The Entrepreneur Club is here to help and if you’d like to take advantage of our complimentary Virtual Coronavirus Advisory Support sessions, speak to your St. James’s Place Partner.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Covid-19: through investors’ eyes

Investors tell us how they’re still on the lookout for promising companies despite the coronavirus outbreak

Covid-19: through investors’ eyes

In the past couple of months, our world and working practices have changed drastically due to the Covid-19 pandemic. Workplaces have scrambled to adapt, and for the most part have done so successfully. But how has the pandemic affected tech investment? With a global recession on the horizon, there have been some worrying stories in the press about the ability of the UK’s tech start-ups to weather the storm. However, this gloomy outlook is not necessarily warranted.

A study carried out by Plexal, a workspace provider, and start-up database Beauhurst found that British start-ups had raised £663m1 since the coronavirus lockdown began in the UK. Looking at funding rounds between March 23 and April 27 2020, the study found that start-ups actually raised 34% more than in the same period last year (although the number of deals done was down).

But even with this positive news, entrepreneurs may be uncertain about the funding opportunities currently available.

Zooming in

Karen McCormick, Chief Investment Officer at transatlantic venture capital investor Beringea, says that the company quickly adapted its entire investment process so that it could be delivered digitally. First meetings are arranged on Zoom, ‘digital site visits’ have taken place, and the company has hosted investment committees remotely. These adaptations mean that Beringea has been able to manage its investment process safely and effectively, looking after the health of its own team as well as that of entrepreneurs.

“We had initial concerns about whether we would truly be able to build our conviction for an investment while not being able to meet the entrepreneurs in person or travel for on-site visits,” says Karen. “So far, however, we do not feel the lack of these traditional interactions has created problems.”

Alessandro Casartelli, Executive Director at GP Bullhound, a technology advisory and investment firm, says that as meeting physically is no longer an option, management teams are spending more time with investors on video, and meeting more team members. “Sometimes we organise sessions without an agenda that are a bit more casual; it really helps to build that rapport and chemistry that is essential for doing a deal.”

He also affirms that it’s very much been business as usual, with the company in the process of making several investments. “Certain businesses – for example those in videoconferencing, e-commerce or marketplaces, among others – have had a boost,” he says. “They’ve accelerated their growth and they’re in a position of strength.”

Still investing

Beringea’s investment has also not slowed down. The fund has co-led a US$29m investment in EDITED, a retail data and analytics platform that works with top-tier names such as Zara, Chloé and Boohoo, to improve their pricing and merchandising decisions. It also led a US$3.75m funding round for Luxury Promise, a resale marketplace that enables consumers to shop sustainably for pre-owned luxury goods. The firm has several more investments in the pipeline, including those that began after the start of lockdown. “Covid-19 has not changed our core investment strategy, but it has carved out interesting niches,” says Karen.

As we continue to rely on remote working and apps, online security and AI solutions will thrive. Karen says that Beringea is increasingly interested in the areas of FinTech, RegTech and cyber security – all sectors the firm focused on before the pandemic, but which it sees as of even greater interest and importance now. In addition, says Karen, people are more concerned about their health and wellbeing, so innovations in how we manage both remotely will be key growth areas.

“We see plenty of opportunities for entrepreneurs, whether they are selling to business or consumers. There are certainly still challenges ahead, but the businesses that can adapt to the new environment will survive and thrive,” she says. She does sound a note of caution, though, saying that companies should carefully consider their ideas and plans and whether they might thrive in the current climate – are they offering a particularly popular service? – or whether it might serve them better to put things on pause for a while during this uncertain time. “In terms of raising from Beringea, it is worth remembering that we are primarily concerned with backing talented entrepreneurs that can build successful teams. It is important that we understand the short-term impacts of Covid-19 on your company, but we are ultimately focused on your skills and expertise.”

Alessandro says that long-term thinking is more important than ever. “It’s really important when you speak with people that you’re very well prepared, not only to answer short-term questions but also on how you’re reacting to this new normal.”

Pitching’s new normal

As to the new norms of pitching, Karen’s main advice is to not be nervous about some of the distractions that can inadvertently pop up in meetings. “We are used to, and comfortable with, kids running across the background, screens freezing up for a minute, slow connections etc. Try not to let these things faze you – they certainly don’t faze us at this point!” She does, however, point to the importance of ensuring that if you choose to use a false background, it isn’t too distracting.

Alessandro says that when pitching, entrepreneurs should be aware that communicating emotion through video can be harder than in person. “It’s important that the presenter pays attention to the body language of those on the call to see if they’re interested, or if they should speed up or slow down. You should take pauses, make sure people ask questions and make it interactive.”

“One thing that probably needs to be different when pitching remotely rather than in person is you must have more than one team member who can answer important questions,” says Karen. “A gap in knowledge can be far more challenging – for example, you will not give a good impression if your finance director has a connection that is too poor to be useful or cuts out, leaving you with no one to cover their areas of expertise. Make sure that you are fully briefed on each other’s slides – it is more work, but it will spare your blushes,” she says.

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.Source

1. https://www.cnbc.com/2020/04/28/coronavirus-uk-start-ups-have-raised-825-million-during-lockdown.html

How to exit in 2020

Demonstrate strong leadership through the pandemic and achieve three months of stable, sustainable profitability and growth

How to exit in 2020

Business owners have been left in a state of uncertainty amid the Covid-19 crisis, and none more so than those looking to sell in 2020. But while the global pandemic has led to a pause in acquisitions, an exit this year could still be possible.

“Transactions are being put on hold, but it’s a postponement rather than a cancellation,” explains Andrew Lock, Co-Founder and Partner at LockDutton Corporate Finance. But after months of hold-ups on the completion of M&A transactions, the wheels of business are beginning to turn, and private equity houses are now saying they are once again open for business. Enquiries around new purchases are beginning to rise and buyers are ready to complete purchases that have been put on hold. “They have stated that for owners of businesses that have previously expressed a desire to partially sell or sell in future, then they remain keen to keep the dialogue going,” says Andrew.

There hasn’t been enough activity since economies around the world came to a standstill to know whether those looking to sell should be preparing for a slight downward adjustment in price. But what is certain is that owners of SMEs looking to sell have an opportunity now that they didn’t before, as Martin Brown, CEO of Elephants Child, explains. “The very fact that they’ve survived shows a lot about resilience and the nature of that business,” he says. “In the SME space, most business owners don’t have a plan, and those that didn’t have a plan during the pandemic are likely to have suffered more than others.”

Show leadership

And it’s at a time like this that leadership qualities can shine and impress potential buyers – or further impress existing ones. “It’s interesting to see whether entrepreneurs have been able to show their resilience by demonstrating that they are a good and competent leader,” says Martin. “A key strength of a good leader is forward-thinking: we understand we’re in crisis, we understand it’s been something like we’ve never seen before, but as a leader I’m still thinking ahead to that exit event and preparing as best I can for it.”

But how can you show proof of preparation for something as unprecedented as this pandemic? “It’s the old notion of controlling the controllables,” Martin says. “If you sit back and are overwhelmed, or are waiting for things to happen, you can blindly drift into a situation. Whereas if you start to think about the future and the things that you need for exit, you start to take control.”

In fact, there’s no time like the present for leaders to get their heads down and start working towards that exit. “If you wait for the pandemic to end – and who knows how long it’s going to go on – you’re just going to lose time,” explains Martin. “Having that business plan and the financial projections, the cash and balance sheets and profit and loss, in the form of an information memorandum is good work that should be done now.”

Return to growth

But a slow return to activity means an acquisition will still take time. The exact time period will vary between buyers or private equity houses, but there is one commonality. “The acquiring party will want to see a stable and sustainable level of profitability and growth for a period of at least three months,” says Andrew. “So, if it takes until September for the business to be back up and running at full pace, then by early December the acquirers will have three months’ active information and would look to conclude a transaction shortly afterward.”

And owners who have had to take advantage of government loans or furlough employees and are worrying about how this may come across, needn’t. “As long as their narrative is clear about how they would then expect to recover and move away from those initiatives, I don’t think that’s an issue at all.”

Buyers will, of course, need to know how the business has performed in previous years, and this will by necessity include figures over the period of the pandemic, but as important are the figures for the business’ recovery and what it will look like in the next three years. In the concluding words of Andrew: “There is no reason to believe that well managed businesses will not be successfully sold.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Get virtual advice for Covid-19

Take advantage of our Virtual Coronavirus Advisory Support sessions to help your business survive, stabilise and thrive

Get virtual advice for Covid-19

The Entrepreneur Club is working hard to support businesses through these challenging times and that includes our complimentary web-based advisory service that gives businesses the opportunity to get the guidance they urgently need from SME specialists.

These sessions are run by business growth advisors Elephants Child. CEO Martin Brown explains: “On any given day we could speak to three, 30 or even 60 companies, all of which are trying to furlough people or leverage government grants or, in short, survive. The notion of social distancing is very real, so we’re doing most of our work on Zoom or Teams or whatever medium entrepreneurs prefer. I’ve just talked to one company that wants to realise £3m in January 2021 and another that wants to ramp up operations and needs to put together a budget for that. These are organisations doing very progressive things in very challenging times.”

If you would like to book a virtual session with an adviser, you can do so through your St. James’s Place Partner. In the meantime, we’ve asked Martin to answer some key questions that could help companies struggling through the Covid-19 outbreak.

What are the most common challenges during the crisis?

Some businesses were decimated almost instantly, losing all or the vast majority of their business very quickly, so their challenge is very much about keeping the lights on and surviving this initial sharp, intense impact. There are others we talk to who are still not taking action; they are still taking it all in and considering things and wondering what they should do next, which I think is a particularly dangerous approach. And others are taking the opportunity to spend time working on the business, plan and find a way through.

I think a useful way of looking at it is as a three-stage process: first of all being able to survive, then stabilise the business and then thrive and grow the business going forward.

What advice are you giving businesses?

What is crucial in this situation is how you act as a leader. So, the message is, think about yourself first and then the business. Identify what help and support you need – whether that’s for your own wellbeing, your own health, or mental clarity. Then you can think about your business. Take a step back, think, then go and communicate your plans and how you want to move forward.

Of course, when we normally plan, we think about a three-year strategy and then an annual operating plan and then turning that operating plan into half years, quarters and daily activity. In a crisis situation like this you’ve already got to flip that plan to a 90-day horizon and become very granular, doing things hourly and daily. And you need to manage liquidity and cashflow and what you can do to preserve cash and bring more in to survive.

What support is available to businesses during the crisis?

Our offer in the first instance is about just being there for clients and potential clients so they’ve got somebody to lean on, who can bring them a bit of balance and perspective. That starts with a telephone call to understand what the business situation is and what they’re wrestling with. We also help them understand the raft of support measures the government has put together: job retention and deferment and various grants and business interruption loans they might be able to access.

How can businesses make the most of opportunities during the crisis?

Use this time to think about and address all of the things you can do to improve your business and make it relevant when we come through the other side. Start by supporting your clients, helping them and being generous with them. Even if that doesn’t lead to billable work, hopefully when the recovery comes, you’re top of mind. Communicate well and get brand messaging out to a wider audience. Have good positive conversations now, and if your business model is right then over time that’s going to stand you in good stead.

Are there any reputational risks for businesses to be aware of?

Businesses are trying to balance what’s right for people in terms of keeping them healthy and gainfully employed versus what’s right for the business, the brand and the brand values. It is these judgement calls that amongst other things require those strong and competent leadership traits; authentic, forward thinking and the ability to leave all key relationships and situations in a better place than when you started.

What learnings can business leaders take from the crisis?

The global effect is so significant that a lot of businesses in real trouble now couldn’t have done anything to protect themselves. But others that had a contingency plan in place have experienced an impact, but are trading through it as a result of planning they did two, three or five years ago.

Businesses that don’t have a plan or are early in that process are being hit particularly hard because everything is a challenge and a variable and they don’t have a clear path through it. Many are seeing themselves fall over in the area of technology, for example, because they haven’t invested in it over the past two to five years and now it’s really biting them. So, I think the message is about planning, working on the business and taking the time to do that rather than being swept along. There will be positive changes to businesses from this crisis.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Protecting your wealth

How can entrepreneurs secure their personal wealth in the era of coronavirus?

Protecting your wealth

The coronavirus crisis is putting many businesses under pressure and placing a huge strain on entrepreneurs’ finances. For the majority of business owners, personal wealth is closely linked with business wealth, which means the threat to their money and future lifestyles is amplified.

It’s not uncommon for the lines between personal and business wealth to become blurred. Technical Connection consultant Simon Martin says: “An entrepreneur is extremely reliant upon his or her business. It provides for their present and future – their lifestyle is dependent on how their business is doing – so naturally it’s going to be quite important to get it right. As business owning entrepreneurs, often they are not very well diversified, so considering diversification as a removal of risk is important.”

Thinking about risk

In light of the pandemic, there is a lot to consider, and knowing what to do in such an unfamiliar situation can be daunting. Simon explains: “For a financial planner, risk is the key thing to consider and mitigate. Thinking about how to protect your business – because your business is the driver of your wealth.

“So, think about what actions you may need to take. It might be protection in terms of life insurance. It might be an element of diversification within your business; maybe look at new markets or new opportunities. Creating a really detailed financial plan that incorporates both business and personal assets is important. And also engaging with specialists to look at your business and make sure it’s as efficient and effective as it can be. The key action is - create a plan.”

Martin Brown of business growth advisers Elephants Child adds: “First you’ve got to survive and stabilise your business, but then you want to push on and thrive. Now is a really good time to think about what your agenda looks like. Although we are in the midst of a crisis, there will be a way through it, the market will recover and we will recover, and everyone needs to be best placed to take advantage of that.”

Look after yourself

For you to effectively manage your personal wealth at the moment, he suggests that it’s important to start by looking after yourself: “Don’t be afraid to feel vulnerable or to lean on people. Don’t panic or bury your head in the sand. Do something positive and do something logical. If that means you need a bit of help, then so be it. It will pay dividends in the long run.”

To prepare for when we come out of the crisis, he suggests forward thinking and strategic planning: “Think about what you want in retirement, when you are going to retire, what you need and what you want to leave to others. From that standpoint, you can see what your pension looks like, what the gaps are, and what protection or tax-efficient wrappers you need to get in place.

“You then need to know what the business needs to do for you. If you think about it as enabling your future, you can review remuneration packages, consider key person shareholder protection and whether you are fully funding your pension. All those things often get lost because we’re just thinking about satisfying our next client, paying our next supplier and managing our teams. But these are things that you can do now, even in a time of crisis.”

The St. James’s Place Entrepreneur Club is uniquely placed to help you navigate the Covid-19 crisis. We can provide the business advice you need from people with many years of experience of running businesses themselves. And through your St. James’s Place Partner you can also access financial expertise so that you can develop a seamless and robust plan that spans your business and personal finances.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Cash in a time of crisis

As the Covid-19 crisis engulfs the country, entrepreneurs are forced to consider the impact it will have on their balance sheets, and implement strategies that will help their businesses emerge from lockdown safe and well

Cash in a time of crisis

April 2020 saw wave after wave of sobering news reports, from the Prime Minister’s health to the lack of PPE for frontline workers to the cancellation of the last few sporting events left on our summer calendar. But for business owners, one in particular is likely to cause sleepless nights. At the beginning of the month, the British Chambers of Commerce released its first Covid-19 Business Impact Tracker, in which it revealed that 44 per cent of UK businesses have less than three months’ worth of cash in reserve1.

With the economy predicted to be hit hard by the pandemic – a March 2020 report by KPMG sets out a downside scenario in which UK GDP contracts by 5.4 per cent in 20202 – what, if anything, can businesses do to survive? And how can entrepreneurs mitigate the impact this black swan event will have on not only their business but their own mental health as the stress of shrinking cash reserves plays on their minds?

Pivot and pare down

Julie Devonshire, Director of the Entrepreneurship Institute at Kings College London, believes that many entrepreneurs have the skills and mindset to emerge from the crisis stronger.

“We’ve already seen so much entrepreneurial behaviour,” she says. “People using their skills to solve problems, learning to innovate, working in diverse teams to increase the supply of essential items like face masks, scrubs and ventilators. You only have to walk down your local high street to see businesses working on their Revenue 2.0 models, pivoting to keep things ticking over. The catering trade, with the widespread move to takeaway and online delivery, is a classic example.”

Even if repurposing your business to sell fresh produce online or manufacture PPE isn’t possible, there’s still a great deal entrepreneurs can do to weather this storm, says leading entrepreneur, investor and technologist David Walsh, who is now Entrepreneur in Residence at the Institute.

“We’ve experienced downturns as severe as this before, and if you can get through it you will be a stronger business,” he says. “For most small businesses, a little money goes a long way, and it’s possible to make progress, albeit modestly. You’ve got to cut costs and look for ways of bringing revenue in. You’ve got to communicate clearly, accurately and respectfully with your clients, suppliers and banks to find a way to work together.”

Once a business has assessed its eligibility for government funding and put in place a cash flow plan and a vision for its return to normality, Julie says, there is an opportunity to look at what you can do in the meantime.

“Can you do other things with your brand and your business?” she asks. “For example, smarten up your premises, work on your brand, accelerate your digitisation, build in e-commerce or grow your online community?”

Julie cites the example of the author and influencer Joe Wicks, who has used the crisis to send his already strong brand supernova by offering free physical training sessions on YouTube, aimed at families in lockdown.

“His brand has just exploded. He’s done an amazing, entrepreneurial thing to support others and his business will be far better after this crisis,” she says. “If you can’t do anything about revenue now, you can still build your business for the future. Many businesses forget how much you can do with very little and how much you can achieve by being lean and agile. You don’t need £30,000 to build a website, develop an online community and amass a social media following. And we all have time for that now.”

Don’t worry, be happy

Of concern to many entrepreneurs is the drying-up of investment funding following the crisis. In early April, the tech community launched the Save our Start-ups campaign3 – which resulted in a £1.25bn equity-based liquidity package from the government to rescue at-risk start-ups4 – and businesses in other sectors looking for investment face tough decisions too.

“Investors are not necessarily looking for new investments, but they are keen to keep those they’ve already funded running,” David says. “But there are still funds out there looking, and amazing opportunities in sectors that are not impacted by the crisis. It’s important at times like this that investors show leadership, act positively and stick together.”

Even if cash-flow worries are mounting up, Julie emphasises the importance of maintaining perspective.

“Resilience is vital for entrepreneurs,” she says. “This is an opportunity to understand where your levels of resilience lie and try to improve them. People keep returning to this being about more than business: people’s health, families and happiness are most important, and that helps them to focus on practical things they can do to help get through this. And we will – a vaccine will come, lockdown will end. One way or another, this is temporary.”

David emphasises the importance of ethical behaviour by businesses during times of crisis. “I have seen poor behaviour from some landlords and banks. But when we come out of this, there will be those who can hold their heads high and say they did the right thing. The real test is what we do to help one another, and how we can emerge from this leaner, fitter and more resilient so we can look back and say we had a good Covid crisis.”


1. https://www.britishchambers.org.uk/news/2020/04/bcc-coronavirus-business-impact-tracker

2. https://home.kpmg/uk/en/home/media/press-releases/2020/03/covid-19-brings-uk-economy-to-temporary-standstill-but-upturn-expected-in-2021.html

3. https://saveourstartups.co.uk/

4. https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/business-52348409

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Bouncing back fast

Now is the time to plan for recovery.

Bouncing back fast

Businesses, communities and individuals have already been impacted dramatically as a result of the global Covid-19 pandemic. Now that most businesses have put their continuity plans in place or closed down completely, it is time to look to the future and plan for recovery.

We are still in the middle of the crisis, and most businesses are somewhere between reacting to the situation as it unfolds and adapting their working practices so they can still deliver for customers clients and do the right thing by their people.

When a crisis hits, good companies do three things fast;

  • Their leaders step forward and are visible,
  • They make decisions quickly to protect their people and get continuity plans in place; and
  • They communicate clearly and regularly.

But this is the basics.

Surviving through this is only part of the challenge. We now need to start to plan for growth and recovery.

 

The “New” Normal

There will be a few organisations that will click back to old processes and ways of working when this is all over. They will thrive on having some normality back and will put the interim changes they needed to make to survive and continue behind them. They will thank people for the things they did to help the business continue, and they will move on.

High-performing businesses will think differently. They will do three critical things which will enable them to bounce back faster and stronger than before.

 

Grow and Inspire

Successful businesses will look for ways to learn and adapt from the experience and will use it as a catalyst for growth and evolution.  They won’t just revert to the old ways of working but will look at what they can learn from the changes they made. They will evaluate what worked, what didn’t and most importantly will decide which new practices they keep and could apply more broadly. I am sure if you told the NHS they could get a new supplier of ventilators through their rigorous procurement and testing processes in a matter of days and weeks before Covid-19, they would have said it was highly unlikely, if not impossible. Now they know it’s possible you would hope their Covid-19 procurement process becomes the norm.

In crisis mode people are able to think outside the box. You need to become creative problem solvers to be able to react to the changing situation. Work out where you can apply this new way of thinking elsewhere in the business to drive change and better performance.
Create symbols of change which demonstrate the positive things that can emerge from this period. Find things big and small that you are doing differently and tell the world… well, the people in your business at the very least. This links directly to recognition. Following a crisis there are always tales that bring to life the spirit of your business. Find them, celebrate them proudly and use them to inspire others.

 

Engage and Thrive

Now is the time to invest for growth.

This crisis will impact your strategy and the way your brand is perceived for the foreseeable future. You might need to change your approach, or you may not have the funds for investment that you thought you would, or you could have had to completely pivot your business to survive.  

Take the time to review your strategy, identify whether it is still fit for purpose. If it is not, work with your people to set a new path. Paint a clear vision for the future and build the journey you will go on to achieve your goals together. When you have defined your strategy, review your learning and development strategy to ensure that it will build the skills you need to make you future fit.

A crisis is an opportunity to see the true DNA of your business. Make sure they are the same characteristics that will enable your growth and prosperity and invest in making sure your culture is evident at every stage of your employee journey.  Bacardi have spent years focused on their culture, making sure their employee experience reflects their DNA Fearless, Founders and Family are not just words but direct how they work as colleagues and how they do business. In a crisis you see this come to the fore spontaneously, whether that’s changing production lines to make hand sanitizer or launching a new product to raise money for charity. This happens because their people are empowered to truly bring the Bacardi spirit to life in the best and worst of times. 

The right culture will drive customer loyalty and growth, so take this moment of reflection to think about your culture.  Does it need to be redefined to enable you to achieve your goals?

 

Involve and challenge

When your strategy and vision is defined, your people are clear on their role in helping you succeed and your culture is hard-wired into every step of your employee journey, it will be easier to find opportunities for continuous improvement. 

Listen to your people to find out what is getting in their way and create the forum and mechanism for them to solve the problems. Remind people what your purpose is to help you drive productivity, effectiveness and problem solving. Create moments and platforms for innovation for your entire team, not solely the innovation function. Work out loud to enable others to collaborate, connect and contribute so that you can leverage your entire talent pool, particulary in moments of crisis.   

Navigating a business through such difficult times is not something most leaders will have experienced.  This is new territory. Looking for the opportunities to reinforce who you are and what you stand for will be critical. The challenge is not to be underestimated especially when many businesses will also need to rebuild trust and re-engage people who they have furloughed during this period.  Unleashing, empowering and inspiring your talent though this experience will be key.  This is not something we can cost cut our way out of.

 

We need to think differently. We need to be ambitious. We need to put the human back into business.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of United Culture.

Key tools for remote working

The software that can keep your remote team working seamlessly together

Key tools for remote working

The Covid-19 crisis means that the vast majority of companies have had to move to home working. For some employees, this will be the first time they have worked from home; for many companies, this will be the first time their entire workforce has had to work remotely at the same time. 

Prithwiraj Choudhury, Lumry Family Associate Professor of Business Administration at Harvard University, says that companies should avoid letting employees feel distanced or alone, which can happen easily without the typical day to day casual meetings and conversations easily engendered in an office setting. “Check in on workers and team members’ psychological wellbeing,” he says. “Try to socialise online – set up virtual watercoolers”.

He notes the importance of ensuring these activities are optional (so that workers don’t feel under extra pressure) and also that there are several scheduled social activities, so that people are able to attend while still fulfilling their other obligations outside of the workplace.

Jean-Nicolas Reyt of the Desautels Faculty of Management at McGill University agrees, saying: “A lot of the ‘teaminess’ in teams comes from informal interaction with peers. Research shows that teleworkers who are not involved in these informal interactions tend to feel isolated. It is essential for teams to use online tools to recreate these types of interaction. A meeting on Zoom in the morning is a good way to check in with everyone.”

As to what companies should bear in mind when choosing the platform(s) on which to work remotely, Prithwiraj says: “More than the tools, it’s the habit. It’s human routines that are hard to change”. He advises being patient with employees in this unusual time. And Jean-Nicolas notes that managers need to focus more on ‘why’ the work is done and let their subordinates figure out the ‘how’.”

With this advice in mind, we run through several software options below to help you pick out the best for your team.

Skype

Now a household name, Skype has been around since 2003. A telecoms application, Skype allows users to make video chat and voice calls across a range of devices, from desktop computer to mobile. It also provides instant messaging services, but its primary use is for enabling voice or video communication.

Skype’s Meet Now option allows you to invite Skype contacts and those without a Skype account to a collaboration space, either via the app or through web browser. Call recordings are stored for up to 30 days.

Zoom

Founded in 2011, Zoom offers remote video conferencing services. Easy to use, and available through an app or web browser, since the lockdown usage has exploded. There is no need to create a Zoom account, and it is free to use. However, paying customers get perks such as unlimited meeting times and can use the software’s Zoom Room offering. This allows companies to schedule and launch Zoom meetings from conference rooms; up to 500 participants can join.

Of course, a key concern with Zoom is its security flaws, with reports of ‘zoombombing’ (when hijackers take over a call) and with the revelation that it was easy to find thousands of user videos online. While some municipalities, schools and organisations have chosen to ban the use of Zoom, others have embraced the software. Zoom continues to work on patching up its security flaws.

Teams

If your business already has an Office365 subscription, Microsoft Teams is an easy choice to make as it integrates with Office. Teams can also be customised so that it easily works with other existing software your company uses, such as Creative Cloud, Trello and Google Analytics.

Teams allows direct text chat between participants, which can easily be turned into a one-on-one or conference call. Within a team, different channels can be set up for different conversations. Files can be uploaded to the app.

Trello

Launched in 2011, this Kanban-style software allows users to create task boards and track projects across them. Deceptively simple, Trello can be used to map the most complex tasks and assign roles. By creating ‘cards’, users can add comments, upload files and create checklists. Everyone invited to a board gets notifications as to actions taken, so nobody misses out. Trello offers various add-ons; some are subscriber-only, but others are free.

Slack

This business communication platform brings a company’s communications together into one space. All content on the platform can be easily searched, from conversations to copy contained within files and presentations. Users communicate via text and can speak through public or private channels. Files can easily be dragged and dropped into Slack and shared with colleagues; they can then comment on these instantly. Slack can be used via app or web browser, and is built to integrate with other tools a company may be using. 

Basecamp

This project management tool allows users to divide up their work either via project or team. Message boards mean users can easily track a project’s process and send messages either to all in a group, or to sub-groups. To-do lists and schedules can be set up, and all are accessed via the same easy-to-navigate page. For more informal chats, there is Campfire. Basecamp encourages users to use this chat interface for quicker comments and chats. Basecamp can also be synced with email, so that users can get notifications when messages are sent in the software.

Whatsapp

Although primarily seen as a personal app, used for chatting with friends and making calls, Whatsapp also has a desktop version, Whatsapp Web. The software (both app and desktop) features end-to-end encryption, meaning that file-sharing and conversations are secure. Users can send files and voice notes to one another via text and can make video and audio calls. Chat group size can be anywhere from two to 256. 

Lockdown is a chance to get to grips with some of the most exciting software tools on the market – and they could see your business through to more normal times.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

COVID 19 – Business Owners’ Advisory Service

In this time of crisis, the immediate focus is how to survive... and then, how to thrive

COVID 19 – Business Owners’ Advisory Service

There’s no getting away from the fact that recent events have changed the way we live and do business. As a business owner you will be feeling a range of emotions, with your livelihood and those of many others seemingly on the line. In this time of crisis, the immediate focus is how to survive. And then, how to thrive.

This guide provides vital strategies and tactics you can implement right now and in the medium term, to ensure your business does both – survive and thrive. It’s important to create some space between the stimulus and the response. So, take ten minutes to understand the shift you have to make from what you knew, to the current environment - which is covered in the opening section of this guide. Once you’ve flipped your focus, the guide provides a useful timeline, outlining what you need to do, and when, backed up by our support to help you navigate the uncertain waters ahead. You’ve probably done some of this already, but please be reassured that there are plenty of resources available to you.

 

Create the space

In normal times, our advisory support for you is spread across a number of fundamental operating activities, primarily encompassing:

• Strategic intent or long-term view on the direction of travel
• Three-year plan
• Annual operating plan
• Half-yearly focus
• Quarterly tracking
• Monthly performance to promises, compliance and governance
• Daily action

However, these aren’t normal times, so we need to flip this and focus all of our attention on four specific key areas only, namely:

• Daily actions and outcomes
• Weekly reflection, refinement and we go again
• Monthly performance to promises, compliance and governance
• Quarterly – 90 day rolling plan

 

Timeline

In an ideal world, you would have already completed these daily actions in Week 1 of crisis management:

Day 1: You. And assess if your business is at immediate risk.
Day 2: Support
Day 3: Cash and costs
Day 4: Risk Register
Day 5: Outcomes

DAY 1: YOU

Define what support you need both business and personal. What is your work mode for the coming weeks and months? Start with you. Take care of you and yours.

Who do you need to help and support? Think about the key relationships in your business and how you can support them, what do you want them to think and how do you want them to behave in these times of crisis:

  • You – can you reduce your cost burden on the business
  • Clients
  • Suppliers
  • Your Team
  • Investors
  • Stakeholders

Create a communications plan that includes providing employees and other stakeholders with regular situation updates as well as actions taken.

Is your business at immediate risk? We can offer you access to practical and pragmatic advice so that you satisfy your duty of care and powers under Companies Act 2006 and connect you with insolvency practitioners, if appropriate.

Make some assumptions. This pandemic will have a material impact and change certain practices and thinking forever. Global experts will find a cure. We will get through this. We have recovered from other market shocks.

Set some context. This is unparalleled, we are all in this together, now is a great time to lead and work on the business.

Your team: Ensure staff can work from home and have the necessary systems and access at their disposal to do so. Create a ‘work from home’ policy and share it with the workforce.

 

DAY 2: SUPPORT

Access the support that is around you, start with the Government

Work through these support mechanisms and leverage those that are appropriate for you. This will change by the day. A package of measures to support businesses including:


a Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme
• deferring VAT and Income Tax payments
• a Statutory Sick Pay relief package for SMEs
• a 12-month business rates holiday for all retail, hospitality, leisure and nursery businesses in England
• small business grant funding of £10,000 for all business in receipt of small business rate relief or rural rate relief
• grant funding of £25,000 for retail, hospitality and leisure businesses with property with a rateable value between £15,000 and £51,000
• the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme offering loans of up to £5 million for SMEs through the British Business Bank
• a new lending facility from the Bank of England to help support liquidity among larger firms, helping them bridge coronavirus disruption to their cash flows through loans

• the HMRC Time To Pay Scheme

 

DAY 3: CASH & COSTS

Cash is king, maintaining liquidity is key.

• Collect your cash and manage debtors closely
• Can you extend or defer payment to creditors
• See 2 above for Time to Pay, Deferment, Grant and loan options
• Assess each line of your profit and loss account; can you enjoy payment holidays, reduce or enjoy rebates on say; rent, communication and utility costs.
• Appeal to your time in line with employment law and empathy as to volunteers for reduced working hours and salaries.
• Work out weekly expenditure and make a contingency plan.
• Contact existing debt providers for support.
• Explore financial instruments e.g. discounting, factoring, supply chain loans and term loans.

We can provide access to specialists partners in costmanagement, financial experts who can model cashflow and recommend actions and funders who can provide advice.

 

DAY 4: RISK REGISTER (90-DAY ROLLING PLAN)

A Risk Register approach is a great way to stress-test your current plan or frame the needs for the contents of a plan if you do not have one? Your plan will need to flex as the pandemic impact unfolds.

  • List the risks, suggested headings could include but are not limited to; You, Team, Clients, Sales, Cash, Cost, Insurance, Proposition, Technology, Data, Funding and Markets.
  • Think about the potential outcome of each risk.
  • Define the likely impact, the likely probability and score each out of 5, multiply Impact * Probability to give a score or priority.
  • List what action you can take to mitigate the risk.
  • Define who is taking the action and when.

From this, produce a 90-day rolling plan - A contingency plan e.g. building closure plan, contract clarification, deep cleanprovider, deep clean methodology and sick pay policy.

 

DAY 5: INSURANCE

Review your policy and check with your insurance broker if you need confirmation of the type of insurance you have purchased.

It is highly unlikely that the vast majority of businesses will have any cover for losses following COVID-19. Businesses who have cover for Trade Credit Insurance will have cover for their customers who owe money for products or services and do not pay their debts or pay them later than the payment terms dictate. This could result from businesses not being able to pay for goods and services delivered as the result of Coronavirus.


Be sensible, practical and, above all, calm when managing risk and engage an expert who can help you with this.

 

WEEK 2: 

Reflect on the outcomes from week 1. Re-assess your ability to survive and structure your approach to Day 6 and each day thereafter.

• Have you improved or fully address the actions from week 1; you, support, cash and costs, plan and insurance.
• Which actions do you need to carry forward?
• Think about and deliver great Leadership (see below)
• Review the previous days outcomes and actions.
• Review the previous days COVID 19 advice and support.
• Action carried forward from week 1 e.g. COST or a new action.


Leadership

The five attributes of effective leadership in Volatile Uncertain Complex Ambiguous (VUCA) times are thus:

1. Visibility
2. Sensible, considered and pragmatic responses
3. Positivity and frequency in communications
4. Authenticity and integrity
5. Care and empathy

Being mindful of these in all your business dealings both with colleagues and employees, and with external contacts and suppliers, will ensure that you maintain a sense of calm and measured leadership throughout the duration of this crisis.

 

Next steps: Join our Covid-19 - Business Owners' Advisory Service

To help and support you through these challenging times, we have set up a complimentary web-based advisory service with a specialist SME business adviser. These sessions are designed to be led by you, exclusively focusing on your specific issues, needs and support requirements. As well as providing access to specialists, we can cover some or all of the following topics:

1. Manage client relationships
2. Improve cash and liquidity
3. Reduce costs
4. Understand and leverage insurance
5. Winning new business in a crisis
6. Using technology
7. Access to finance
8. Operational resilience, ‘keeping the lights on’
9. Communicating effectively in crisis
10. Lead and inspire – executive coaching

Talk to your St. James’s Place Partner to book an hour-long session with our virtual consultancy service, which can help you manage the challenges of Covid-19.

 


Covid-19: get the help you need

We'll guide you to the support available to see your business safely through the pandemic

Covid-19: get the help you need

The pandemic has been sudden and extremely challenging with many businesses forced to close as part of a national strategy to slow the virus and protect the vulnerable. With economic activity suspended in many sectors, a huge effort has been made to support companies until Covid-19 is brought under control. Here are just some of the tools to help you shelter your business.

1. Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme

Your bank may be able to help if your business gets into difficulty because of Covid-19. The Government and Bank of England have made billions of pounds available to support small and medium-sized enterprises through the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme. It will provide lenders with an 80% guarantee on each loan. The scheme will support loans up to £5 million and your business is eligible if it has a turnover of no more than £45 million. The full rules of the scheme and list of accredited lenders is available on the British Business Bank website.

2. Job retention scheme

The Chancellor has announced a coronavirus job retention scheme, allowing any employer to apply to HMRC to have up to 80% of a member of staff’s salary paid – capped at £2,500 a month. This will be backdated to 1 March and run for three months (a timescale that will be kept under review). All UK businesses are eligible for the scheme but you will need to designate affected employees as ‘furloughed workers’ and provide information about them and their earnings through an online portal. At the time of writing HMRC was working urgently to set up a system for reimbursement.

3. Time to Pay

If you think you may be eligible for support from HMRC through Time to Pay, which allows you to pay tax over a longer period, you can call the helpline number on 0800 024 1222. Arrangements are agreed on a case-by-case basis and can be tailored to your circumstances and liabilities. In a further bid to help, HMRC has also deferred VAT for the next quarter and you won’t need to make any VAT payments during this period. You have until the end of the 2020/2021 tax year to pay any liabilities that have accumulated over the period.

4. Statutory sick pay and Employment Allowance

Small and medium-sized businesses (employing fewer than 250 people on 28 February 2020) can reclaim statutory sick pay (SSP) for absence due to Covid-19. It covers up to two weeks of SSP per eligible employee. You need to maintain a record of staff absences and SSP payments but employees do not need to provide a GP fit note. If you require evidence employees can get an isolation note from NHS 111 online. In addition, small employers with a National Insurance bill of £100,000 or less will continue to qualify for Employment Allowance, which will be expanded to £4,000 per business from this month.

5. Business rates holidays

A business rates holiday for retail, hospitality and leisure businesses in England has been introduced for the 2020/21 tax year. And if you received the retail discount in the 2019/20 tax year you will be re-billed for this period. Eligible properties include shops, cafes, restaurants, drinking establishments, cinemas, live music venues and those used for assembly and leisure, hotels, guest and boarding premises and self-catering accommodation. This will apply to your April council tax bill and you don’t need to take any action. In addition, Small Business Grant Scheme funding of £10,000 is available to some businesses – your local authority will contact you if you are eligible. The governments of Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland have launched similar help.

6. Insurance cover

Think about how your business insurance will work if your business has to close due to an outbreak of the virus. Check the wording because standard policies may not include any protection if your business suffers because of disease. Talk to your broker to see if you have business interruption cover in your commercial insurance policy. Once you have confirmed that you have business interruption cover, check if you have an extension for ‘notifiable diseases’. If you have this policy wording, you should contact your broker/insurer to see if coronavirus is covered. Most businesses do not have insurance that covers a pandemic, however, and in this case, you should consider the Government support on offer.

7. Self-employed Income Support Scheme

If you are self-employed or a member of a partnership, you can claim a taxable grant worth 80% of your trading profits, up to a maximum of £2,500 a month, for the next three months and this timescale may be extended. You should check the Government's advice on the Self-employed Income Support Scheme to make sure you are eligible. Among the requirements, you must have submitted a self-assessment tax return for 2018-19 and your self-employed trading profits must be less than £50,000, while more than half of your income must come from self-employment.

At the time of writingit was not possible to apply for this scheme. HMRC will contact you if you are eligible and invite you to apply online. You may be entitled to 80% of trading profits from the three tax years between 2016 and 2019.

8. Government advice

The Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy has launched a dedicated business support helpline, where small business owners in England can get advice on how to minimise the impact of coronavirus. The number is 0300 456 3565 but you can also email enquiries@businesssupporthelpline.org. The Scottish Government’s helpline number is 0300 303 0660; the number for Wales is 0300 060 3000 and in Northern Ireland it is 0800 181 4422.

The Entrepreneur Club is here to help. You can read our guide or talk to your St. James’s Place Partner to book an hour-long session with our virtual consultancy service, which can help you manage the challenges of Covid-19.


Links from this article exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. The existence of a link to another website does not imply or express endorsement of its provider, products or services by us or St. James’s Place. Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab.

Exit during a pandemic

There are still some buyers out there but most owners will have to navigate the Covid-19 crisis before considering a sale

Exit during a pandemic

Exit plans will have been thrown into disarray for many entrepreneurs by the sudden and devastating impact of Covid-19. Many now face a period of uncertainty just at the moment they had hoped to sell up and reap the rewards of years of hard work.

Corporate finance company Entrepreneurs Hub says that while some buyers remain upbeat and committed to purchases that have already been negotiated, it is impossible to say whether they will finally sign on the dotted line if the crisis continues for some months.

Entrepreneurs Hub Director Andrew Shepperd says: “Strong acquirers are still looking and these broadly fall into two categories: opportunists looking to pick up businesses on the cheap, mimicking activity after the 2008 financial crash; and strong companies taking advantage of the lack of competition to buy very special businesses or those that will help them power through this crisis."

Changing landscape

And the mergers and acquisitions landscape has shifted significantly, with new ‘hot’ sectors emerging that are related to the pandemic. These include pharmaceuticals, healthcare, healthcare supplies, online ordering, home delivery and distribution, cloud and online businesses, video streaming and electronic gaming.

Malcolm Murray, also a Director at Entrepreneurs Hub, says: “Obviously you are going to have certain types of businesses that are going to do quite well through this period. These are people supplying the UK in sectors such as medical equipment, manufacturing, distribution and supply. But if we look at the high proportion of business owners, they have been significantly impacted over the past two or three weeks.

“If you were planning to exit it is time for damage limitation and what you can do to make sure the business stays as profitable as possible. It is going to slow the market down for a period in certain sectors but we still have buyers saying: We are committed to this. We know it’s a freak period and we are still committed. Of course, what I can’t say, if I’m being honest, is what timeline they will complete the deal in."

Start contingency planning

So, the advice for those about to exit is the same for all entrepreneurs at this critical moment: don’t panic and understand the situation your business is in. You need to really understand your business and how long your cash will last. Then you can make a contingency plan, whether that means accessing government loans or furloughing staff.

Malcolm adds: “There is a mix of emotions at the moment. Some business owners are afraid. Others are saying they just have to make some hard decisions, and I think that’s the key. Doing nothing is not an option. This isn’t just something that might go on for a couple of weeks. It could go on for two or three months, so you’ve got to take action to protect your cash. We are encouraging business owners to look at their cash flow for the next three to six months and what they might need to do with staff who can’t work.

“We are in unprecedented times – your turnover and profits may take a short-term hit,” he adds. “Stay in contact and maintain your relationships with your customers so you understand their situation and they know you are there for them and will return when the country returns to some normality. Don’t focus on the situation, focus on taking actions to implement a plan to ensure you control costs, maintain cash and longer-term profits.”

Malcolm says that many owners he has spoken to regret not selling sooner and more may consider an exit once the pandemic is past in order to bank any further risk. And for many, the clear lesson that has emerged is the need to maintain higher cash reserves to ensure their companies are as resilient as possible and can weather any storm.

The Entrepreneur Club is here to help. You can read our guide or talk to your St. James’s Place Partner to book an hour-long session with our virtual consultancy service, which can help you manage the challenges of Covid-19.


Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Making the most of alternative finance

The rise of alternative finance shows there’s more than one way to get the growth funds you need

Making the most of alternative finance

Entrepreneurs have benefited from significant growth in alternative finance over the past five years. According to the British Business Bank’s Small Business Finance Markets 2019/20 report, between 2014 and 2018 the value of smaller business asset finance deals has risen 32% to £19.4bn, while the amount of equity finance increased by 131% to £6.7bn. In the meantime, however, traditional bank lending has remained flat.

Part of this is legacy from the financial crash of 2008 when bank lending evaporated. But Mark Brownridge, Director General of the Enterprise Investment Scheme Association which supports UK investors and small businesses, says that companies are also more aware of the range of finance options available.

Finance for agile growth

Mark says: “It isn’t always appropriate for early-stage companies to borrow as they may not have revenue and can’t pay off the interest and the capital."

He believes British businesses are following a trend established in the US where equity finance is much more mainstream, and where young enterprises are more open to giving a stake in the company in return for cash. “SME businesses are far more aware of equity funding as an option, and I think that will only increase in the future. A lot of businesses look across to the US and see the trend towards taking a lot of Venture Capital (VC) money, going big and quick with the fail fast kind of attitude – you can’t do that through bank lending.”

“Finance generally comes through a VC or fluid equity lending, and that kind of model is becoming more established in the UK where companies don’t just want to grow steadily based on revenue, they want to get a lot of investment and go quickly. You look at companies like Monzo and Revolut, and they’re taking a lot of equity funding and trying to get lots of customers and are not necessarily worried about revenue or profit."

The money raised from equity funds a range of things, often it is for cash flow and keeping the company running and paying wages, but it also finances new product development or entering new markets and taking the business to the next level.

Asset finance requires an asset to be loaned against and so generally favours manufacturing, engineering or transport-based industries. As a result, it tends to be used to invest in new assets such as machinery or fleet. Because there is security in the assets being refinanced or financed, there is plenty of flexibility with asset finance products, including seasonal payment structures.

You can find out more about how your business can benefit from alternative finance by speaking to a St. James's Place Partner.

What investors want

Investors, from VCs to angel investors, are looking at a broad range of sectors. However, Mark points to fintech, artificial intelligence, data analytics and public security as particularly popular areas at the moment. He says: “Different investors want to invest in different stages; some want to get right in at the first stage and be loose with the first wave of money and continue on that journey with the company and hopefully realise significant growth. Others don’t want to take early-stage development risk and want to come in later once the company has revenue and heading for profit."

Chris Barrett is an angel investor with a long and varied career spanning electronics, media, software development, and consultancy in the City of London. "Because of my background, I'm interested in media and financial ecosystems but also medical technology because of the fascinating crossover in different disciplines.”

Preferring to make his own investment decisions, Chris is not aligned to a syndicate, accessing deals both on crowd platforms and directly. He says: "It is unusual to see profit in the first few years, so patience is required."

While Chris is quick to filter out business ideas that don’t appeal or interest him, the people behind the concept are critical. “The entrepreneurs I work with are smart, and they need to have credibility. I look at the founders and figure out if they have the right stuff to follow their vision. They need to be agile and able to recognise if they’re going down the wrong route and pivot to the right opportunity."

While alternative finance can be more challenging to navigate than traditional bank lending, alternative finance providers understand the needs of SMEs and have specialist knowledge in a variety of sectors to support the business and their investment.


Please note that some of these methods for raising finance are unlikely to be the first options as there will be conditions attached to any agreement reached, which by their nature will be more onerous than those imposed by a mainstream lender.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Start-up loans - the ‘bots’ have arrived

Loan providers are automating more processes. Entrepreneurs have an opportunity to get ahead of the game

Start-up loans - the ‘bots’ have arrived

Vast amounts of data are now available on start-up businesses and their founders. Funders are tapping into these new data sets using advanced technologies to find and assess high-potential businesses. The rules of start-up funding are being re-written and savvy entrepreneurs will want to understand how they can win the bots over.

Loans now reaching start-ups

Traditionally, loan finance has not been available to start-ups. Lenders still typically want to see a trading history of around two years, often longer, before even considering a loan. But this is changing.

One lender targeting start-ups is Just Cash Flow plc, which uses a process they have called ‘augmented intelligence’. According to CEO John Davies, this takes advantage of machines’ ability to process large amounts of data very quickly, and couples it with experienced human insight.

Finding high-potential companies is mostly automated. Just Cashflow’s technology screens new companies registering with Companies House – around 16,000 per week1 – and identifies those which have a high potential to be successful.

John says this focusses mostly on the founders, not so much the characteristics of the business itself: “It is people and their actions who are mostly responsible for a business succeeding, and technology allows us to identify the ‘DNA’ of someone who is likely to be successful. The business might be a start-up, but the people are not necessarily starting-up. And particularly in the first few years of a business, it’s all about the people. Good people will learn and adapt to make that business a success.”

John does however stress that rolling out loans to start-ups is not a replacement for equity finance. His company targets businesses that will be able to generate revenues and profits very quickly and will be able to service loan repayments. Businesses where revenues and profits are still some way into the future would not qualify and are more suited to equity funding.

New data sets

Just Cashflow’s algorithm looks at a range of information to identify target companies. For example, it looks for founders who have appropriate experience (sector-specific, managerial and entrepreneurial experience) by searching sites such as LinkedIn. Their behaviour is considered, such as how quickly they get their website indexed, how well they have built a professional social media presence (perhaps a widely-followed blog, Facebook or Instagram account), and when they register for VAT. John says: “These are just some of the actions which are typical of people who are setting out their stall to create a successful business.”

Of course this can work both ways. According to John: “We tell our children to be careful on social media because some posts might look bad in a future job interview. The same thing applies to entrepreneurs who might be talking about their own business, clients or suppliers. Everything you put on the web stays on the web.”

After having been identified, the shortlist is manually reviewed by experienced underwriters with the most promising businesses invited to apply for a loan. If they do so, even more data becomes available to Just Cashflow before a final decision is made as applicants then give permission for it to access further data such as full credit reports. See Entrepreneur Club article Five reasons loans are declined for more information on what will be considered by loan underwriters at this stage.

Expect more automation

Rob Warlow, founder of SME loan broker Business Loan Services, says he hasn’t seen any other lenders deploy similar practices to Just Cashflow yet, but he wouldn’t be surprised if they are working on similar initiatives: “In today’s environment, this is the next logical step in loan underwriting. If useful, alternative data is out there, why not use it? And we have lots of brainpower in our ‘Fintech’ sector looking into things like this.”

What he also points out is that for larger loans, lenders are looking at similar data points anyway – such as a detailed assessment of a business owner’s experience – but are doing so manually. He says: “What is new here is the process of automating these assessments and making it efficient for lenders to use this data to assess smaller loans. This is only economically feasible for most lenders right now when it comes to larger loans.”

Rob sees these developments in automation as a positive. “For brokers like me, it could be seen as a form of cutting-out-the-middleman because you have lenders approaching businesses directly with most of the data they already need, so a broker isn’t needed. But if this development helps businesses to scale-up faster it gets them to the position where they will be looking for larger, more complicated loans (where brokers would typically be needed to advise companies on their loan applications) sooner – because they are growing faster. And that’s a great development for everyone.”

 

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

1. Just Cash Flow plc, February 2020.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief changes from £10 million to £1 million

The March Budget saw the Chancellor announce that Entrepreneurs’ Relief is being scaled back from £10m to £1m – how does this affect you?

Entrepreneurs’ Relief changes from £10 million to £1 million

If you’re a business owner, we’re sure you’ll agree that we’ve all been navigating some interesting challenges in recent times: an election, the Brexit process, the flooding that’s affected much of the UK, and Coronavirus.

To add to this, in the March Budget, we saw the Chancellor announce that Entrepreneurs’ Relief is being scaled back from 10m to 1m, which means the current tax benefit of 10% only applies to the first £1m.

Malcolm Murray, Director of Entrepreneurs Hub, reflects on the news: “As a business owner, you might be asking, “Why didn’t I sell my business sooner?” but it’s important to remain positive and have perspective. There will always be speculation and there’s no greater constant than change, so it’s always important to look at the bigger picture.”

Here are 3 questions that every business owner should consider now that Entrepreneurs’ Relief has changed.

 

1. Is the tax benefit of Entrepreneurs’ Relief the only reason you’d want to sell your business?

“In my 15 years of helping business owners sell their companies, I must honestly say I can only remember one business owner who came to us saying that the tax benefit was the main driver for wanting to sell his business”, says Malcolm.

Interestingly, when Malcom explored further, the fundamental reason for him and his wife was actually that they had built a solid business, but they’d worked themselves into the ground in the process. That was putting a lot of stress on them, so it was time to move onto their next chapter.

The reason most business owners want sell up is because they have come to the point where they know the timing is right for them and their family to exit. It can often be because they’ve lost their passion or the business has become stressful, so they want to move on and turn all those years of hard work into cash.

 

2. Do you wish you had rushed and sold your business just to beat any changes?

If you’re currently in the process of selling your business, then undoubtedly, you would have wanted the deal completed sooner. However, if you hadn’t started the process yet, then the implications of rushing a deal through could have impacted the value of the sale, especially if your company was not fully prepared to be sold.

Only start the sale process because you really want to sell the business. Secondly, only start the process after you have had a review with a reputable adviser who can confirm that now is indeed a good time to go ahead.

 

3. Would you agree that we can’t change the past, but we can change the future?

Selling your business and only paying 10% tax on the first £1m of the proceeds is still an attractive proposition for any business owner.

Not only that, your most lucrative sale is ultimately going to come from the quality of your business. If you can demonstrate strong growth potential, proper record keeping, clean books, written contracts with customers, staff and suppliers, and protected intellectual property then you’re onto a winner, no matter what’s going on with tax benefits.

So, don’t look back, look ahead and take the right steps to ensure your company is adequately prepared for sale and the marketed in the right way, to the right people.

The changes to Entrepreneurs’ Relief may result in you paying more tax when you sell your business and you may be kicking yourself that you didn’t sell up sooner. However, don’t dwell on the past but focus on the future and find opportunities to maximise the value when you exit – your St. James’s Place Partner can help you do this.

 

By taking the time to prepare for exit properly, you might be able to sell your business for £8m instead of £6m. Even paying tax under the new changes will still mean you are better off!


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. The value of any tax relief depends on individual circumstances.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

This article has been provided courtesy of Entrepreneurs Hub.

Growing by winning procurement contracts

It can be a daunting prospect for an SME to tackle a formal procurement process – but the rewards can be worth it

Growing by winning procurement contracts

Sourcing business from government and larger corporates is a massive opportunity for UK SMEs. These are huge, growing markets and both segments are very keen to buy more from smaller businesses. 

The UK government has set itself a target of spending 33% of its procurement budget on SMEs by 2022, which if reached, will be a big jump from the 24% level in 2017/181.

Large private sector companies are making similar noises. Construction giant Skanska spends over £1.2 billion annually across 5,500 suppliers2, the majority of which are SMEs, and its corporate community investment strategy states an intention to increase local procurement and SME spend.

But these larger organisations buy goods and services using very formal and often rigid procurement processes, which can be a daunting prospect.

Expect complexity (and bureaucracy)

Tom Evans, managing director of Pro-Outsourcing, who has worked in the procurement departments of large corporates such as Airbus and JCB, and now advises SMEs on procurement practices, says SMEs need to go into a procurement with their eyes wide open and be very well prepared. 

He says: “That large order from a big company may look like an attractive chunk of business, and it may very well be, but SMEs need to understand that it often comes with terms and conditions that are unfamiliar to them and stacked in favour of the buyer, with little or no room for negotiation. And as a rule of thumb, the bigger the company you deal with, the more hurdles there will be to jump over.” 

Tom highlights a number of areas SMEs tend to struggle with the most:

Payment terms are often 60 or 90 days – so SMEs in the manufacturing sector will need to find the cash to fund the purchase of raw materials as well as their product manufacturing and delivery costs while waiting for payment. They may also need to demonstrate to the buyer that they have the financial strength to do this, by providing them with financial statements and details of their access to finance.

Formal quality, ethical or social responsibility certifications or policies may be required to qualify as a supplier. These can seem like an unnecessary expense and inefficient use of management time for an SME but putting them in place will usually only have to be done once and they will put the business in good stead for future procurements. 

Onerous penalty clauses may be insisted upon, such as ‘liquidated damages’, which means incurring a financial penalty if deliveries are not made on time – a practice more common in sectors with just-in-time supply chains such as the automotive sector. Also, warranty and insurance requirements are often more demanding than SMEs expect. 

SMEs will also need to fit in with buyers’ existing systems, such as having to install a barcoding system to be compatible with that of the buyer.

Tom points out that while some buyers do try to help SMEs with meeting these requirements and might have training programmes in place, this is not always the case.

Top 10 tips for SMEs

Simon McCann, procurement specialist and partner at law firm Blake Morgan, has a list of ‘top tips’ for entrepreneurs who are looking at bidding for larger contracts, which have been drawn from his own experience of bidding for contracts, helping others bid for contracts, and acting as a tender evaluator for larger organisations:

1)    Don't waste your time bidding for everything. Focus on what you know you can do well. If it feels like you're stretching to make your experience or capabilities fit what the client is asking for, it's probably not worth the effort. Procurement teams are good at spotting the ‘hopeful’ bids and they generally go straight in the bin.

2)    Build relationships. In the business-to-business sector (as opposed to the public sector, where there tends to be greater detachment), if there are two tenders of similar strength, buyers are more likely to choose someone they know they can work with.

3)    Read the tender documents. Then read them again. Make a list of the key points the client is asking for. You'd be surprised how many tenders miss out key things or even answer the wrong question.

4)    Ask clarification questions if you're not sure. Buyers would rather get a bid in that's complete and responds to their requirements than one that wastes their time and misses the target.

5)    Look at the criteria and weightings (such as price, quality, experience etc). Spend most time and provide most detail on those with the highest weightings.

6)    Identify any ‘threshold requirements’, for example: a minimum level of experience, qualification, financial standing or insurance. If you can't meet these requirements, don't waste time bidding for that contract.

7)    Don't assume that because you have worked for an organisation before, they will take this into account. In many larger organisations, the procurement team are separate from the people you may have worked with, and they will only look at what you have submitted in your tender, not past track record. So make sure you put all relevant information into the tender.

8)    If you're bidding jointly with another business, check whether the buyer insists on joint and several liability (where each party is 100% liable for any losses, not just their ‘share’). If so, do due diligence on your partner to establish how strong they are. It might make sense to incorporate a separate joint venture company to contain the risk.

9)    If you're unsuccessful ask for feedback to find out what went wrong and what you can do to improve. In the business-to-business sector (not so much the public sector, as they tend to be more cautious) it is often more productive to offer to meet the decision-makers for a coffee or organise a phone chat – people will generally tell you more that way. Written responses tend to be formulaic and not as helpful.

10)    When you do a good job, ask for references and comments there and then, while the gratitude is still fresh. You will then have a stockpile to use, rather than pestering clients to give you a quote or a reference when you're up against a short tender deadline.

Getting the ball rolling

For public sector contracts, SMEs should register with and search the various government procurement websites - Contracts Finder (covering England), Public Contracts Scotland, Sell2Wales, and eSourcingNI and eTendersNI for Northern Ireland.

Simon also highlights the opportunity presented by getting onto ‘frameworks’ or ‘dynamic purchasing systems’, which effectively pre-approve suppliers for on-going work and then allocate specific contracts by a specified method or else by a "mini-tender", which is shorter and simpler than a full tender. These procurement methods typically relate to high-volume, repetitive purchases and can provide regular opportunities for SMEs without the time and expense of having to do a full tender.

For private sector contracts, SMEs may need to invest time searching and registering on individual websites, for example this supplier page of Hitachi Rail, or subscribe to one of the various commercial tender subscription services.

Lastly, Tom stresses that SMEs should look at their own procurement processes. He says: “I have found it is common for SMEs to struggle to get larger corporate deals simply because their prices are too high – and that is often because of their own sub-optimal procurement processes. Also, reducing your cost-of-sales can have a big impact on your bottom line.”

Typical areas of overspending by SMEs, according to Tom, include courier and logistics services (where he says savings opportunities of 50-60% are common); IT and IT support; and in the manufacturing sector, ‘over-specifying’ component parts sourced from suppliers, when a lower-specification component could do the job just as well.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Sources:

1. Inopsis, May 2019

2. Skanska, February 2020

Five ways to benefit from a growth market

Top tips on how entrepreneurs can reap the rewards

Five ways to benefit from a growth market

A decisive UK general election result has brought more certainty about the political landscape ahead for the next few years and could prompt entrepreneurs to be more confident around plans to grow their businesses. In this article, Martin Brown, founder of business advisors Elephants Child, provides five tips to help entrepreneurs take advantage of a growth market.

1. Plan to grow

“If you’re thinking about growing your business, it’s really important to commit those thoughts to a plan,” says Martin. “In doing that you need to stress-test all areas of your business – not only your core proposition but also back office functions like your IT and comms, systems and processes, KPIs, cashflow and structure. Ask yourself if those things can scale up. If they can’t, they will be constraints on your growth.

“Setting out both a business plan and operating plan for the next three years is absolutely critical to ensuring your business is set not only to grow but to grow and create value because that’s what is going to make it sustainable in the longer term.”

2. Capital structure

“A growth journey is going to bring different demands on your cash flow. You might have to buy stock, recruit people or invest in premises so capital structure is key. You must have working capital, so you have the scope for that growth,” says Martin.

“If you’re going to borrow, find the right kind of borrowing to suit your situation. But your finance approach could be anything from an overdraft to taking a term loan, using invoice discounting or selling some shares. 

“Whatever way you choose to finance your growth, remember investors will expect you to have a business plan with a financial model that supports it. It’s amazing how many SMEs don’t have that.”

3. Where and what to grow

Martin’s third tip is to ask yourself if you want to grow your business in the domestic market or overseas? Also, will you be growing with your existing products or do you need to develop new products?

He adds: “Another question is whether your growth will be organic or through merger and acquisition (M&A). You should be teasing out the answers to all these questions in the strategic planning process. If you decide on growth through products, by going overseas or through M&A, then that takes longer, there’s a higher level of risk and you really need to plan how you go about it.”

4. Organisational structure and leadership style

According to Martin, not having your management team and structure in line with your strategy will be the “single largest barrier to growth”.

He adds: “You must have the right people in the right jobs, and clarity around roles, job descriptions and targets. Everyone needs to know where they fit on the growth journey. And the kind of leadership style you want is one that encourages growth through coaching and motivating your team.”

5. Be scalable – talent, systems & processes

Martin says: “You want skilled and motivated people who can help grow the business, but you also want systems that scale up with you, that will work whether you have one member of staff or 1,000.

“So, for example, you should have your IT and comms systems hosted in the cloud and able to grow as you add people, customers and transactions to your operations. That same ethos would apply to your accounting systems too and essentially all the other processes that are part of how you do business. If these elements can’t be ramped up, they’ll be a constraint on your ability to take advantage of a growth market.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Make your business more attractive

Academics at Nottingham University Business School believe start-ups and growth firms can boost their chances of success by becoming more attractive

Make your business more attractive

There will be many an entrepreneur familiar with standing in front of a mirror checking their appearance and reciting prepared conversation before a business meeting or dinner invitation. These are skills we have learned over a lifetime to present our best selves to partners, peers and colleagues.

But according to new Nottingham University Business School research we can use roughly the same criteria to make our businesses more attractive to customers, suppliers and talent.

Boosting your appeal

Dr Zsofia Toth, assistant professor in marketing, has created an ‘Attractiveness Toolkit’ working with Nottingham SMEs, mainly B2B, to boost their online and offline appeal. “It’s applicable both for start-ups and high-growth firms. We are focusing on SMEs because they have less market access, finance and skills to make them attractive,” Zsofia explains. “We want them to improve their appeal to existing and potentially new suppliers and partners.”

The SMEs begin the project with an attractiveness audit. This involves an in-depth discussion with Zsofia about their social media and online presence and what has been going well in existing business partnerships and where they see potential for development.

“We look from the partner’s perspective as well, because attractiveness is in the eye of the beholder,” says Zsofia. “We then look at a range of different approaches that will work with a particular partner. It is not a one size fits all solution.”

Get referrals

One key suggestion is for firms to make the most of online referrals. This can include publishing business partners’ logos, case studies and client testimonials on their website. “Research shows that a lot of potential suppliers and partners look for referrals,” Zsofia explains. “They want to check your knowledge of your industry, your experience, successes and the scale of your network.” 

She also encourages SMEs to keep their Google profiles up to date. “An outdated address, faulty links and incorrect contact details can impact negatively on your attractiveness,” she warns.

Another online tip mainly directed at B2B businesses is to dare to be boring with social media. Zsofia urges firms that focus on these markets not to be ‘too social’ on Twitter, Facebook and Instagram as this might reflect poorly on their professionalism and invest this time and money on other growth areas instead. Conversely, B2C businesses should focus intently on social media with articles, blog posts and images to make them more appealing and dynamic.

Try the personal touch

SMEs also need to develop their face-to-face networking skills to create “word of mouth attractiveness”. This is done by attending events, conferences and making the effort to personally visit partners at their offices.

SMEs supplying to overseas markets, aiming to expand their activities there in the future or looking for collaborators for innovation projects should learn to globalise their business etiquette. This means noting the different dos and don’ts when interacting with overseas clients either in a formal meeting or informally. 

One of the participants on the project who wouldn’t struggle with the latter is language tourism group Forte Academy. Founded by Florence Forte in 2018 it combines study courses in Classics and Italian history and language with trips to cities such as Florence.

“We struggled to attract people in the first year because we didn’t have the funding to build our online presence. Not enough people knew about us,” explains Florence. “Zsofia’s team began with an MOT of our business which was valuable as I have been very close to my idea and perhaps wasn’t seeing the scale of opportunities I should have been.”

Start blogging

She explains that suggestions for increasing attractiveness included benchmarking its website against competitors, developing blog posts from its tutors and ex-students and more call to action buttons on its website enabling users to get more information or to register interest. 

“They identified university students as our target group, encouraging us to use flyers to get our name known and do face to face workshops. I’ve had a number of emails from students following these events,” she adds. “We are also seeing increased site visits.”

Zsofia hopes to now share the toolkit more widely but generally encourages SMEs to adopt best practice by regularly reviewing how attractive they are to clients and suppliers.

 “Look at your partnerships and determine whether you can do more to work better together or develop new strategies to keep that relationship alive. It is like a long marriage – people often forget to make an effort to appeal to one another.” she says.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

How’s your poker face?

Holding your nerve under pressure is vital for getting the best price when you sell your business

How’s your poker face?

Exiting a carefully nurtured, successful enterprise is one of the most stressful and challenging business tasks an entrepreneur can undertake. Negotiating the best possible sale price for your ’baby’ is a bit like playing a game of poker, with much to win if you play smart, and plenty to lose if you don’t.

But unlike poker, you can stack the odds in your favour before you even get to the table, according to Dr Stephanie Hussels, Director of the Betany Centre for  Entrepreneurship at Cranfield School of Management.

First steps

Successful negotiation is all about preparation, she argues, particularly when selling to another business, or to a private equity firm or venture capital investors. Stephanie says: “Doing your prep and knowing exactly what you want from the sale gives you confidence and the emotional and mental strength you need to gain the edge during negotiations.”

“Once you decide to sell you must be 100% certain about your exit plan because a flaky exit strategy will definitely undermine your negotiating game. Be clear from the outset what you want in financial and personal terms – do you want to remain part of the business or walk away completely? Firmly define the 'magic number' you want and what will make you ‘walk away’ – and ensure you stick to it.” (Your St. James's Place Partner can help you define your 'magic number'.) 

Timing and support

There can be a long run-up to a sale so keep your cards close to your chest about your intentions, both internally and externally. An ill-timed leak could be destabilising and drive employees to leave, weakening a key asset and reducing the value of the business.

It’s worth appointing external advisers specialising in negotiation to support you in the wider sales process and carry out due diligence and research on buyers. It’s absolutely vital you know beforehand what’s driving buyers, what’s important or unimportant to them, why they want to buy and how these factors align with your objectives.

“This puts you in a position of strength because you can negotiate hard for something you know they want but you’re not bothered about – without letting them know,” explains Stephanie. “You can also use your adviser to strengthen your hand during negotiations, with them taking the hard line and asking difficult questions, leaving you to be more friendly and retain goodwill – a good cop, bad cop approach.”

Leaving for good?

“If you’re planning to fully exit the  business, you’ll be looking for a ‘cash-out’ sale. However, selling a business without its ‘rainmaker’ can weaken its value and your buyer may walk away unless you can convince them you’ve a strong management team in place. Offer reassuring facts and figures and involve competent members of your team in the negotiations to build confidence.”

Stephanie recommends taking a role as chairperson or board director before the sale begins, whereby the buyer gets you as part of the business but it will be easier to step aside without the business suffering once the deal has been completed.

Play the ace

“Remaining part of the business usually makes negotiations easier,” Stephanie adds. “The ace you’re holding is you – you’re an intrinsic part of the sale.” 

For example, a venture capital or private equity buyer will very likely want you on board as they are unlikely to want to be hands-on and  run your business. So, assess your worth to a buyer and negotiate hard.

“You can command a higher price by negotiating a formal ‘earn out’ where you might sit on the board, run a division or look after a specific part of the business for a set period of time as part of the agreement, reassuring the buyer you’re staying.”

Concluding, Stephanie says: “The bottom line is do your prep, understand your buyer, don’t give away anything without trading hard and remember your own value.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

Investment bonanza

Greater political certainty is likely to mean more investment capital will be released – but can you get your share?

Investment bonanza

Entrepreneurs could be set to reap the benefits of the decisive general election with the release of billions of pounds worth of business investment. 

Some industry commentators predict an investment bonanza for start-ups and scale-ups now there’s greater political certainty – especially concerning the UK’s departure from the EU. But just how much money is likely to be available? And what are investors looking for – in other words, how do entrepreneurs make sure they get their share?

Confident investors

Tej Parikh, Chief Economist for the Institute of Directors, says the investment mood is positive: “Investors that were tightly holding on to their cash at the height of political uncertainty, may now, following the election, have a bit more confidence to take the plunge. With interest rates near historic lows, investors will certainly be looking for yield and the UK’s world-renowned and innovative start-up sector will be a draw.” 

Jeff Lynn, Executive Chairman and co-founder of crowdfunding platform Seedrs, also believes investment institutions and individuals are more confident. He says: “The exact amount of funding that will be released is unclear, but in 2019 we saw just more than £10bn venture capital invested into UK tech start-ups and scale-ups. I think we could anticipate a meaningful level of growth over that in 2020, so it wouldn’t surprise me to see 20-30% growth, an extra £2-3bn.”

Alexandra Daly, investment expert and entrepreneur, and Chair of the Council for Investing in Female Entrepreneurs, says there’s “a huge amount of capital waiting to be unleashed”. She continues: “A staggering amount of growth can be achieved if start-ups and small businesses can access this capital effectively.”

Attracting funding

On the topic of getting hold of that capital, Greg Rice, seasoned investor and founder of digital start-up accelerator Activate, says investors will continue to look for the same things in a business: “A great idea, good team and something truly different and impactful. Those that get these elements right will be of greatest interest to potential investors.”

Alexandra adds: “As ever, investors are looking for a good yield and return on their money.” However, she also highlights a more recent development in that investors are now frequently asking about impact investing and socially responsible funding opportunities. “In recognition of shifting public opinion on environmental issues and increasing pressure to act responsibly from across stakeholder groups, investors in the UK and across the globe are starting to put capital to work to proactively address these social and environmental issues.”

Many options

Greg says this should be an “opportune time” for start-ups to get their share of any extra investment capital. “Traditional UK investments such as property and shares will have challenged returns for the foreseeable future, making start-ups appear more attractive than ever, especially with tax incentives like the Seed Enterprise Investment Scheme available to investors.”

Alexandra adds: “There are brilliant and high-value opportunities for start-ups and growing businesses coming from the angel investment and venture capital (VC) sectors. Angel investment in particular can be a fantastic opportunity for launching companies.”

But she warns that these opportunities are not as accessible to some entrepreneurs as others. Research from the British Business Bank, in collaboration with Diversity VC and the British Private Equity and Venture Capital Association, shows that less than 1% of UK venture funding goes to all-female teams.

Jeff has the following advice for entrepreneurs: “Find out who’s investing in your space and think beyond pure VC because there are lots of different options. The number and different types of players – UK-based and foreign – that are investing has changed dramatically in the past 10 years. Now, there’s everything from family offices and wealth management groups to a wide range of angels, online platforms like Seedrs and larger institutions like investment banks.”

Speak to your St. James’s Place Partner to find out how the Entrepreneur Club can help make sure your business is attractive to investors.

Please note that this is unlikely to be the first option for raising finance, as there will be conditions attached to any agreement reached, which by their nature will be more onerous than those imposed by a mainstream lender. Please be aware that these schemes are only suitable for sophisticated investors willing to take a high risk with their capital as there is a risk an investor may lose some or all of their capital if the company invested in fails.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Help… we’re scaling up!

Most entrepreneurs haven’t scaled a business before, so what do they need to know to turn from a mouse into a gazelle?

Help… we’re scaling up!

When it comes to scaling up, age is nothing but a number. Natural beauty and vegan firm Faith in Nature was a 38-year-old business when founder Rivka Rose appointed chief executive Joy Parkinson in 2012 to use her blue-chip consumer goods background to accelerate growth.

“Rivka needed new, outside skills,” explains Joy, who has previously worked for some of the UK's leading brands. “I brought in a new senior sales, marketing and finance director to develop us from a leader in independent health food to a national retailer presence. It took us three years to launch into Holland & Barrett, and in the last two years - after we invested in a brand redesign - we have launched into Boots, Sainsbury’s and Waitrose.”

The company grew from a £2 million turnover to £5 million in 2018 and £10 million today and it is even eyeing up £20 million turnover by 2023.

Mouse or gazelle? GAZELLE!

Graeme Quar, scale up specialist at business advisors Elephants Child, says Faith in Nature has turned from a mouse into a gazelle. “Mice businesses cruise along making money whilst gazelles, or scale ups, grow fast and create a disproportionate amount of wealth and employment,” he says. 

According to the ScaleUp Institute there has been a 23% rise1 in the number of UK ‘visible scale up’ firms to 5,4562 in the past 12 months. Defined by the OECD as businesses with average annualised turnover and/or employment growth over 20% over a three-year period, they contribute £1.3 trillion3 to the UK economy.

“Gazelles aren’t just trendy tech firms, they can be from any sector,” adds Graeme. “You can be a start-up or a firm like Apple, which for its first few years grew at mouse-like pace and then, after inventing the iPod, took off.”

Four key drivers

The owners he advises on scaling up are encouraged to look at four key areas – strategy, execution, people and cash. “Strategy is clearly defining and targeting where you want to be in, say, three years, your vision, core customer and products,” he says. “It means weekly meetings and setting quarterly targets. So, developing a new website in 90 days rather than a year, or chasing customer payments promptly, or rolling out new products without delay.”

Execution means developing consistent processes from sending out quotations to dealing with invoices. “Good process leads to quicker decision making,” says Graeme. People means “getting the right people on the right seats going in the same direction”. He adds: “Keep or hire A players and train your B players up.”

With cash it is about tighter financial management. “Growth sucks cash because you are spending on new hires and technology and there is a time lag for that return on investment. So, send your bills out one week quicker and chase invoices harder. You also need to consider funding growth by invoice discounting, bank loans and overdrafts,” Graeme explains.

Start communicating

Joy says strategy, people and communication have played a huge role in Faith in Nature’s growth. “We’ve added depth and breadth to our team and invested in machinery because demand was blowing the roof off our factory.” she says. “We’ve set very clear and visible targets, consistently communicated in monthly team and individual briefings. We explain what we are doing and why.”

It’s also about responding to signs of strain. “Tremendous 75% growth this year meant we had to play catch up on capacity and our service levels dipped. But we have invested in putting a second shift on in our factory to get through it,” she adds. 

Faith in Nature also has two non-executive directors with a marketing and finance background to help them cope. “We are open to anyone helping us,” Joy says.

Help and advice

Where then can owners go to help them spark growth? They can speak with their St. James’s Place Partner to find out how the Entrepreneur Club can help plan for growth. In addition, they can look to mentors, non-executive directors and peer-to-peer networks.

When it comes to investment, owners should look at angels and venture capital as well as funds and Government grants. The ScaleUp Institute has mapped around 194 UK programmes dedicated to fast growth. “We are seeing increasing evidence of programmes that help tackle scale-up challenges, such as access to talent, markets, leadership capacity, finance, and infrastructure,” says the Institute's Stuart Rock. 

The right mindset

He says good programmes have a clear structure focusing on developing individual leadership capabilities, confidence and knowledge. Graeme agrees that a leader’s mindset is key to scaling success. “Some owners find scaling up too much of a rollercoaster,” he says. “But for others they enjoy the challenge and excitement. It’s like being a start up again!”

Please note that angel and venture capitals are unlikely to be the first option for raising finance, as there will be conditions attached to any agreement reached, which by their nature will be more onerous than those imposed by a mainstream lender. Please be aware that these schemes are only suitable for sophisticated investors willing to take a high risk with their capital as there is a risk an investor may lose some or all of their capital if the company invested in fails.


1,2,3 The Scale Up Index 2019, the ScaleUp Institute

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Six steps to boost productivity

Martin Brown of business advisors Elephant’s Child offers some top tips on ensuring your business is as productive as possible

Six steps to boost productivity

1. Measure and benchmark your productivity 

The first step is to assess your business’ productivity and benchmark it against organisations in your sector of similar size, structure, employee levels, located both locally and across a wider geographic region.

Productivity is measured as sales divided by the number of employees. To carry out an effective benchmarking exercise, consult a data analyst to assess the data and produce a report relative to your rivals. The St. James’s Place Entrepreneur Club provides an online benchmark report that includes a productivity assessment and uses comparative data from Dunn and Bradstreet. Its report provides a red-amber-green traffic light rating of the firm’s productivity and how it stacks up against similar rivals. Speak with your St. James’s Place Partner to find out more.

2. Focus on increasing sales and understand the value of your time

Increasing sales activity and turnover by using the same number or fewer employees is key to raising productivity. Sales is not all about winning new clients. First, it is vital to retain and grow existing customers and, by carefully nurturing existing relationships, this objective can be easier to achieve. You also need to win new clients, which means reviewing and assessing your sales process, offering and value proposition to deliver constant improvement.

For both approaches you need to evaluate how you use your time. The more time you can spend productively with clients, the more your business will grow; so, delegate, outsource, redesign or drop the non-productive, low-value parts of your work.

3. Establish a clear strategy and culture 

Good productivity needs people aligned around the same, clearly defined strategic goals, and it’s important that everyone – not just the board – understands and engages with them.

However, for any strategy to succeed, people’s behaviours and values have to be aligned with it; a great plan with the wrong culture behind it is like having two engines working against each other. The Cultural Web is a useful business tool that enables you to evaluate your culture and create a new more relevant one for the organisation. 

4. Ensure your team works well together

When everyone in the business works well together, productivity naturally increases. Porter’s Value Chain Analysis is an established business tool you can use to analyse the functions of your business and improve them to deliver optimum customer service and better margins. 

The book, The Five Dysfunctions of a Team by Patrick Lencioni, says trust is the bedrock of any successful team and contains a useful model for assessing levels of trust and improving them. A team based on trust is better at having challenging discussions about productivity and improving it. 

You also need your people to understand what numbers or key performance indicators drive the business and how they can be improved. Enable them to find their way around cashflow forecasts, profit and loss accounts and balance sheets – the more they understand the more productivity will improve.

5. Be ‘lean’

‘Lean’ is a set of well-established working practices devised by Japanese car manufacturer Toyota in the 1970s but the principles can be applied to any business today. Essentially, it’s a set of tools that help identify and eliminate waste to improve productivity and reduce costs. It’s probably best to consult a business advisor to help you devise and carry out a ‘lean audit’ to assess how to make your business ‘leaner’.

6. Use your leadership skills 

Your leadership and passion for the business are absolutely critical qualities for driving productivity by engaging and motivating your people. 

You can assess and strengthen your leadership skills through mentoring and coaching and by understanding good practice. Joining a Peer Board is a good way to gain and share knowledge, experience and best practice within your sector and others.

It's also worth looking at UK Government initiatives that support entrepreneurs on leadership and productivity, such as the Small Business Leadership Programme, the Be the Business Mentoring Programme and Knowledge Transfer Partnerships. 

Finally, as a good leader, you must be prepared to give your people autonomy and empower them for optimum results, because if everything has to come through you it will constrain productivity.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Crunch time for Entrepreneurs’ Relief?

All signals point to Entrepreneurs’ Relief being reduced or removed in the March 2020 budget. Entrepreneurs should consider revising their business and personal financial plans accordingly.

Crunch time for Entrepreneurs’ Relief?

For some time, the writing has been on the wall for Entrepreneurs’ Relief (ER), which halves the Capital Gains Tax payable when an entrepreneur sells a business from 20% (in the case of a higher rate taxpayer), to 10%.

Then Chancellor, Philip Hammond, signalled a change to the mood music in his 2018 autumn budget speech, saying: “I have received representations that I should abolish Entrepreneurs’ Relief and put the savings towards funding our NHS”. Under new leadership at the end of 2019, it was confirmed that this tax break remained a bugbear of the Conservative Party. In its election manifesto, it pledged to ‘review and reform’ ER, saying it hadn’t delivered on objectives. And as we all know, the Conservative Party won.

Fait accompli?

Financial journalist and self-confessed ‘ardent HM Treasury watcher’, Dan Atkinson, thinks changes are now a fait accompli. He says: “In the March 2020 budget we can almost certainly expect to see further restrictions on ER, but I think it’s unlikely to be scrapped entirely.”  

In terms of what might change, Dan says it is difficult to predict, but there are three main things to look out for. First, further restrictions on qualification for ER could be introduced, but this has already been a trend over the last few years, so is unlikely to provide the scale of reform government is looking for. (New restrictions around share ownership were introduced in 2018 and 2019, with shareholders needing to hold a minimum 5% economic interest in the company and needing to have held shares for at least two years, up from one, to qualify.)

Second, the tax rate could be increased from the current 10%. And third, the lifetime limit on gains that the ER tax rate applies to (currently £10 million) could be reduced. 

Dan says the timing couldn’t be more opportune for government: “An election has just been won, so by the time the next one comes around, the issue won’t be fresh in the minds of those upset by the move.”

He continues: “This government can say it was a misconceived Labour tax break (ER was introduced in 2008 when Alistair Darling was Chancellor). And to be fair, it is a tax break that is difficult to defend. In most cases, ER reduces the tax bill for people selling mature businesses. Entrepreneurs do not roll their sleeves up, start businesses, and create jobs because they will eventually get a tax break many years down the line.”

Dan also points out that ER is extremely unpopular with many HM Treasury officials, who consider ER to be mostly used as a ‘financial product’ constructed to reduce tax, rather than as a scheme moulded to the needs of entrepreneurs which in turn drives additional entrepreneurial activity. 

Plans will need updating

Steve Hoon, tax partner at BDO, says that, if changes are made, they could be effective immediately and a ‘grace period’ or delay in implementation of any such legislative changes should not be expected. He says recent changes to Capital Gains Tax (and consequently ER) have become effective for disposals taking place on or after the day following the Budget. 

But he stresses that a knee-jerk reaction between now and budget day should be avoided: “Selling a business is a major event and in practice is not something that can be significantly rushed.” 

Steve also says it is important to keep the scale of the ER tax break in perspective. He says: “Is the difference between a tax rate of 10% and 20% really big enough to fundamentally change a huge commercial decision such as selling a business?” He continues: “And remember that even without ER, the UK has a very attractive Capital Gains Tax environment when selling a business, with 20% being far lower than income tax rates.”

He does however acknowledge that if a business owner is already part-way through a sale process which has a realistic prospect of completing before budget day, then the signalling from government might certainly tip a marginal decision in favour of selling and upping efforts to get the deal over the line. 

But, for those owners with exit plans extending beyond March 2020, there is a possibility that they will be paying more than the current ER rate of 10% on their capital gain. Irrespective of any changes to ER, it is worth noting that there are other steps that business owners can take to maximise their net proceeds on a sale. This may include undertaking vendor due diligence exercises to help articulate the value of the business to potential sellers (see Entrepreneur Club article Ten steps to due diligence readiness) or taking steps to improve the working capital requirements of the business pre-sale.

In addition to Steve’s comments above, entrepreneurs may also want to consider revisiting their personal financial planning. Changes may be required – such as adjusting the target ‘exit value’ for their business upwards (to account for the loss of any ER tax break) to provide the same ‘retirement pot’ when the business is sold. 

For further discussion on how to incorporate tax and other uncertainties into exit planning, see the Entrepreneur Club article Navigating to exit in uncertain times.

A good place to start when you are preparing your business for sale is to fill in the St. James’s Place Entrepreneur Club app, which will give you a clear picture of your current position.


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. The value of any tax relief depends on individual circumstances.

Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

How to prepare to sell your business when it’s dependent on you

Understanding your value to your business

How to prepare to sell your business when it’s dependent on you

What’s the fuel that keeps your business firing on all cylinders? State of the art products? Superior service? Stellar reputation? Leading brand? And YOU!

When you’re thinking about how to prepare to sell your business, be aware that potential acquirers could lower their offer or head elsewhere if they learn that the lynchpin of its success is, in fact, the owner.

Do you personally have client relationships that span the life of the business, or a significant part of it? Are others in your business educated and empowered to make key decisions, or have you been reticent to delegate? Does the knowledge and expertise your business readily draws upon exist mainly in your head, rather than on paper?

And what would the repercussions be if you left the business today?

The answers to questions such as these should alert you as to whether your company is too dependent on you. So here are 5 ways you can reduce that impact in the eyes of your ideal buyer and sell for maximum value.

 

Develop a strong management team who can run the business on a day-to-day basis

Consider how heavily involved you are in the day to day running of the business:

  • Who is responsible for the sales?
  • What about key client relationships?
  • Who runs your operations?
  • What about the development of new products?

If you’re serious about selling a business, part of the preparation must include the recruitment and training of a management team to whom you can pass the baton on aspects such as sales, account management, operations, product development and finance.

By reducing dependency on you and having a strong management team in place, you’ll make the business more attractive to potential buyers and that will enable you to exit the business sooner rather than later. If you fail to do this, why would a buyer offer you a decent price when the main USP of your business (you!) is about to exit?

 

Upskill others with your knowledge and insight

Exiting a business means delegating leadership responsibility to a well-informed team of management talent. However, sharing your knowledge and insight is just as important as the delegation of management duties.

Business owners who keep the secret ingredient of their recipe for success to themselves will not create an attractive proposition for acquirers. Weave that wisdom into the fabric of your business. Train employees at all levels across your company with your unique knowledge – from the office, to the warehouse, factory, studio, laboratory, and shop floor.

Chances are, processes have evolved while you’ve been running the business. Customer behaviour almost certainly has. There might have been seismic cultural shifts within the industry. Share this experience and the insight it has brought along the way, to help staff write the next chapter in the history of the business.

Don’t forget to document all valuable knowledge and insight, too. This is particularly important in smaller businesses where it might be impossible to have two people for every role. A buyer will be relieved to see that there’s a way for someone to pick up business-critical tasks if a key member of staff leaves.

 

Preserve client and supplier relationships with contracts and strong communication

Buyers could be worried that clients and supplier relationships might be negatively impacted by your departure. One way to reassure them is to provide up to date contracts that protect the supply chain and key revenue streams e.g. where your business is the preferred or exclusive supplier.

In the months leading up to your exit, you should also introduce and involve relevant members of your management team in meetings with key accounts and suppliers. Plenty of face-to-face contact will build relationships and help alleviate the worry and uncertainty that transition can bring.

 

Work with the new owner on a consultancy basis

Despite a painstakingly careful handover and diligent documentation, there are still times your exit from the business will need to be an even more gradual process.

Where there is an intricately layered level of complexity around the operation of your business – perhaps linked to major seasons and cycles within the year – your buyer could be keen on you continuing to work with them post-sale on a consultancy basis so that they can rely on your expertise for that full cycle.

Shelved projects that the new owner might wish to rejuvenate, long-term projects with a complicated history, and cases to which you’re inextricably linked are also scenarios in which your consultancy can benefit the new owner. By offering this you will be able to command a higher price.

And if there is shareholder dependency, it you will certainly need to be involved as part of the transition period.

 

Take some time off!

We saved the best tip for last. When was the last time you took a holiday? By that, we mean a genuine break where you weren’t answering emails from your sun lounger? Probably not since the invention of the smart phone or Blackberry, at least!

As you prepare to sell a business, you will be extremely busy, so taking a break could seem counterintuitive. However, being able to show a new buyer how well the business runs without you is evidence that your involvement isn’t the ‘be all and end all’ of its success.

Once you have efficiently delegated key responsibilities to senior managers and shared your knowledge around the company, you need not feel anxious about stepping away for a week or two here and there. It will be the ideal way to test how well your handover works in practice.

It’s also wise for your own wellbeing. A sudden departure from a business can feel traumatic for many people – understandable when you have lived and breathed it for many years. Time off and head space to contemplate your next chapter is healthier for you and shows potential buyers what a healthy business they are about to buy.

There will always be a transition period when you sell a business but the less dependent the business is on you, the quicker and easier it will be. 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

*Exit Strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

This article has been provided courtesy of Entrepreneurs Hub.

Five things you need to know

As a business expands it can be hard to keep up with company law – here are some of the compliance issues that might apply to your business

Expansion means your start-up has succeeded in finding a market for your product or service, but the bigger you get the harder it is to meet all of your statutory obligations and keep regulators happy.

However, non-compliance could threaten the growth you're trying to achieve with possible financial penalties, or even suspension from trading, harming both your bottom line and the reputation of your business.

Here are five questions entrepreneurs should ask themselves about compliance as their business grows.

1. Do you need a statutory audit?

Guy Wilmot, start-up specialist and partner in the corporate and commercial team at law firm Russell-Cooke, explains: “The threshold for the legal requirement for a yearly audit, the results of which are sent to Companies House, is hit if a company has turnover of more than £10.2m, assets of more than £5.1m or employs more than 50 employees."

However, many businesses choose to be audited even though they're not legally obliged to do so as it adds extra credibility to a company, for example, if it needs to raise finance from a bank.

2. Do you need a data protection officer?

Data protection officers are responsible for overseeing a company’s data protection strategy and its implementation to ensure compliance with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) requirements.

Guy says: “Instead of a specific financial threshold that applies to the appointment of a data protection officer (DPO), businesses need a DPO if they carry out large-scale regular and systematic monitoring of individuals or large-scale processing of special categories of data – for example, health data.”

GDPR guidelines say the regulation covers “core activities” that are “inextricable” to the company’s primary functions – not support activities like payroll.

3. Do you need a modern slavery statement?

Introduced as part of the Modern Slavery Act, which became law in 2015, it’s once again size that matters when it comes to a company's legal obligations. “The requirement to publish a modern slavery statement only applies to businesses with a turnover of more than £36m,” explains Guy.

Companies in that category must produce a modern slavery statement for each financial year. The information it should contain includes details of a company’s anti-slavery policies, the parts of its business and supply chains where there is a risk of slavery and the steps that it has taken to assess and manage that risk.

4. Do you need to report a gender pay gap?

Since 2017, all businesses or organisations with more than 250 employees have been legally required to annually publish and report their gender pay gap information. Your calculations must be based on the 'snapshot date' of 5 April and the information can be published using the government gender pay service. The Equality and Human Rights Commission has the power to enforce any failure to comply with the regulations but the reputational damage of not reporting could be far worse.

5. Do your freelance contracts meet IR35 rules?

These regulations, also know as off-payroll working rules, come into force in the private sector in April 2020. They are designed to close a loophole in the tax system where workers could use the set-up of a limited company structure in order to pay less tax. The benefit for employers hiring workers in this way is not having to pay employers’ National Insurance contributions or give contractors employee benefits.

From next April a private sector company will be responsible for checking its contractors comply with IR35, and be liable for any unpaid tax, if that company has an annual turnover above £10.2m, a balance sheet total over £5.1m, or more than 50 employees. There's much more guidance available on these rule changes at the gov.uk website.


Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab. Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. The existence of a link to another website does not imply or express endorsement of its provider, product or services by us or St. James’s Place

Seven rules for hiring employees

Top tips for when you’ve found the right person to help you move your business forward

Seven rules for hiring employees

Most entrepreneurs at some point need to hire their very first true employee to achieve their objectives for expansion and increased profitability. Selecting the person you want to employ is, however, just the beginning, as the next steps towards actually engaging them require close attention to vital legal and regulatory matters.

But with entrepreneurs typically focused on running their businesses they can be tempted to ‘wing it’ and not go through the proper processes, which can result in legal action, fines and loss of reputation and business.

Two people who know this more than most are Charlie Johnson, CEO of recruiter BrighterBox, and his wife, employment lawyer Jane Johnson owner of JLJ Legal, both specialising in helping start-ups and SMEs across a range of sectors.

Below, they highlight seven key points that must be followed without fail to ensure taking on your first employee goes as smoothly as possible.

1. Register as an employer with HMRC and set up a payroll

As soon as you know you are going to employ someone, do this before their first payday – although you cannot do it more than two months before they begin work. It’s a simple process that can be done online via www.gov.uk, but in order to pay your employee you need to set up a payroll system. It’s best to contact one of the many specialist outsourcing payroll companies to do this for you. They will take all the hassle of looking after things like pension contributions and national insurance, and ensure any employees pay the right tax to save you grief later.

2. Check your employee has the legal right to work in the UK

You can check this online if the employee has given you their “share code”. If they haven’t, It’s a very simple process of asking the appointee for their passport or UK driving licence, or if a foreign national, for any relevant visas and associated paperwork. It’s a good idea to ask for a utility bill with name to confirm their residence. You need to check these documents carefully and look for any obvious discrepancies on dates or the pictures used or if the documents seem less than genuine. If you are not sure, and still want to proceed, consult a lawyer. If you knowingly employ someone you know (or could reasonably have known) does not have the legal right to work, you face a fine as much as £20,000 per individual.

3. Ask a professional screening company to run a Disclosure & Barring Service (DBS) check, if required

Any person involved in working with children or vulnerable people in care homes or hospitals, for example, or regulated professions such as lawyers, accountants, vets, chemists and opticians, must pass a check by the government’s DBS. This ensures that they are a fit person to work in these environments. It’s easy and relatively inexpensive to use a specialist company registered with the DBS that will do this for a set fee and decide exactly which DBS check you need to undertake. Alternatively, you can ask the employee themselves to apply for DBS check on www.gov.uk, for a £23 fee and provide you with the relevant paperwork but you must check it thoroughly.

4. Ensure you’re familiar with and pay the correct minimum wages

There is the National Minimum Wage for people aged 16-24 and the National Living Wage for those aged 25-plus and slightly different rates for those in apprenticeships and living in London. The pay rates are reviewed every April and failure to comply can result in fines of up to £20,000. Full details can be found on www.gov.uk – if in doubt consult your accountant.

5. Purchase employer’s liability insurance

This basically guarantees you are covered for any compensation claims arising if your employee becomes ill or is injured at work. By law you must display the Employer’s Liability Insurance certificate in your premises or office. It’s an easy one to sort out though, you just need to go to a good insurance broker to ascertain the right level of cover for the best price. Under no circumstances be tempted to underinsure – your policy must cover you for at least £5 million. You can be fined £2,500 every day you are not properly insured.

6. Ask a lawyer to draw up a written statement of employment particulars

A written statement of employment particulars – sometimes known as terms and conditions or contract of employment – has to be issued if employment is for more than one month and must be issued within two months of the person starting work. It is effectively a legal minimum contract that covers key aspects of the employment, such as: start dates, place and hours of work, holiday allowances and conditions for terminating employment. Avoid using a free, off-the-shelf template statement, they are usually not worth the paper they are written on.

7. Auto enrol your employee into a workplace pension

You are obliged to set up and contribute to a workplace pension for anyone who is a worker or employee who is aged between 22 and the state pension age, who earns at least £10,000 a year and normally works in the UK. If they are under 22 and earn less than £10,000 but ask to join, you still need to enrol them. Your legal obligations begin on the day your first member of staff begins working for you – known as your duties start date – and you must complete a declaration of compliance to the Pensions Regulator within five months of your duties start date. Failure to auto enrol an employee can result in a fine of up to £10,000. A workplace pension can be pretty tricky to set up on your own, so always talk to your St. James’s Place Partner who can help you find an appropriate, manageable pension for your business.


Where the opinions of third-parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Please note that clicking a link will open the external website in a new window or tab. Links from this website exist for information only and we accept no responsibility or liability for the information contained on any such sites. The existence of a link to another website does not imply or express endorsement of its provider, product or services by us or St. James’s Place

Five reasons loans are declined

SMEs should be planning their borrowing strategy long before they need money

Five reasons loans are declined

“We have certainly seen a lack of borrowing appetite from SMEs in recent years, mostly because of the uncertainty surrounding Brexit”, says Rob Warlow, founder of SME loan broker Business Loan Services. “There is a huge amount of pent up demand for loan capital. The expansion plans are there, ready to go, but businesses are waiting for more political and economic certainty.”

Hopefully, with the decisive result of the recent general election, more businesses will now pull the trigger on their plans. According to Rob, the supply-side is ready, with lenders keen for more business.

For those SMEs looking to borrow, his hottest tip is to start the process early, ideally 6-12 months in advance of submitting an application. This will allow time to research all options, target the most appropriate lenders, and tailor the business and loan application so that the chances of success are maximised.

Below, Rob shares his thoughts on some common reasons loans are declined, and how SMEs can avoid this fate:

1. Approaching the wrong lender

In recent years, two very distinct groups of lenders have emerged: banks and ‘fintechs’. Traditional banks now mostly avoid small loans (as a rough rule of thumb, below £25,000). Meanwhile fintechs, such as peer-to-peer lenders, dominate this end of the market.

Banks have more manual loan application processes (in a low interest rate environment, small loans are simply uneconomical for them), while fintechs tend to have highly automated on-line processes that are strictly ‘rules-based’.  

So SMEs need to target lenders who are comfortable with the size of loan they need.

It is also important to find out which lenders are active in your sector. Banks and other lenders sometimes avoid some sectors altogether – for example, obtaining credit can be quite difficult at the moment for high-street retailers, restaurants and the leisure sector, which have seen higher levels of stress as a result of general uncertainty. Also, lenders tend to allocate a fixed amount of loan capital to each business sector, and may have ‘maxed-out’ their lending capacity.

It is worth having an early conversation with target lenders to make sure they are active in your sector.

2. Poor credit history (of the business or its directors)

Because of their automated processes, credit scores are especially important to fintech lenders. Banks will sometimes dig deeper into the reasons behind a low credit score, but an automated process just looks at the score itself and a decision is made.

Businesses therefore need to make sure they maintain a healthy credit history. Some of the common causes of lower credit scores include: late or last-minute filing of accounts (there can be a few days delay between when accounts are filed and when they are available for credit scoring algorithms to read, so the algorithm may assume accounts are late if they were only filed at the last minute); late payment of invoices (reporting late payments to credit scoring agencies is becoming more common – this puts a black mark against the name of the late-payer); and judgements or payment defaults against the company (a CCJ has a significant negative impact on a credit score).

The personal credit history of directors and large shareholders is also important. Lenders will often be relying on the personal guarantees of directors and will want to make sure they are in a solid financial position.

3. Financial weaknesses  

Especially in the case of larger loans, lenders will be studying certain financial metrics. They will look at how profitable the business is, that it is generating enough cash to easily cover loan repayments, and that there is not too much existing debt on the balance sheet.

Importantly, businesses need to be aware that lenders will want to look at the filed annual accounts as well as up to date management accounts. With the advances in accounting software available to SMEs today, it will be expected that all management accounts are fully up to date.

An additional point businesses need to look out for is that sometimes accountants will (quite legitimately) structure the financials to minimise profit (and consequently, tax). But this can work against a favourable lending decision. Planning ahead and structuring the financials to suit a loan application well in advance will be necessary.

4. Issues with bank statements

Particularly for loans above the ‘automated’ assessment threshold, lenders will be studying bank statements and reject applications where repeated patterns of bounced cheques or unplanned overdrafts are evident.

5. Applying at too early a stage

Start-ups are generally a no-go for debt finance, due to their higher risk and lack of trading record. As a rule of thumb, debt finance can be considered after 12 months of trading history has been established.

A final point Rob flags for SMEs is to be prepared to provide lenders with collateral. Online platforms issuing smaller loans will generally only require directors’ personal guarantees as collateral. But for larger loans, collateral such as property or machinery (typically with a value of at least 75% of the loan) will be needed. In some cases, the debtor’s book or stock can be used.


Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.​

Starting over

How to launch another business and protect the proceeds of your first exit

Starting over

Inspiration for a new business can come at any time, even when driving down the iconic Route 66 as part of your honeymoon. This is what happened to Robin Knox last year just weeks after selling his final equity stake in Intelligent Point of Sale (IPOS) – the electronic till software system he co-founded from his kitchen table in 2012.

“We had sold IPOS to the payments firm iZettle in 2016, kept an equity stake but then sold up when iZettle itself was bought by PayPal,” explains Robin. “I travelled to Australia, Indonesia and the US and took some time out. But during that drive I started to think about the house we were renovating back home and home security! When I got back, I ordered a new system and found that they haven’t moved on from the 1970s.”

From this came Boundary, a smart home security alarm business which Robin brings to market next May. “I had always wanted to start again and do something bigger,” he explains. “It was a similar play with a utility product and people paying monthly recurring fees, but it was different in that it was hardware and B2C not B2B.”

Operational risk

Creating a new venture in the same market is, according to Crawfurd Walker of business growth advisors Elephants Child, important in helping to de-risk the move.

“Entrepreneurs can use their existing knowledge and contacts and provide a bit of comfort,” he says. “However, sometimes they fancy getting involved in a different market they have an interest in or where they see a good opportunity. Where possible they will try to use the same team as before if they have been successful and bring in industry specific expertise if required. Again, it is about taking uncertainty out of the equation.”

Robin followed this pattern, retaining professional advisers, finding new hardware experts and discussing the business model with previous investors.

“I also quickly hired an operations manager because I decided this time around there were certain parts of the business I wanted to focus on rather than doing everything,” he says. “Also, it helps me prioritise more time with my family.”

It also gave him space to evaluate the strength of his new idea.

“We conducted market research including eight-hour long interviews with members of the public, which gave us peace of mind before ploughing money in,” he adds. “We had to design and build the hardware for the alarm before any sales came in so overheads have been high.” By the time we launch the business will have consumed the guts of £3 million.”

Protecting your cash

So aside from business and operational risk, financial risk must also be accounted for by those starting again. Robin says he and his tech partner have put in a combined £1.2 million into Boundary.

“We didn’t want to bet everything so we set a limit of 10% of net worth into the business,” he explains. “Yes, I’ve worked hard but I have also had luck along the way and I don’t want to jeopardise what I have built up.”

Simon Martin, of St. James’s Place Wealth Management, says it is vital that entrepreneurs create a financial plan to protect their personal finances. “Cost out everything you will need for the business, your family and lifestyle,” he says. “If you have a significant capital holding then consider the most tax efficient way to manage these funds, such as in trusts. Look for diversification for your funds and consider diversifying away from the new business.”

He says there are no fixed rules regarding how much personal capital to hold back, with it depending on the individual’s risk appetite and often age. “But be prudent. A new venture could be rewarding, but you can also lose everything,” he says.

Take your time

Robin’s final advice for getting a new venture right though is more physical than financial. “Take a break after you leave or sell a business. Let yourself get a little bit bored before launching straight back in,” he says. “We started again almost straight away, my lifestyle up to this point had meant I was living on Deliveroo, coffee, beers and adrenaline as we built it up. So much so that I ended up in hospital with a stomach ulcer. But ever the entrepreneur it was all about timing. We felt if we didn’t move quickly, we would get left behind in the marketplace. That and the passion I felt for the product meant I had no choice. I’ve been careful this time to carve out some time with a personal trainer to make sure my health receives the priority it should.”


Trusts are not regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.​

Have you protected your IP?

Businesses that take care of their intellectual property rights are more likely to thrive

Have you protected your IP?

New companies are hotbeds of innovation but their products, technologies and designs are vulnerable to copying or theft by larger rivals. It makes sense, therefore, for them to protect their intellectual property (IP) and a recent study reveals that those who do, benefit from stronger growth.

European SMEs owning at least one piece of IP are 21% more likely to experience a growth spurt and 10% more likely to become high-growth firms, according to a survey by the European Patent Office and the European Intellectual Property Office1. But worryingly, the study shows that only 9% of these companies own their own registered IP rights, compared to 40% of larger companies.

So, what options are available to start-ups and SMEs and what’s the best way to secure protection for IP, which broadly consists of brands, designs, technical innovations, software, industrial processes and creative works including films, videos, books and music?

The best-known types of protection are copyrights, design rights, patents, trademarks that generally require registration, while creative work and software typically get automatic copyright protection.

Misunderstood

“IP is poorly understood,“ says Dr Anthony Thomson, growth planning and IP specialist with Elephant’s Child. “It’s not just about registered IP, there are also trade secrets and know-how. These include technical processes, design, commercial methods, formulae, practices or information that – crucially – isn’t generally known about by others. They’re an alternative defence that’s cheaper to obtain without any registration.”

Creating a trade secret involves process, instructing staff not to share confidential information with people outside the company, building this into employment contracts and including non-disclosure agreements if necessary. Hold regular meetings to ascertain new developments in your business that might need to be protected as trade secrets or other IP.

Going down the patent and trademark route requires your IP to be registered with relevant bodies and protected in each geographic region you’re targeting. Registering patents in particular involves lengthy, legal processes, specialist advice and potentially high costs.

IP Strategy

“IP protection confers competitive advantage, allowing companies to commercially exploit their inventiveness, so it pays to build a costed IP strategy into your business plan right from the start,” Anthony explains.

“But be selective and considered in what you protect so you don’t overspend, and ensure any IP is owned by the business, not an individual. Seeking legal expertise to conduct a freedom to operate (FTO) study to ensure your IP doesn’t infringe on prior art, is a key first step.”

He recommends getting advice from reputable business advisers and legal firms with dedicated IP specialists and access to chartered patent and trademark attorneys. Once protected, it’s worth considering licensing your IP to other companies to manufacture and sell. “Licensing offers high margin revenue streams and is attractive because it is scalable and you can license to multiple organisations, globally,” he adds.

Deterrent

Having protected IP acts as a strong deterrent but when someone infringes your IP, action must be taken, either through the courts or by using specialist companies.

Four years ago, entrepreneur Rachel Jones launched SnapDragon, experts in identifying IP infringers and copyists and getting their websites, and any links to fake products, taken off the internet to stop them being sold, exported, imported and distributed.

She formed SnapDragon in 2015 after fighting a long battle to prevent counterfeits of her children’s high chair, Totseat, reaching the markets.

She says: “As an absolute minimum, with a product, you need a trademark. It’s the least expensive registered IP and a very useful, cost-effective tool to successfully fight counterfeits. Most companies don’t have the skills to scour the web for infringements, which is where we come in.

“I believe registering and defending your IP makes your business more likely to grow because it tells the world you’ve got something worth coveting.”


1 IPR intensive industries and economic performance in the European Union. Third edition. Published by the European Patent Office, September 2019.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.​

Navigating to exit in uncertain times

Personal financial plans and business plans need robust stress testing

Navigating to exit in uncertain times

Simplistically, entrepreneurs' exit plans should include: personal finance plans, with assumptions about the 'pot of money' needed to fund retirement; a business plan, which will spell out how the value of the business will be built; and how that value will be turned into cash i.e. how and to whom the business will be sold.

So far so good, but these plans have to be flexible enough to survive the uncertainties faced by entrepreneurs and their businesses. And in 2019, there is no shortage of uncertainty – think Brexit, an early general election, falling economic growth, a US-China trade-war, and technological disruption just for starters.

In this challenging environment, Simon Martin, tax and trust consultant at St. James’s Place, and Martin Brown, CEO of business growth advisor Elephants Child, offer some nuggets of advice to help entrepreneurs navigate a path to exit through this uncertainty.

Build in contingencies

When working with their financial planner, entrepreneurs should be trying to establish how much money they need for their chosen retirement lifestyle, which will in turn set a target ‘exit value’ for their business.

This is often calculated using the current tax regime and prevailing financial conditions as a base case scenario. But Simon stresses that the plan needs to go further: “The tax and financial environment is very uncertain at the moment. A number of politicians from different parties have suggested changes to Entrepreneurs’ Relief (ER), tax relief on pension contributions, and Inheritance Tax relief. On top of this, financial markets are facing uncertain times from things like Brexit and the US-China trade war. No-one has a crystal ball but it is important that any personal financial plan considers potential changes to the environment, so that entrepreneurs are as prepared as possible.”

He says scenario planning is important. For example, if ER is removed and Capital Gains Tax of 20% is payable when a business is sold (instead of the current 10%), will the original target pension pot still be big enough? If not, changes will be needed, such as re-visiting the target value of the business, retirement dates, or increasing tax-efficient savings. He continues: “It’s best to have an element of contingency built into the plan so that if the environment is not as favourable as initially assumed, the original plan can be adjusted as easily as possible.”

Simon also favours what he calls ‘cautious planning’. If, for example, a 10% investment return is needed on pension savings to reach the target pension pot within the required timeframe, the chances are this assumption is too aggressive. He says more conservative assumptions will naturally lead to an element of contingency being built into the plan.

Lastly, Simon recommends using insurance to mitigate as many uncertainties as possible. In particular, entrepreneurs sometimes overlook ‘protection insurance’. This pays out in the event of a business owner or key staff member dying or becoming critically ill. The pay-out will be designed to protect the continuity of the business because of such events – which can be significant for small businesses because of dependencies on key individuals.

Revisit the business plan

With a target exit value and timeframe in place, entrepreneurs will need to revisit their business plan, and make sure it is aligned to their personal financial plan. Martin emphasises that entrepreneurs should channel their energy towards those ‘controllable factors’ that impact their business, and not get overly distracted by macro factors beyond their control. In particular, he highlights four things to consider when revisiting the business plan in times of uncertainty.  

First, seek out certainty. Martin says: “It’s easy to get panicky about the factors that dominate UK news – Brexit, the general election, or a slowdown in GDP. But if you take a global perspective, that level of uncertainty doesn’t prevail everywhere. While the UK might be going through a period of low economic growth (around 1%) with heightened volatility, some of the world’s largest developing markets such as India and China are growing in the 5-6% range, and the world’s largest economy, the USA, has been growing in the 2-3% range1. So, it’s worth it for entrepreneurs to go back to their strategic plans and see if they can pivot their businesses towards these less uncertain environments.”

This might mean looking at exporting more - see Entrepreneur Club articles The Value of Brand Britain (which explains how popular British goods and services are in some developing markets), and How to crack the USA (the UK’s largest export market by far).

Second, take stock of which uncertainties will, or will not have an impact on the business. Brexit uncertainties might have a very real impact, such as having to change the terms of trade with European customers or suppliers. But Martin says larger ‘macro’ events might not impact smaller businesses to the same extent as larger ones: “A small business can continue to grow and gain market share in times of weak GDP growth. A very small change in market share or winning one or two new key accounts can have a far bigger impact on a small business than a change in GDP growth, so focus on those practical, controllable things. Small businesses can continue to thrive and prosper if they have their proposition correct and they are committing to their plan.”  

Third, look for opportunity arising from uncertainty. Martin points to his experience with a business he works with in the talent management and recruiting sector. In the past, this business was heavily reliant on finding staff for clients from the EU (as were its competitors). But access to those staff is likely to be more restricted post-Brexit. This business has been working hard to open up access to other markets for finding staff so they can continue to fulfil client needs and steal a march on slower-moving competitors.

Fourth, be agile and challenge the sacred cows. Some businesses, and especially family businesses, can be too wedded to their traditional business models, leaving themselves vulnerable to changes in the business environment, according to Martin. For example, technological advances and changing consumer shopping habits might make it essential that a traditional high-street retail chain moves from a store-only to a ‘bricks and clicks’ model to stay relevant. He says: “In times of uncertainty, it is useful to challenge the fundamental modus operandi of the business, which might not have been questioned before. And it is usually most useful to have that thinking challenged by an outsider to bring a fresh perspective.”


1Trading Economics, November 2019.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Exit strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

The value of an investment with St. James’s Place will be directly linked to the performance of the funds selected and may fall as well as rise. You may get back less than the amount invested.

The levels and bases of taxation and reliefs from taxation can change at any time. The value of any tax reliefs depends on individual circumstances.

Raising money to expand

Tips and insight into raising funds for growth through private equity and venture capital

Raising money to expand

Your business has taken off, with sales showing there are plenty of customers for your products or services, and now you want to take things to the next stage by expanding.

However, now there’s the question of how to fund that growth. For many companies, the answer lies in raising money through private equity (PE) or venture capital (VC). There’s certainly a lot of potential funding available: equity invested in smaller UK businesses rose 5% to £6.7bn in 2018, the highest amount recorded, according to the British Business Bank’s annual Small Business Equity Tracker report.1

Raising capital this way can be quite daunting if you’re a business owner who’s never done it before, so below is some insight into what’s involved.

Find the right advice

Crawfurd Walker, Chief Revenue Officer with business growth advisor Elephants Child, says the first move should be finding the right professional advisers, which will help a business owner “maximise value and increase the certainty of completing the deal”.

He stresses a typical deal could take six to nine months and requires “real commitment from the management team and owners, a clear sense of purpose for the funding and a realistic expectation of what the investor will expect – during the process and in exchange for the funds.”

Rodney Appiah of private equity firm Foresight Group warns it's critical to match your business with the right investment partner. Do you want an investor who will take a minority stake and play a supportive and strategic role, or are you ready to sell a majority shareholding with the possibility that your investor will be more involved in shaping the way the company is run?

In early meetings an investor will look at the products and services your company offers, your point of differentiation, your customer base and your growth plan. There will also be discussion about the money you want to raise – which could be anything from £250,000 to a multi-million-pound sum – and about valuation expectations.

Your management team is key

However, one of the most important things that an investor will focus on when assessing a business for investment is the quality of the management team. Rodney explains: “When an investment underperforms, nine times out of 10 the key determining factor is the quality and experience of the management team. Are they in the right roles and have the right support? Are they clear about the growth opportunities that are in front of them? Are they aware of their weaknesses – and are they happy to address them?”

Potential investors will also ask if your company is operating in a growing market, improving your chances of successful expansion, and whether your product or service has a high profit margin to demonstrate the value that is being added. An investor will also want to see that your product has enough of a unique selling point to see off competitors.  

When due diligence checks have been completed, often under a confidentiality agreement, there will likely be a more detailed interrogation of your company's growth plan and financial model before the investor is ready to make a formal offer.

Build a good investor relationship

For those companies that succeed in getting an injection of much-needed investment, it can be a real springboard. Operam Education Group, an education recruitment agency, received funding earlier this year from BGF, which is the most active investors in growing businesses in the UK and Ireland. That funding supported the company's expansion through acquisitions. Company CEO Eddie Austin says: “BGF is a minority investor so we retain control of the business, which appealed to us.”

But he also stresses the importance of BGF understanding and sharing his company's vision for the future. “The advice I’d give any business owner looking for investment is to appreciate the importance of a strong business plan and good investor relationship. This can’t be underestimated.”


1UK smaller businesses receive a record £6.7bn equity finance investment, published by the British Business Bank, June 2019.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

How to keep cash flowing

Failing to manage cashflow could hamper growth

How to keep cash flowing

Recent research from Hitachi Capital1 found that nearly half of SME owners have used their personal savings to combat cashflow squeezes and ensure their staff, customers and suppliers get paid.

Late payments were the main culprit, costing UK SMEs an estimated £5 billion in the last 12 months. Hitachi added that 57% of firms spend at least an hour a day chasing outstanding invoices, noting a 22% rise in the number spending time and money on legal action.

Don’t be naïve

Hitachi has also revealed that 48% of UK owners blame themselves for the problem. They regret having a ‘naive attitude to cashflow’ and worry that it has held back business growth. Almost two-thirds said they had overspent before gaining profit, leaving them in greater debt than they could manage.

“If you don’t have cashflow then you don’t have a business,” says Matt Kelly of business advisors Elephant’s Child. “You might land a £100,000 order but fail to have the working capital necessary to fulfil it. You won’t be able to invest in your supply chain or pay your employees or suppliers. You may overtrade and not have the cash to support it.”

Understand the cash pipeline

Matt says owners need to be “ahead of the game” and have a firm grasp of what cash is coming in and out of the business.

“Many owners begin their business as a passion project and don’t fully know how their business models translate to cash and profits,” he says. “They may have made £100,000 per month in the past but they don’t grasp the reality that they now only have the customer base to do £50,000 a month. They keep spending the same overheads and wages and get into cashflow difficulty. They need to regularly look at the business and ask, ‘what is my realistic cashflow pipeline?’ You should never be surprised by your cashflow.”

Mariah Tompkins, owner of WKM Accountancy Service says new businesses are particularly vulnerable. “In the rush to secure a business opportunity you may spend too much cash on the wrong clients and then the order falls through,” she says. “Low profits are another issue as you will not be able to cover the cost of all your business expenses. So, you need to consider whether you are charging enough for your products or need a new income stream.”

She says having too much stock can also cause cashflow woes and therefore needs to be monitored carefully to ensure it is tied up for only the shortest time possible.

“Seasonality, meaning you receive more business some months than others, is another cashflow challenge,” she adds. “SMEs also need to look at cash going out for overheads such as rent and utilities.”

Forecast your cashflow

When it comes to solutions, she agrees with Matt that a cashflow forecast must be created alongside ‘robust’ debt recovery procedures and credit check policies.

Owners, she adds, need to invoice both accurately and promptly as errors could mean a late payment or incorrect amounts ending up in the bank.

“You can have a major challenge if you have committed £100,000 to another supplier or for your pay run and then a customer pays late. It may be because they haven’t received your invoice, or they are unhappy with your goods or service,” Mariah adds. “If you work with overseas suppliers, they may offer unfavourable payment terms such as paying upfront deposits. You need to have full visibility and understand the full cycle of landing a deal, ordering from suppliers, invoicing and the cash ending up in your bank. What could go wrong?”

James Carfell, marketing manager at Surrey-based SME Collier Roofing, says it includes a 15-day payment requirement. “I believe that 30 days should be seen predominantly as a late payment, rather than an acceptable time schedule, if you are to stay on top of your cashflow situation,” he says.

Get upfront payments

Alina Cincan, managing director of Inbox Translation, advocates asking for upfront payment. “There are a few situations where upfront payment, whether partial or full, is justified, such as when you are dealing with a new client whose financials you know nothing about or with a client based in a country where reaching them in case of non-payment might be a bit more difficult,” she says. “There may also be times when you might consider offering a small discount for upfront payment.”

She also urges owners to follow up unpaid invoices. “Accounting software can track when and if payments have come through and send automatic reminders when they haven’t. This takes the awkwardness out of the equation.”

Other options available include invoice financing where owners receive a percentage of the invoice amount upfront from providers with the remainder to follow full payment.

Keep cash reserves

Matt says overdrafts or loans can also help if the owner knows their future cashflow pipeline can repay it. But there are limits.

“When you start putting family money in and getting personal guarantees then problems start. You are putting your own financial future at risk,” he says.

James says having cash reserves can help avoid that temptation: “You can reinvest back in the business when times are good, but make sure to store some of the cash for the harder months,” he says.

 


1Late payments costing UK SMEs at least £51.5 billion a year, published by Hitachi, Sept 2019

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Lacking interest?

Failing to shop around for better deposit rates to cost UK SMEs dearly over the next year

Lacking interest?

UK small- and medium-sized businesses are set to miss out on a whopping £4 billion in interest in the next 12 months because their cash reserves are languishing in low-interest accounts, a new study reveals.

 

A major new report from CEBR, the Centre for Economic & Business Research, commissioned by Flagstone, the UK’s largest cash deposit platform, reveals SMEs are missing out on billions of pounds every year by not shopping around for a better rate for their excess cash – the reserves not required for the day-to-day running of the business.

The extra £4 billion which businesses could earn if they moved their money to a better deposit account would be enough to fund for a year the salaries of more than 104,000 extra workers on the UK average annual salary of £29,588.1

 

With SMEs currently holding an estimated £199 billion in instant-access accounts and receiving an average rate of 0.41%2, they are on track to earn £578 million in interest in the coming year. However, if they were to switch to a market leading instant-access rate of 1.40%3, they would earn £2.8 billion in total in the next year; £2.2 billion more than they are currently expected to earn.

Further, UK SMEs currently hold an estimated £140 billion in fixed-rate deposit accounts earning on average 0.85%, meaning they are expected to earn £1.2 billion in the next 12 months. But if SMEs instead switched to the market-leading 2.10%3 one-year fixed rate, they would collectively earn £2.9 billion in interest in the coming 12 months; £1.7 billion more than they would have otherwise.

It means, in total, firms are expected to miss out on £4 billion in interest in the next year because their money is languishing in low-rate deposit accounts.

 

Bank of England and UK Finance data show that UK SMEs have increased their cash balances from £191 billion to £339 billion between 2011 and 2019, and the YouGov survey4 which forms part of the CEBR study confirms that more than a third (34%) said that Brexit had been a factor in the management of their cash balances over the past 3 years.

The YouGov survey of over 500 UK SMEs, also reveals that the greatest barrier to getting a better rate on their cash deposits is the hassle associated with opening new accounts. 39% of businesses surveyed said that this was a reason for not switching their money,

 

Andrew Thatcher, Co-Founder and Co-Managing Partner of Flagstone, said: “This study shows that apathy towards cash deposits does not just affect individual savers, but also the nation’s businesses too. Each year, UK SMEs are missing out on billions of pounds of interest income because they are not proactive in moving their money, often citing the process of researching and opening new accounts as prohibitively complex and time consuming.

“Firms that forego this extra cash could be missing out on the chance to increase profit, grow their business by hiring extra staff, or invest in productivity improvements. This may also be damaging to the UK economy given that SMEs account for 99.9% of all UK private sector businesses and 60% of all private sector employment5.

Thatcher concludes, “Platform solutions not only consistently keeps business owners and financial directors in the path of the best rates, but it also removes the barriers to switching, providing a simple way to increase income and reduce risk.”

 


1 Employee earnings in the UK: 2018, released by ONS on 25 October 2018. Annual figure calculated by multiplying median full-time gross weekly earnings (£569) by 52

2 All figures on current SME cash holdings and average interest rates are Bank of England data, analysed by the CEBR

3 Market Leading Corporate Deposit Rates as at 13 September 2019.

4 Survey of 538 SME finance decision makers carried out by YouGov between 11 April 2019 and 17 April 2019

5 Source: London School of Economics’ Centre for Economic Performance; ‘Unlocking SME productivity’ Sept 2018

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of Flagstone.

Selling your business to employees

Why transferring shares to an Employee Ownership Trust can be a tax-efficient way of extracting capital

Selling your business to employees

The ability to sell a business without having to pay Capital Gains Tax, combined with a desire to future-proof the independence of the business they created, is seeing a rising number of entrepreneurs hand over control to an Employee Ownership Trust (EOT).

First introduced in 2014, EOTs allow business owners to sell company shares free of Capital Gains Tax, so long as they hand over control to the employees who helped build the business.  

Building up a business and eventually selling to a third party has long been the more common aim for many business owners. This can often be the best way to secure the company’s future and maximise proceeds on disposal. However, the downside can be that the business loses its independence, some or all of its workforce and the unique culture that made it a success in the first place.

For business owners who don’t want to go down this path, and do not have family members to pass the business on to, EOTs are worth investigating as an alternative exit route. 

How it works

Under EOT rules, owners sell a controlling number of shares in a business to an EOT at an agreed valuation. Typically, the trust will pay for those shares either through contributions from the company's trading profits and/or bank loans secured on the company’s assets. 

For the owner, the sale is free of Capital Gains Tax. However, as with all share transfers over a certain value, stamp duty is payable on the transfer of shares. This is especially attractive to owners who don’t qualify for Entrepreneurs’ Relief and who might otherwise expect to pay 20% Capital Gains Tax on the sale of the business.

Providing a controlling share is sold to the EOT, not all shareholders have to sell their shares and owner/directors can remain in situ post-sale, continuing to receive market-competitive remuneration packages.

However, a key feature of EOTs for owners to consider is that the sale price is not generally all paid upfront, instead some part of it being repaid through the company’s trading profits in the years that follow.

Preparing for the future

One company to choose the EOT path is home entertainment retailer Richer Sounds, which has a chain of 50+ stores in the UK. Founder Julian Richer plans to stay involved with the business, but leave the day-to-day running to its existing management board, along with a Colleagues’ Advisory Council and trustees.

Tax efficient but get advice

Louise Jeffreys, MD of Gunner & Co, who works with businesses around the country, specifically looking at company structure and plans around exit, says: “Employee Ownership Trusts can be a tax-efficient method of extracting value, particularly if Entrepreneurs’ Relief can't be achieved. 

“That said, EOTs can be challenging to implement, so professional advice is essential.” She continues: “Do you have the right people in the business to take it on and grow it (or at least maintain profitability to ensure you get paid out eventually)? Often employees are not always the best business owners/leaders. Cash flow/working capital needs to be well managed to ensure the business continues to flourish while also paying off the previous owner."

Setting up an EOT could be an option for a wide variety of different types of organisations, as a spokesperson for BDO confirms: "BDO has worked with numerous companies, as well as LLPs and groups, on establishing EOTs. They have ranged from companies with just 20 employees to over 1,800, with values from £1m to over £80m and from all sectors."


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

The opportunities of private equity

Private equity investors can help entrepreneurs grow, partially exit, or fully exit their business

The opportunities of private equity

Owners of SMEs are without doubt worried about Brexit uncertainty, the state of the local and global economy, and even about tax breaks such as Entrepreneurs’ Relief being removed. This has led some to consider ‘de-risking’ and selling a stake in their business (see Entrepreneur Club article Should you sell up?).

Jeremy Furniss, partner at Livingstone, an international mergers and acquisitions advisory firm says he is definitely seeing a growing number of entrepreneurs considering a partial exit rather than a full exit, and exploring the use of private equity (PE) and other forms of investment to do this. 

But, he says: “The most common rationale is a much more positive story than simple de-risking. While there has been a great deal of discussion around the possible removal of Entrepreneurs’ Relief, it isn’t in our experience the overriding factor driving business owners to transact. Rather, they are looking for investment that can help them double or triple the value of their business, the ultimate benefits of which should far outweigh any loss of a tax relief on a portion of their shareholding.”

Whether the primary rationale is growth or de-risking, private equity could be an option. These funds typically buy a stake in a business (anything from around 20% through to a majority stake, depending on the deal rationale), work with the business to increase its value (hopefully), usually for a period of four to five years, and then look to sell their stake to a new investor or acquirer of the whole company.

Paul Cannings, partner at YFM Equity Partners – which has a portfolio of over 40 UK growth businesses and invests up to £10m per company – says they fully understand this ‘de-risking’ motive of owner-managers, and can certainly help. But their involvement does come with some caveats. 

The deal must work for all parties

Paul says: “If an owner comes to us and says: ‘I am really ambitious. I have a clear plan, a great team, I want to stay on as CEO and drive the value of the business. But I also want to protect my family and sell 25% of my equity and put that money in the bank.’ That feels right to us and could be an attractive proposition.”

He says this situation typifies one of the most important things about any private equity deal - aligning the interests of management and the private equity investor upfront. In this case, both parties want to grow the business after the initial deal, en-route to an eventual full exit. “We have been through these journeys many times, we can bring a wealth of experience to help the business get ready for the next stage of growth, and then when it is time to exit, we have loads of experience on how to position the business for that.”

However, says Paul, a deal would be much harder if an owner wants to semi-retire, take three-quarters of their money off the table, and stay on as CEO without ambitious growth plans. “In that type of situation, we aren’t aligned. The owner is effectively a seller. For private equity to play a role, the owner should probably think about finding an ambitious CEO to replace them, and maybe step back into a non-executive role with a small equity stake. As private equity investors, we would then be looking at this as investing in the new team to take the business forward, rather than just being an exit route for the current owner.” 

What to expect 

Paul says one of his top tips for entrepreneurs is to do their research on the investor: “We are going to be assessing you and doing due diligence on your company (see Entrepreneur Club article ‘Ten steps to due diligence readiness’). But you are also taking on a partner, for the next three to five years at least, so you need to make sure that partner is right for you. You should be taking references on the private equity firm itself and the individuals you will be dealing with, talking to other people they have invested in, and especially, finding out how they behave when things go wrong or when things go much better than expected.”

Paul does say that owners should also expect to see some day-to-day changes in the business. The private equity firm is likely to insist on changes such as more formal governance procedures, formal board meetings, more detailed budgets and cash flow forecasts, and putting a strong, dedicated finance director in place. He says: “While these can feel like big changes, they are actually part of the value a private equity partner will bring and also add to the value of the business.”

It is also likely that the private equity investor will insist on robust risk mitigation measures such as key person insurance, which is a life policy taken out by the company on a key executive's life. This protects the financial interests of all shareholders if the executive dies and the value of the company declines as a consequence. 

Jeremy encourages entrepreneurs to think hard about what life will be like post-investment. He says: “A business owned by one individual or by one family will be used to having their destiny entirely in their own hands. They might find the idea of sharing ownership quite concerning. This can work well if the interests of the owner-manager and investor are aligned. But with PE investment, owners will to an extent be losing control over their destiny as the new investor will no doubt exert influence over the business.”

He points to one area in particular that owners should give some thought to in advance, which can be a major change and is often a cause of deal negotiations breaking down – that of ‘minority protections’. 

Jeremy says: “Because private equity investors often take a minority but significant stake in a business, they will insist on having a say over key strategic decisions – such as making an acquisition, a very large capital expenditure, or CEO pay. Also, they will want the right to be able to step in and take action if things start to go wrong (and to be fair we are really only talking about when they go significantly wrong). This might involve the right to fire the CEO, or under certain conditions, take over management of the business altogether. Even though this is the worst possible outcome for the investor, that potential loss of control can be too much for some entrepreneurs to contemplate.”

If a private equity deal is done, owners will also need to give consideration to how their personal financial planning is affected, in addition to navigating the changes to their business outlined above. How the proceeds of a partial exit will be invested has to be taken into account, as well as updating financial retirement plans to fall in line with the planned full exit date. The adequacy of protection insurance such as life and income protection will also need to be assessed.


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Skills shortages – what’s the risk?

The UK’s skills gap is increasingly posing a challenge to growing businesses. How can they continue to attract the best talent?

Skills shortages – what’s the risk?

Unbeknown to the hundreds of Abba fans currently enjoying the spectacle of ‘Mamma Mia! The Party’ at London’s O2 venue, event planner Shout About is sending out its own SOS for new talent to help its growth.

Co-founder Ben Gamble says the five-year-old firm, which finds venues for corporate clients as well as owning and operating events, is struggling to hire new sales executives.

“Instead of just finding off-the-grid locations for events - such as Victorian pumping stations - we are looking at taking out 20-year-plus leases on our own sites,” explains Ben. “We need more sales staff but the competition in the events industry makes it hard.”

Barriers

Another growth firm in the less flamboyant world of accountancy is facing similar barriers in its ambitions to increase staff numbers.

“We are doing our five-year plan and automation is featuring heavily,” explains James Poyser, co-founder of online accountants inniAccounts and Provestor. “An aptitude to understand automation and how you harness it will be vital, but there are few people with these software skills.”

Such skill shortages are becoming increasingly common with a recent British Chambers of Commerce/Total Jobs report stating that 64% of firms are struggling to hire the talent they need. According to latest Office for National Statistics (ONS) figures there were 813,000 job vacancies in July to September. This is 34,000 fewer than the same period in 2018 but up from 750,000 in 2016.

Vacancies

The ONS said there were 44,000 vacancies in the information and communication sectors, 31,000 in financial and insurance activities and 80,000 in professional, science and technical. A recent Open University report1 revealed that 88% of firms had a shortage of digital skills with the Digital Marketing Institute noting that 74% of marketing companies face digital and soft skills gaps2.

“In the financial services and digital sector over the last year Brexit has had an impact on vacancies. We have seen EU talent leave and less come over. Generally, people have become more nervous and reticent about switching roles,” says Meeta Sahni, owner of recruiters The Maine Group. “In digital the number of roles being created is outnumbering the amount of people being trained. That really impacts growing firms.”

Crawfurd Walker, chief revenue officer at business advisors Elephants Child, agrees that finding the right talent is crucial in boosting both profits and value. 

“However recent high levels of employment combined with the uncertainty around Brexit is making finding the right talent an ever more difficult task,” he says. 

Rewards

In such a tight labour market he explains that getting access to the right staff is not just about hiking salaries.

“It is also flexible working schemes for better work-life balance, improved career development programmes and attractive work environments. Businesses need to get better at communicating the benefits associated with their brands both to existing and potential employees,” he says. “Employers can also look to access talent from areas of the labour market they may have previously ignored such as part-time workers.” 

Branding

Meeta agrees branding is vital. “Be clear about what you do and why. It is particularly important to the next generation who are seeking more purpose in their careers,” she says. “In addition, make sure your campaigns over social media and on job platforms are consistent. Internally, look at upskilling your existing staff and use reverse mentoring with juniors working with senior employees to share tech and social media skills.”

Ben at Shout About says it has recently started working with a jobs platform provider which sorts through CVs of interested candidates for any vacancy. “They only send us the good ones which saves us time,” he says. “But we are sometimes much more creative and direct including approaching charity sellers in the street who we think have got the gift of the gab!”

The company also offers flexible hours and team social activities to attract talent. “We emphasise that we are young and creative and understand your individual circumstances,” says Ben.

Development

James says his company uses flexi-hours and brand building to attract recruits. “We create a specific landing page on our website for each role with videos describing the job, our goals, development opportunities and our strategy. We talk about our brand and our reputation as forward thinkers using AI in our software,” he says. “But we recognise that we won’t meet our growth plan just by focusing on recruitment, we need to upskill existing staff. That means structured programmes on growing digital and people skills to help our people be the advisory accountants of the future. We have to get this right to drive our future expansion.”


1. ‘Bridging the Digital Divide’, June 2019

2. ‘Perpetual Evolution: The Interplay Of Talent and Technology in the Future Of Marketing’, The Economist Group in association with the Digital Marketing Institute (DMI). October 2019.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Do corporates want your start-up?

Large companies sometimes acquire smaller firms for their talented people

Do corporates want your start-up?

There is a growing trend for large companies to buy SMEs and start-ups purely to acquire the talents and knowledge of the people.

When a big business engages in ‘acquihiring’, as it’s known, it performs a ‘team lift’ to acquire valuable talent but not the smaller company’s customer base, networks, capital assets or even its technology and products.

For example, Apple’s CEO Tim Cook told CNBC business news channel that the tech giant buys a company “every two to three weeks” and had bought 20 to 25 small businesses in unannounced deals in the six months to May this year1. Elsewhere, Facebook bought London University-based blockchain start-up Chainspace, purportedly to acquire its development team to strengthen its position in the crypto sector2.

Gathering pace

And it is not just tech companies that are acquihiring, explains M&A legal specialist Nina Searle, partner with UK national law firm TLT.

“It’s been happening for a long time in professional services because that’s how firms in the sector have always expanded,” says Nina, who is seeing an increasing amount of TLT’s M&A transactions include acquihire elements.

“As the tech revolution gathers pace, there’s been a marked shift towards SMEs being acquihired by tech companies and small life sciences start-ups bought by big pharmaceutical firms. Primarily they’re firms that might be regarded as disruptors or potential threats.”

She adds: “These buy-outs are highly secretive, rarely making news as larger businesses acquihire stealthily – they don’t want rivals to know their strategic direction or what technology or skills they’ve access to.”

Opportunities

For any entrepreneur, having a major player wanting to buy their business sounds highly attractive, offering a chance to exit with a fantastic deal, maybe to start a whole new business or even retire.

But as Nina points out, it’s not that simple. “Typically, when a small business is acquihired, we expect to see a proportion of the purchase price deferred. For example, a portion of the purchase price may be paid up front and further tranches paid in successive years.

“This is to incentivise those moving to become firmly embedded in the new company – so buyers often want to bring founders with them.” 

Potentially this opens up new opportunities for developing the entrepeneur’s original business idea, with better routes to market, distribution channels and marketing support plus enhanced salaries and benefit packages for all.

“Above all, you have to be sure it’s right for you," says Nina. “Giving up autonomy, freedom to pursue ideas and development and fitting in with a corporate culture with strict compliance isn’t for everyone.”

“That means doing in-depth homework on the purchaser to find out what its intentions are, why it wants your business especially, and how you fit into that: in short, perform full due diligence before you start negotiating.”

Double-edged sword

That advice is firmly supported by Percy Emmett, Senior Lecturer of Enterprise and Entrepreneur in Residence at De Montfort University.

“Acquihiring can be a double-edged sword. Learn as much as possible about the buyer and its motivation for acquiring your business specifically, and consult fully with corporate business advisers and lawyers before agreeing anything.

Tech companies may be just buying your business simply to ‘take it out’ before it becomes big enough to be a rival or negatively disrupts the sector to their disadvantage, he says. “You’ll be promised a nice contract and development incentives, but they may actually be planning to drop you and your team fairly quickly. By then, your personal brand may be damaged if you’re trying to start-up again.”

Percy says SMEs are also sometimes acquihired to handle overflow work and smaller projects. “However, acquihiring does offer clever entrepreneurs a golden opportunity to learn more about running business effectively, to come out with useful skills to run a new small business in a much smarter way.”


1. www.cnbc.com, May 2019

2. www.wired.co.uk, June 2019

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

The bespoke approach to borrowing

How private banking can help throughout the business cycle

The bespoke approach to borrowing

From inception through to expansion, running a business entails consistent funding for a variety of reasons, which means loans can be critical to an entrepreneur’s success. Beyond their own operations, business owners may also be looking to fund other aspects of their lifestyles, such as purchasing their own dream property.

Yet, despite small businesses accounting for 99.3% of all private sector businesses in the UK at the start of 2018 – with 99.9% small or medium-sized (SMEs) – entrepreneurs continue to face difficulty in accessing funds.  (Source: Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy’s Business Population Estimates 2018).

The reality, however, is that many entrepreneurs fail to look beyond high-street banks when attempting to secure a loan. The process of approaching these banks can be a daunting one, with many reluctant to lend to entrepreneurs due to their rigid assessment criteria. But there are ways to overcome the barriers to finance presented by traditional bank loans.

Private banking offers one such alternative: a bespoke approach to lending that takes into consideration the individual and their personal financial situation. What’s more, busy professionals can benefit greatly from a private bank relationship, which is renowned for its personal touch and appeals to those who prefer finance with a face to it, rather than a ‘computer says no’ mentality.

Here, we look at how private bank lending compares to traditional bank lending at three stages of the business cycle.

 

Getting started

Getting a business off the ground takes determination and drive, but this alone does not guarantee funding from lenders.

Following a record year in 2017, total investment in UK startup companies dropped 15 per cent from £8.27 billion to £7 billion in 2018, according to figures published by Beauhurst (Feb, 2019), a searchable database of the UK's high-growth companies. Today, start-up loans for new businesses remain highly sought after.

It’s no surprise then that many business owners cite a lack of finance as one of the biggest barriers to pursuing their entrepreneurial ventures, with most relying on the founder’s savings, investment, gifts from friends and family, government grants or even crowdfunding as traditional routes to funding dry-up.

One major difference between a private bank and a traditional funder is flexibility, with the former taking a more varied approach to credit assessment based on their own method to measuring creditworthiness. A private bank can be flexible regarding requirements and solutions by looking at the bigger picture rather than relying on the rigidity of credit scoring.

For example, private banks will recognise that many entrepreneurs may be on their second or third business and have had one or more successful ventures previously. They may have a need to borrow for a new start-up or have wealth tied up in other investments, and therefore have a need to borrow. This kind of tailored approach is built on the strong interpersonal client relationships that a private bank affords.

 

Early-stage growth

One of the biggest challenges for entrepreneurs during the early growth stage of their business is having the time to meet a whole new range of demands that come with managing an increasing client base, expanding a workforce and generating an increasing level of revenue.

The process of applying for funds with traditional banks can be slow, however, greatly affecting how quickly an entrepreneur can grow their company. In addition, traditional funders may still be reluctant to lend when there is not already a long track record of profitability. 

According to the Federation of Small Businesses (FSB), most start-ups are unlikely to break-even until their second or third year, making them unattractive to many high-street banks. The FSB went on to report in its 2018 Small Business Index (SBI) that 42% of small business owners said credit availability is very poor (19%) or quite poor (23%). Just 24% feel credit is readily available.

Private banks are more likely to consider the individual and lend based on wealth, not just income. A common factor that a traditional bank may overlook is that, while entrepreneurs may not pay a big income to themselves in their current entrepreneurial ventures, they could be wealthy individuals. Many entrepreneurs who fall short of the rigid demands of mainstream lenders may be able to reach their next objective with a private bank.

 

Expansion and maximising profits

Before a business can reach its full maturity, it needs to go through a stage of growth and expansion. A conundrum many small businesses face, however, is how to fund the expansion of their operations without access to financial backing when they find their resources and time stretched thinner than ever before.

Once upon a time, a sound business plan and a solid track record were enough to secure a loan but now, often nothing short of an already-thriving turnover can convince most banks to lend significant sums during this stage.

Whereas traditional banks tend to measure a client's ability to pay based on their income at the time of applying, private banks are more likely to take a longer-term view, factoring in the money a venture is going to make as well as the assets that currently back it.

Ultimately, this tailored and informed approach all comes down to the individual and what they are trying to achieve. When life has been a successful one, and the next milestone is in sight, a private bank’s bespoke approach to lending can help make entrepreneurs’ dreams a reality.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of Weatherbys Private Bank.

Don’t cook the books!

Financial areas to address when selling a business

Don’t cook the books!

Many business owners don’t manage to sell their business first time – or for as much as they’d hoped – because they fall victim to a number of pitfalls.

Selling a business for maximum value involves a fine blend of ingredients and methods: strategic preparation, accurate valuation, targeted marketing to prospective buyers, careful due diligence, and smart negotiation. One thing the recipe for success doesn’t include is cooking the books. Underhand financial practices will devalue your business – or even make it unsaleable.

 

So, you’ve been approached by a potential acquirer and they’ve asked to see your accounts…

Do you feel confident that you can explain the financials of your business to an acquirer in a way that will not only answer their queries – but also shows off what a hot proposition they’re looking at?

Bad organisation, antiquated or patchy processes, as well as a time, skills or resource deficit; these are all genuine reasons why some business owners find it hard to evidence the current financial state of their business in a comprehensive and compelling way.

Don’t worry! Panic can lead to a temptation to ‘cook the books’ in an attempt to make financials appear more attractive to potential buyers – when all that’s really needed is a little guidance, attention to detail, and good preparation.

 

Areas to address

Honesty always pays. Here’s an idea of which red flags acquirers will be looking out for, so you can compile an accurate set of financials that transparently represent your business and makes it more saleable:

Lack of/inadequate accounting, reporting, budgeting and forecasting processes – even if the numbers aren’t consistently strong, robust processes mean your buyer knows exactly where they stand and that there aren’t any hidden issues lurking.

Inconsistent data – if one record states one sum, and another something different, your buyer will be confused or even suspicious, so make sure data is consistent across the organisation.

Suppressed profits – most buyers will calculate value on the average sustainable profit over a 3-year period so don’t suppress your profits in order to reduce your tax bill because it won’t pay off when you come to sell.

Undervalued or overvalued stock and work in progress – get an independent review of your business from an external adviser who can help you evaluate the true worth of your business, taking into consideration ALL value drivers/barriers (physical assets, monetary and otherwise).

Issues with corporation tax, PAYE, and VAT – these could mean future fines or a big bill for the buyer so make sure you can demonstrate there aren’t any gaps by keeping all the filing of returns and payments up to date.

Directors’ private expenses running through the business – keep monthly management accounts wherever possible and remove discretionary expenses not related to the company.

Undeclared cash payments to the company – absolutely everything must be recorded and accounted for.

Poorly-trained or ill-informed accounts staff – whether in-house or outsourced, make sure the people in charge of the books are 100% aware of what’s happening in the business, they’re following all processes, and they can explain discrepancies correctly.

 

If your numbers don’t add up, a buyer might not trust you and is likely to get cold feet. They might even inspect other areas of your business more closely and find other reasons not to buy.

Those serious about selling a business could be well-advised to have a ‘dry run’ on the financial due diligence. Ask your accounts team or accountant to prepare fully audited accounts - that way, you’ll be more than ready when the ideal buyer turns up.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of Entrepreneurs Hub.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief – which way now?

A growing number of respected organisations have criticised the relief as ineffective at encouraging entrepreneurialism

Entrepreneurs’ Relief – which way now?

Entrepreneurs and business leaders could be running out of time to take advantage of a tax relief after a growing number of calls to scrap it.

At present, Entrepreneurs’ Relief (ER) means that anyone who has owned at least 5% of the shares of their business for two years or more can pay substantially less Capital Gains Tax when all or part of the business is sold.

Providing relatively simple qualifying criteria is met, tax at only 10% on all gains is paid, instead of the usual level of 20% for higher and additional rate taxpayers.

ER ‘not achieving its objective’

However, the Association of Accounting Technicians (AAT) – whose members provide services to more than 400,000 UK SMEs – has called for ER to be axed, claiming that it’s not fit for purpose because it does nothing to encourage entrepreneurialism.

Phil Hall, Head of Public Affairs and Public Policy at AAT, told the Entrepreneur Club: “Time and time again, AAT members have highlighted that their clients are usually unaware of Entrepreneurs’ Relief until the time comes to sell their business – so it’s clearly not achieving its objective of encouraging entrepreneurialism.

“In most cases, Entrepreneurs’ Relief simply rewards those who would sell anyway or in some cases encourages business owners to look for an early exit.”

He adds that the money should instead be invested in “helping UK businesses to start up or scale up rather than sell up”.

The AAT is not alone in seeking reform. This autumn, left-leaning think tank, the Institute of Public Policy Research, called for ER to be abolished, arguing that it has become concentrated among wealthy individuals with “little evidence it has had a genuine effect on entrepreneurship”.

And the independent Office for Tax Simplification published a comprehensive Business Lifecycle Report which clearly states that while “other reliefs appear to be designed to encourage investment in young and growing businesses, or to preserve existing businesses from break-up in the event of succession, ER does not seem to achieve either of those objectives.”

Finally, another think tank, the Resolution Foundation, has criticised ER – introduced in April 2008 – as “expensive, ineffective and regressive”. It said the £22 billion* it had cost over the past decade would have been better spent elsewhere.

A tax-efficient way to sell 

Against this backdrop of increasing criticism of ER, business owners could find they don’t have much longer to consider taking advantage of it before any possible changes are made to the benefits it offers – or before it’s disposed of altogether.

For the time being at least, ER offers a way to reduce the risk posed by difficult trading conditions through tax-efficiently taking money from the business. And there’s no need to exit your business altogether to take advantage of ER. Instead, selling part of your company to an investor can release some cash.

Qualifying criteria also stipulates that the company’s main activities are in trading, rather than non-trading activities like investment. HMRC may also reject an ER claim because a business is holding too much cash, as this may be considered a substantial non-trading asset if there’s no trading purpose for it – like expanding the business, moving to new premises or buying another company.

However, Martin Brown, CEO of business growth advisor Elephants Child, says any business owner considering selling up should first audit their company to make sure it is ready for sale and their possible exit from the business. If that’s not the case, ER qualification criteria, or the possible scrapping of ER, “isn’t something they should be worrying about”.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief is complex and it’s important to take professional advice before deciding on a course of action.


* Resolution Foundation​​​​​​​ website blog post, 29 August 2018

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Should you sell up?

As uncertainty mounts in the UK economy should entrepreneurs look to sell their businesses or stick to their guns and see out the storm?

Should you sell up?

British businesses are increasingly looking to exit ahead of a potentially scary Brexit departure on 31 October.

According to the Office for National Statistics inward mergers and acquisitions (M&As), where foreign firms buy British, jumped in value to £18.3 billion in the second quarter of this year, up from £7.6 billion in the first quarter. Domestic M&A rose by £1 billion to £2.8 billion1.

Many of these, according to the Barclays Entrepreneurs Index2, are growth firms. It recently found that M&A activity involving firms under five years old had risen to 505 deals, a rise year on year from 395 since 2015.

Motivated to exit

Peter Gray, partner at Cavendish Corporate Finance, isn’t surprised. “It’s the best time ever for entrepreneurs concerned both by Brexit and a potential change in Government to exit. A lot of our clients are motivated about getting out,” he says. “Pricing and multiples are at an all-time high, driven by a huge amount of private equity and trade interest from overseas. Private equity has a massive wall of money looking for a home and the weak pound is making high quality UK firms more attractive.”

Entrepreneurs, Peter suggests, are also taking advantage of attractive levels of Entrepreneurs’ Relief (ER) on exit. “We’ll never get any better than its current tax rate of 10%,” he says.

He says tech firms, particularly artificial intelligence and ‘software as a service’ (SaaS) providers, are attracting strong sales interest as are property services.

However, there is a lack of interest in firms with a big exposure to Brexit such as those exporting or importing large quantities to and from Europe. “Purchasers hate uncertainty and it is difficult to get value if they need to take a leap of faith in profit projections,” Peter says. “It is probably why most entrepreneurs will not look to sell. They hope that nothing will change post-Brexit.”

Taking stock

Whatever decision is taken, Martin Brown, chief executive of business advisors Elephants Child, says owners should consider this period of uncertainty as a ‘moment’ to take stock.

“SME leaders are incredibly busy in their businesses and making them grow and rarely get a chance to take a helicopter view. You can treat this as time to review and make a strategic assessment of your personal and business aspirations as well as what impact Brexit might have. It can give you the right answer of what to do next,” he says.

“When do you want to retire, how much do you need to retire and what does the business need to do to provide for that?  How much value do you want to create and where is the business on that journey? To drive that growth could be a merger or sale. A volatile market brings many opportunities and interested purchasers.” 

Conversely if after the review process it is clear that your business does not currently have the value you are seeking then you should stick to your guns and keep focusing on your own growth journey.

“Waiting around just to see what happens is not proactive. Take time to do your analysis, come up with your plan and commit to it,” he says. “I know of one business going through exit that started planning three years ago, whilst another kept their head down and only now, a few weeks before we leave the EU, they are rushing around looking to sell. But it is not in a fit state to go to market.”

Getting organised

If you do decide to sell, then get organised. “You can truncate the sale process. It means preparing a three-page document rather than doing an information memorandum,” Peter says. “It is focusing on targeting key prospects who you can do a quick deal with rather than heading off to China or Japan to determine any interest. But you still need fundamentals such as having a strong management team, profit projections and a full online data room.”

He admits that such a truncated sale could make it harder for owners to maximise their headline valuation but by selling now the attractive ER rate would cushion some of the blow.

Extracting capital

Martin says owners can gain financial security during the current volatility by other measures, such as a partial exit to private equity. “You can take care of your mortgage and family but still have a chunk of the business to move forward with and exit at a later date,” he explains.

Owners could also take out a pension and get their companies to pay into it and mitigate high rates of tax. So even if the business struggles they still have a pension fund to fall back on. In addition, an owner could pay themselves a dividend and then invest it into a Venture Capital Trust or Enterprise Investment Scheme. This would effectively result in 30% income tax relief.

“Do something to maximise your position,” urges Martin. “If you do nothing, you’ll get caught out and never benefit from your years of hard work.”


1. ONS, Mergers and acquisitions involving UK companies: April to June 2019

2. Barclays Entrepreneurs Index​​​​​​​, viewed September 2019

Venture Capital Trusts and Enterprise Investment Schemes are suitable only for experienced, sophisticated or high net worth investors who accept that they may get back significantly less than the original investment.
– These represent a much higher risk than investing in larger well established listed companies listed on the FTSE All Share Index and are inherently more illiquid.
– The legislation surrounding VCTs and EISs and, as a result, their tax treatment, is subject to individual circumstances, may change in the future and could apply retrospectively.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief is complex and it’s important to take professional advice before deciding on a course of action.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

When a key shareholder departs

Resignation, retirement, death or incapacity all need to be planned for

When a key shareholder departs

Owners of SMEs are sometimes faced with a situation where the shareholding structure of their business has to change. This might be totally expected, arising from a well-flagged retirement, or it could come out of the blue, because of a resignation, sudden death, or incapacity.

Advance preparation is essential for navigating all of these situations with the least possible disruption. Tax and trust consultant at St. James’s Place, Simon Martin, says: “Operational, legal and financial plans will all be needed, and spell out: who will take over the day-to-day functions of a departing shareholder; who will purchase their shares; and how the purchase will be financed?”

Resignation or retirement

Co-shareholders won’t always be able to exit together, as would be the case if a business was sold lock, stock, and barrel. A shareholder may decide to resign for any number of reasons, or retire earlier than fellow shareholders.  

Richard Jones, corporate and commercial partner at law firm Blake Morgan, says thinking about how the operational role of any individual shareholder would be covered if they left is not only about making sure that day-to-day operations continue smoothly, but also to plan for the possibility of having to allocate equity to high-calibre replacements.

In terms of legal planning, he stresses the importance of shareholders agreeing upfront that if one of them departs, that person is obliged to sell to non-departing shareholders. This can be covered in the main shareholders agreement or in a separate agreement. A separate agreement is needed if not all shareholders (e.g. staff with very small stakes) are party to this arrangement. A methodology for valuing the shares should also be agreed upfront, to avoid disputes at the time of the transaction.

When it comes to financing the purchase, Richard says that this is usually done through the company, and is generally not a case of non-departing shareholders having to come up with the cash in their personal capacity. The company might pay for the leaver’s shares out of accumulated profits, or by raising debt or equity finance. The company would then buy the shares and go through a legal process of ‘cancelling’ those shares, with all shareholders raising their stakes proportionately.

He also points out that it is quite rare for a departing shareholder to receive all of their cash immediately. More commonly, there would be an element of deferred payment (known as vendor financing), which would ease the financial burden placed on the company.

Death or incapacity

The sudden death or incapacity of one shareholder is obviously more difficult to cope with from an operational perspective. But despite this, contingency planning should be done regularly to minimise the impact on the day-to-day running of the business, should this situation occur.

However, says Simon: “Dealing with the transfer of shares from a deceased or incapacitated shareholder should be a fairly straightforward process, if the correct legal and financing structures are put in place in advance. The legal side is usually covered by a ‘double-option agreement’, also known as a ‘cross-option agreement’, and the purchase is usually financed from the proceeds of a protection (life and disability) insurance policy.”

Richard explains: “A cross-option agreement is essentially an irrevocable guarantee that, in the event of the death or disability of a shareholder, the insurance will trigger and the surviving shareholders undertake to purchase the shares of the deceased for the amount paid out by the insurance policy.” He says shareholders should be revisiting the value of the business periodically, and updating the policy accordingly. If this isn’t done and the policies pay out less than the value of the shares, the deceased’s beneficiaries won’t realise the full value of the shareholding. He points out that the agreement can be structured in such a way that the company can bear the cost of the insurance premium.

The consequences of not thinking through the implications of a change in shareholding, and not putting these legal and financing structures in place upfront, can be truly awful.

Richard says: “The operational implications of losing a key member of the team will inevitably put some strain on the business. But if the transfer of shares isn’t sorted out properly, things can get infinitely worse. Without the correct legal agreements, the shares of the deceased can end up in the hands of someone who has never had anything to do with the business (a beneficiary of the deceased’s estate) but has all the controls and rights that were afforded to the deceased – such as putting people on the board and influencing the direction of the company.” He also points out the deceased’s beneficiaries might be free to sell their inherited stake to an unwanted shareholder, such as a competitor.

A last point highlighted by Simon pertains to tax. He says: “The legal and financial structures need to take into account the tax circumstances of all parties, and ensure that where possible, no unnecessary taxes are payable (as would be the case if insurance premiums paid by the company are deemed a ‘benefit-in-kind’) and no tax reliefs are lost (such as Entrepreneurs’ Relief and Business Relief).”


Readers should seek appropriate legal, financial and tax advice when considering the structures mentioned in this article.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. The value of any tax relief depends on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Securing a start-up loan

The Start Up Loans programme provides both the money and mentoring to get your business off the launch pad

Securing a start-up loan

You’ve done your research, defined your audience and written your business plan, but now you need financial backing to bring your start-up to life. No matter what you’re trying to launch, whether it’s a cold brew coffee company or a creative agency, without adequate funding in place there’s a risk your venture will remain nothing more than a pipedream.

Take PJ Farr, a former soldier in the Princess of Wales Royal Regiment serving in The Falklands Islands. The eureka moment for his award-winning broadband business came when he took a selfie with a penguin and sent it to his father-in-law. In doing so, PJ realised that he had a stronger wi-fi connection on the remote island than he did back at home in Guilford.

His solution was to found UK Connect, a broadband supplier for the construction industry. Today, six years later, the company has a multi-million-pound turnover and works with some of the biggest names in the housebuilding industry, including Barratt Homes and Taylor Wimpey. None of this would have been possible however, without an £18,000 loan PJ received from the Start Up Loans programme, a UK government-backed scheme that provides financial support and mentoring to new and early stage UK businesses. PJ secured the loan with help from X-Forces, an entreprise which enables veterans to join the world of business.

A financial lifeline

Since it was founded in 2012, the Start Up Loans programme has helped many aspiring entrepreneurs such as PJ to succeed. At the last count, the scheme has awarded more than 65,000 loans, totalling £510 million across the UK1.

The Start Up Loans programme, part of the British Business Bank, provides fixed-interest loans and mentoring support to aspiring business owners across the UK who might be struggling to access other forms of finance, explains Managing Director Richard Bearman.

Individuals can apply for business loans of up to £25,000 (with a maximum of £100,000 available per business) at a 6% fixed interest rate per annum. As the loan is unsecured, there’s no need to have assets or a guarantor in place to support an application. What’s more, the programme is inclusive. Of those who have received a loan since 2012, almost two-fifths (39.3%) were women, one in five (22%) came from Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic communities (BAME), and more than a third (36.5%) were unemployed when they applied for the loan, reflecting the diversity of the UK’s start-up community2.

Mentoring makes a difference

In the early stages of launching a business, having a mentor to act as a sounding board that you can bounce ideas off is invaluable. That’s why the Start Up Loans programme works with a national network of Delivery Partners who help applicants to not only polish their business plans, but most importantly, provide practical support to ensure entrepreneurs realise their full potential.

From the off, all prospective business founders are guided through the application process by a Delivery Partner. They also have a wealth of useful resources and templates at their disposal to help them create the business plan, cash flow forecast and personal survival budget that need to be submitted with each application. Those who manage to successfully secure a loan are then assigned a mentor and offered 12-months of free, practical support as well as access to exclusive business offers.

While it goes without saying that a cash injection is crucial to getting any new venture up and running, having a guiding hand to help navigate the inevitable bumps along the road can make the difference between survival and failure in those early years. As PJ puts it: “The support [from the Start Up Loans programme and X-Forces] was invaluable, and I wouldn’t be where I am today without them.”


1 August 2019, data taken from startuploans.co.uk/media-centre/

2 Figures drawn from data on the delivery of loans up to 15 May 2019, when the programme passed the £500m mark, startuploans.co.uk/media-centre/. The Evaluation of Start Up Loans: Year 3 Report is available on the British Business Bank website.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Be prepared for an offer

If an offer for your business came tomorrow how would you react? Is it possible to be fully prepared for the unexpected?

Be prepared for an offer

Receiving an unsolicited bid for his electric car charging start-up HaloIPT prompted Dr Anthony Thomson to put the brakes on his long-term growth plan.

“We were 18 months old, doing a £20 million Series A funding round and talking to potential strategic investors in the automotive sector such as General Motors. We then bumped into mobile chip maker Qualcomm who also wanted to be part of the consortium,” Anthony recalls. “As due diligence progressed Qualcomm got more and more excited and decided they wanted to buy us outright. It had been our intention to exit in around 5-7 years so the offer, which was a big chunk of cash, really threw us. We weren’t ready for it.”

Navel-gazing mode

Anthony and his fellow directors went into “navel-gazing” mode, deliberating over whether now was a good time to sell or to continue executing on their business plan with all the unknown risks, competition and hurdles that could lie ahead.

“We ended up selling to Qualcomm, but we were slightly unprepared. The due diligence for a raise compared with a sale is quite different in the level of information you need to provide. There were a lot of late nights,” says Anthony, who now, as Chief Business Officer of business advisors Elephants Child, helps other growth firms deal with unsolicited approaches.

“It tends to start with a phone call with a junior manager declaring that they have been looking at your company for a while and that you are very impressive,” Anthony says. “It’s flattery and it completely changes your thought process. Owners forget that if they had planned to sell their business they would have gotten nicely prepared beforehand. They’d oversee the whole process, including the timing, which would leave them in a stronger position to achieve better value.”

Introductory meeting

This emotional response often leads to owners agreeing to quickly meet with the potential acquirer and giving away far too much confidential information, such as detailed sales and growth forecasts, employment and customer contracts, and IP.

“If you are minded to, then agree to have a high-level meeting but don’t divulge anything confidential. Find out why they want to buy you and what their long-term intentions would be. You don’t want to sell to a Gordon Gekko who is going to cherry-pick assets and sack your staff. You want to find a business with synergy, expert staff or a strong, unique product,” Anthony advises.

Peter Kroeger, principal at KLO Partners, also says it is worth chatting with a bidder and getting a non-disclosure agreement before an initial meeting.

“Determine whether you like them and if you can trust them. How will your business fit in with theirs?” he says. “Talk about your vision and why you are succeeding but not your customers, suppliers, margins or prices. Also, find out as much about them as you can from sources such as Companies House.”

Peter says that an agreement should be made whether to continue with the process at the end of the first meeting. “But it is ok to say you want to think about it,” he adds. “If you do agree, don’t be hasty in setting up the second meeting. Leave it two or three weeks and then appoint an advisor to start the selling process.”

Peter says owners, if they feel unprepared for a sale, can also suggested an even longer delay. “On many occasions I’ve seen owners say, ‘We really like you, but can we put this deal on hold until we get our house in order?’ The acquirer usually says yes because even though they may end up paying more they will get a much better business. It can take up to three years because there is so much to do, such as sorting out your paperwork or adding new management or more customer spread,” he says.

Ready to go

To avoid this and to be fully prepared for any offer when and if it comes, owners need to change their mindset and processes.

“Most owners never think about an exit until their mid-50s, so they are never ready for sale. They are nowhere near.” Peter says. “But they all see their business as their pension pot. They expect to sell at some point so they should get themselves ready whilst they are growing.”

Anthony agrees and advises owners to create a ‘data room’ to help focus the business. “If you are not prepared for a sale you might find that an NDA expired last week for a particular contract or that 15 employees all have different terms and conditions. A data room is a virtual room full of documents such as shareholder agreements, board meeting minutes, cashflows, forecasts, sales models and product descriptions which are up to date and regularised,” he explains. “Build the room and gently populate it so if a bidder does come along then you are ready. They won’t find any nasties in there to drive the value down and you’ll be able to be rewarded for your hard work.”


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Finding cutting-edge expertise

If you’re looking to move your business into the fast lane, a Knowledge Transfer Partnership could be the answer

Finding cutting-edge expertise

Everybody seems to agree Knowledge Transfer Partnerships (KTPs) are a great way for small businesses to deliver step changes in performance and capability. They give companies access to expertise and smart thinking that can propel them to the forefront of their sectors.

KTPs are a three-way partnership between a company, a ‘knowledge base’ – usually a university, business school or research institute – and a recently qualified graduate known as an associate. Associates are embedded in businesses to enable new, game-changing expertise and knowledge to improve competitiveness, productivity and performance and accelerate technical innovation.

Running from one to three years, they are part-funded by government agency Innovate UK via Knowledge Transfer Advisers, who work for the Knowledge Transfer Network. An SME can expect to contribute around a third of the project cost, around £35,000 a year on average1, with the associate usually employed by the ‘project’.

You can apply for a KTP directly through an academic institution or contact a local Knowledge Transfer Adviser.

Working with universities

Helen Donnellan is Director of Business Engagement at De Montfort University and has been involved in many successful KTPs, including one that led to a small-scale sports equipment manufacturer designing the ball used in the Rugby World Cup.

She says: “At the core of any KTP is the relationship with a local business. Typically, a firm outlines their project idea and if it’s suitable and we have the relevant expertise, the university provides a process and framework for the KTP to develop and finds a suitable associate.” 

Normally that’s a De Montfort graduate with an ability to lead a project or possibly a suitable candidate from another university. Either way the associate always reports to the De Montfort’s academics.

“KTPs really are a fantastic opportunity and an effective way for SMEs to create space for innovation that’s not possible in their normal daily working environment,” says Helen. 

“They’re great value because you get an associate to develop vital research, maximise its value and create a solution you can take through to development plus all the expertise, support and knowledge of the experienced academics behind them.”

According to Helen, that means businesses usually get more out of a KTP than they ever expected.

Experience

That’s been the experience of Hertfordshire-based SME, Drax Technology, an alarm management solutions specialist with a client base of UK hospitals and universities operating on multiple sites.

One of its core roles is to collect fire system monitoring data from thousands of alarms, panels, sprinklers, detectors and other critical life-safety devices such as blood banks and drug fridge alarms.

Drax Technologies’ existing system enabled various life safety devices to communicate and transmit performance data enabling clients to assess and manage their systems by looking at compliance, performance, reliability, maintenance and replacement.

“However, this data was collected at dedicated terminals requiring a technician to use it,” explains Director Alex Cother. “What we really wanted was a system with a user-friendly interface available to everyone. We’re a tech-focused business but we didn’t have the expertise on board.

Strong position

Drax approached University of Bedfordshire, which recommended setting up a KTP, with 1st Class Honours software engineering graduate Usman Ali embedded as the associate in 2017.

During the £100,000, 27-month project, Usman, backed by expert big data academic Paul Sant, developed a cloud-based monitoring solution that could be accessed through a relatively straightforward ‘dashboard’ on laptops, tablets, mobiles and desktops.

With the product now in operation Alex says: “Usman brought with him a totally different skillset and huge academic back up. Our contribution was 25% of the project cost – money well spent.

“The project’s taken us forward significantly – we’re now looking at offering new compliance services, including water quality, fire door monitoring and energy management.

“Commercially we’re in a very strong position we wouldn’t have achieved without the KTP.”


1 https://www.dur.ac.uk/research.innovation/business.engagement/ktp/companies/cost/

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Five ways to find early adopters

How can you identify and engage with the first group of customers for your start-up?

Five ways to find early adopters

The success or failure of a start-up can be determined by its ability to engage with early adopters for its products and services. These first customers are a segment of your target market who are prepared to be ambassadors for your product or service – but how do you find them? Here are five tips to help you attract – and retain – your flag-bearers….

   1. Define your early adopters

When it comes to launching a company, defining who your ideal early adopters are is crucial. These people are a specific segment of your target audience who stand apart due to their proactive nature and willingness to engage with new products or services.

“Early adopters are people who are innovators themselves: those who actively seek new technologies, solutions and ideas, sometimes simply for the sake of novelty and change,” says Jaideep Prabhu, Professor of Marketing at Cambridge at Judge Business School and co-author of the book Frugal Innovation.

Spending time engaging, understanding and responding to these early adopters is essential. “They are often experts who can quickly assess the value of new ideas,” adds Jaideep. “That means that depending on their judgements, they can either become champions, helping these ideas spread through society, or detractors, who can quickly quash them.”

   2. Create a social media buzz

Once you’ve identified the ideal characteristics of your early adopters, you’ll need to engage with them – and posting on social media and online community groups is a simple and effective way to reach people who are interested in your industry.

“Social media plays a crucial role, not only in finding early adopters, but also in engaging and leveraging them to help scale the new solution,” explains Jaideep. “It also enables the viral spread of information and excitement between early adopters themselves as well as from early adopters to the mass market.”

   3. Engage with early adopters on a personal level

Lean Startup ambassador and host of the London Lean Startup Meetup, Business Coach Mark Elliott believes that the best way to attract early adopters is to build meaningful relationships. “The most important thing is to listen and keep early adopters involved, but it’s also essential to show the human side of your business,” he advises. “Tell them a bit about yourself, the challenges you’re facing and the successes you’ve had. People recognise authenticity; they value that engagement with you. Even when you have thousands of early adopters, if you take a personal approach, they’re likely to think that they have a one-to-one relationship with you.”

   4. Communicate the value of your start-up

Above all, you need to give early adopters a compelling reason to get onboard with your start-up. You should emphasise why your offering stands out from anything else on the market. Releasing a free trial version might be tempting, however it isn’t necessarily a good idea.

Nelson Phillips, Professor of Strategy and Innovation at Imperial College Business School urges caution: “Free versions of products can create real problems when you try to charge,” he warns. Instead, Nelson suggests that early adopters are given other inducements, such as “free added functionality or early availability of new versions. Another useful benefit is direct communication with experts in the company who can provide assistance and at the same time track problems and opportunities for new product features.”

5. Ask for feedback

By taking steps to push your start-up in the right places to the right people, and then engaging with them on a personal level, you’ll find early adopters who offer valuable feedback, help generate a buzz around your product or service and share your company with others, too.

“Early adopters are proactive; they want to give you feedback,” says Mark. “It’s also a good idea to encourage them to share your success with others. It can happen organically, but you can facilitate it, for example, by using a consistent hashtag in your communications. And should you encounter issues along the way, deal with them quickly, simply and honestly – be seen to follow up.”

 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

15 facts about extracting capital

With businesses facing uncertain trading conditions, you may decide to take capital from your business now or even sell up altogether. Here are some tips for extracting your money in the most tax-efficient way but an accountant will be able to say whether they are right for you

.


Venture Capital Trusts and Enterprise Investment Schemes are suitable only for experienced, sophisticated or high net worth investors who accept that they may get back significantly less than the original investment. These represent a much higher risk than investing in larger well-established listed companies listed on the FTSE All Share Index and are inherently more illiquid.

The legislation surrounding VCTs and EISs and, as a result, their tax treatment, is subject to individual circumstances, may change in the future and could apply retrospectively.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Do you know your SPOFs?

Can you identify your 'single points of failure' that could affect your sale?

Do you know your SPOFs?

Failing to recognise your single points of failure (SPOFs) is one of the reasons why 70% of business owners fail to sell first time1. So how do you identify your SPOFs and how can you manage them as you get exit ready?

When a buyer reviews your business, they look for these areas in your business that are high risk and could negatively impact your business if they failed. We’ll consider three common SPOFs and what to do about them.

 

Suppliers

Do you get all your key products, components or services from a single source? There is nothing better than having a great relationship with your suppliers – these connections are precious and can be a large part of what has made you successful. However, do you have a plan B if they were to go bust or be bought by your competitor? What if external factors were to affect the supply chain?

For example, if you have a supplier who makes moulded products for you, do you own the tooling, and could you access it independently? If not, how easy would it be to move it to another supplier?

When you’re selling a company – or even if you’re not – sit down with your supplier and ask them, “What happens if…?” Look at alternative supply options and spend some time researching the market to identify other potential sources and how feasibly and quickly you could switch.

Then, create a written contingency plan, mapping out alternative options for supply. Keep this plan up to date to show potential acquirers.

 

 

Employees

Your people are your power, so think about how much would it impact your company if one of your key employees left tomorrow. The impact could be felt in a matter of weeks, days or even hours, depending on what your business does.

Every employee contributes something integral to the business – be it highly niche skills, talented leadership, or pure ‘manpower’ to get vital everyday jobs done. So, you need to show potential buyers that you have considered the impact of their departure – or even their long-term absence.

You can encourage people to stay with your company with incentive schemes and loyalty bonuses, but life happens, and people move on or need time off for health-related reasons.

Ideally, you’d have two people for every role in your business to mitigate this risk. However, in smaller businesses this isn’t always financially feasible. Instead, we recommend you train others within your organisation on business-critical tasks.

Always document key roles too. Write a manual with processes that will help you to induct a new member of staff into that role quickly, in a way that doesn’t impact your clients and customers.

Chances are, your business employs salespeople, so always make sure they are using a CRM (customer relationship management) system and that they update it. What you don’t want is to pay them for five years and then they take all the contacts and pipeline with them and move to your competitor! If you have a written manual on the role of the salesperson along with a data base of prospects on your CRM, it will be so much easier for you, your new salesperson and/or your acquirer to stay connected with those clients.

 

 

Clients

One of the primary features any potential buyer will evaluate before they decide whether to buy your company is your client base. They will be looking at all types of customer – potential, current and retained business – and so will their lender (if they’re looking to borrow funds to buy you).

Ask yourself if you have your eggs in too few baskets with your customers? No matter how well you know them and how many years they’ve been buying from you or using your services, if they are limited in number then there is a big risk to your profits if they decide to go elsewhere, or their circumstances change, or if they close their business.

Where you are heavily dependent on one or two clients, you can reduce the risk factor by asking larger customers to sign longer-term agreements – and buyers love contracted revenue.

Potential buyers could get nervous if they see that a lot of your business relies on you. They will be wondering how many customers will stay on the books after you exit. To alleviate their worries, you may be asked to be retained on a consultancy basis to transition the client relationship or exit gradually so there is ample time to handover the relationship. That way, your customers will also be reassured and more likely to continue doing business with the new owner.

 

This is by no means an exhaustive list of SPOFs. It is imperative that you identify them in your business and tackle them before you put your business on the market. If you don’t, your potential buyer and their advisers will, and it could mean you don’t achieve the best possible sale – or are even unable to sell at all.


1 www.score.org, 2019

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

This article has been provided courtesy of Entrepreneurs Hub.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief: how it affects you

Making the most of this tax benefit

Entrepreneurs’ Relief: how it affects you

In the current political climate, business owners are facing extraordinary levels of uncertainty. With this in mind, many are likely to consider reducing their risk by taking money from their businesses, but one of the key ways of doing this tax-efficiently could be under threat.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief was introduced in 2008 to encourage entrepreneurship and reduces the tax rate of a capital gain from selling a business to just 10%, instead of the usual capital gains tax rate of 20% for higher and additional rate taxpayers. The relief applies to an individual’s lifetime limit of £10m, but recent comments by politicians and others have sparked fears that it could be removed or watered down in future.

Some changes have already been implemented that will increase the amount of time shares must be held to be eligible for the relief and strengthen the ownership criteria to include sharing profits and sale proceeds. With the continuing uncertainty, seeking advice about Entrepreneurs’ Relief planning may be a good first step for those who want to ensure they benefit from its tax advantages. 

Eligible businesses

If you are planning to exit you should talk to an accountant about Entrepreneurs’ Relief, which is granted on the assumption that your business is a trading company. While the obvious example is that a business which only owns investments and rental properties is not a trading company, HMRC may reject an Entrepreneurs' Relief claim for a business holding too much cash, as this may be considered a non-trading asset.

HMRC will potentially challenge Entrepreneurs' Relief if the company holds substantial non-trading assets. Generally, substantial is taken to mean more than 20%. HMRC will look at the whole business and consider the non-trading assets in relation to:

•    Turnover
•    Asset Base
•    Expenses
•    Where time is spent

Technical Connection Consultant Simon Martin explains: “Let’s assume you have got a marketing agency that’s clearly trading because you sell marketing services. However, you’ve been so successful that you’ve built up £1m in cash, which is held in your business account. HMRC could challenge the relief if there is no clear trading purpose for the £1m. 

“It might well be that the funds do have a trading purpose because you want to expand, move to new premises or buy another company. But if there’s no good explanation they may decide that as the business has a relatively low turnover and you have £1m in cash, there is unlikely to be a trading purpose for these funds.

“They could therefore jeopardise the claim for Entrepreneurs’ Relief because it looks as though you have excessive non-trading assets.”

Control the controllable

Martin Brown, CEO of business growth advisor Elephants Child, says: “I would encourage any entrepreneur with an eye on exiting within a few years to take control of the situation as far as they can.” 

He says a sensible first step would be to conduct a thorough and brutally honest audit to determine how potential buyers might view and value your business, and how ready it is to undergo a due diligence process. 

If there are only small ‘gaps’ between the current positioning of your business and what a buyer might find attractive, and if there is an attractive market for that type of business, then it is worth giving serious consideration to resolving these issues. You can then start the process of creating exit options to take advantage of the current Entrepreneurs’ Relief situation. 

An important analysis will be to compare the net proceeds likely to be received if a sale is executed now, compared to waiting a few years. You will need to form your own opinion on the likelihood of Entrepreneurs’ Relief being scrapped, and take tax advice to ascertain the difference between ‘with ER’ and ‘without ER’ scenarios. You should also be taking a view on the potential impact of Brexit and the economic cycle on the value you might achieve now compared to what might be achieved in a few years’ time.

However, Martin stresses, if the audit establishes that the entrepreneur or the business are far from ready for a sale process, then the loss of the relief isn’t something they should be worrying about. He says: “In that scenario, you should be considering a longer-term exit horizon and start preparing for that.” 

Selling shares

But there’s no need to exit your business altogether to take advantage of Entrepreneurs' Relief. Instead, selling part of the company to an investor can release some cash and reduce the risk posed by difficult trading conditions. This approach would also allow you to take advantage of the relief before any possible changes are made to the benefits it offers.

Entrepreneurs’ Relief is complex and it’s important to take professional advice before deciding on a course of action.
 


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Are you a credible founder?

The personal qualities that persuade funders and clients to buy into you and your company

Are you a credible founder?

Credibility is an essential ingredient of success for entrepreneurs trying to get a start-up off the ground. Potential funders and clients will obviously need to see the value of the business idea you want to bring to market – but at this early stage, they’re buying into you as an individual as much as anything else.

So, what is it about a person that makes others believe they can deliver? Is it passion, communication skills or a grasp of the numbers?

Communication, passion and honesty

Lynn Martin, who is Professor of Entrepreneurship and Innovation at Anglia Ruskin University, says: “Funders and investors need to believe that the person pitching to them can deliver what they’re promising. Funders of course want to believe they might get back their investment, perhaps with interest.

“First, all the research suggests that being able to communicate in person – with passion – is absolutely key to success. If you don’t have enthusiasm about your service or product, why should anyone else?”

Lynn, who led the Goldman Sachs 10,000 Small Business Northwest Programme 2010-2016 and has worked with hundreds of fledgling firms across the UK, adds that honesty is also a must-have trait. “Put over the cons of your idea, and how you plan to overcome them, as well as the pros. An experienced investor will quickly see through any bluffing. And you must always follow through on what you say you’re going to do.”

Making the business case

Substantive presentations, on paper or using digital tools, about your product’s value proposition and the business plan earn vital credibility points. “You should be able to present the business case with clarity and depth,” says Lynn.

“This is sometimes not an entrepreneur’s strong point. If you can’t put the numbers in yourself, take steps to get help. Or work on improving your pitch – a defining quality of an entrepreneur is the ability to work hard, and to learn from past mistakes too. It’s not about luck but hard work.  As the golf legend Gary Player allegedly said: ‘The more I work and practise, the luckier I get.’

“However, to some extent, an investor might be more forgiving about your written presentations if you’ve impressed them with your enthusiasm and as a person. After all, they might be prepared to improve your business plan themselves if they think your idea has potential.”

One strategy, rather than a trait, that can win credibility is impression management, which includes making an effort to match your appearance to the kind of funder or client you’re appealing to. Lynn explains: “In creative and technology fields, people expect a more relaxed approach about what you wear etc, but that won’t work for every industry. But be careful, if investors recognise that you’re not being yourself it can make you look dishonest rather than confer credibility."

Know your stuff

Simon Williams, founder of self-storage firm Storage Giant, says: “Credibility comes with knowing your subject matter inside out. Once a funder or a client has cause to doubt you, you will have to work twice as hard to win them back.

“This does not mean that, as a start-up, you will always be faultless. You may be weaker on crunching the numbers, doing the market research or getting the business plan in order. But the more you pore over numbers the more you will come to grips with them. Eventually you should be in a position where, before you set foot in a meeting with a funder or investor, you should be intimately familiar with your cash flow numbers and the precise level of funding your business can ultimately support.

“Of course, you should be able to look anyone in the eye and explain your business with passion and enthusiasm. Crucially, it should be evident that you are adaptable and resilient, and able to evolve your business model in response to the realities of the business world as you actually find them.”


Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

How to nurture clients

Looking after the customers you already have is a good way to drive growth

How to nurture clients

As you grow your business it’s easy to take existing customers for granted and miss out on a major source of potential revenue growth. Depending on the study you believe, acquiring a new customer is anywhere between five and 25 times more expensive than retaining an existing one, while increasing retention rates by just 5% can increase profits between 25% and 95%1.

And it’s actually harder work, riskier and more expensive to win business from new customers than it is to retain your existing ones. Even the most determined sales campaign may only see one in four prospective clients sign up, points out Martin Brown, CEO of business growth advisor Elephant’s Child.

“With current customers you’ve already invested the time, effort and money required to build the relationship, trust and systems for transaction, so everything is geared to win more business from them. 

“Cranfield School of Management suggests that 88% of a business’s effort should go into selling existing products to existing customers because it’s easier, quicker and far less risky than either selling new products and services or winning new clients, or a combination of both.”

Nurturing clients

For Martin, the foundations of retaining customers lie in nurturing good relationships, developing empathy and trust with them, and understanding what they need. 

“That also means consistently delivering on the fundamentals, in terms of quality of your products and service and timescales and, if you have service level agreements in place, making sure you stick to them.”

Therefore, it’s important to focus hard on account management to develop and maintain existing relationships and grow business from them too, preferably using dedicated account managers.

“It is best to have people in this role who are not focusing on new business sales; farmers rather than hunters, so to speak,” he points out. 

“Even with good account management things will still go wrong from time to time but rather than going on the offensive, an honest and rapid response demonstrating you’re taking the issue seriously and acting on it will inspire confidence.”

Maximising revenue 

Opportunities with existing clients are often missed Martin says, but if clients are buying one of your products or services then they may well buy others, so make them aware of what you have to offer.

“Cross-selling and upselling – we call it ‘juicing the business’ – is a great way to drive additional margin and trust from your existing customer base because the trust and systems are already there.” 

At the same time, helping clients to consolidate the suppliers they have to deal with can also save them time and money, too.

Martin advises rigorously monitoring customers to assess how profitable they are for you and that includes looking at how quickly they pay, the demand they place on the business and their risk profile.

“Don’t make assumptions, because not all customers are equal, and their businesses will also change over time. Profile and classify them so you can make decisions about the relationship you want with them. For example, if a customer delivering £10,000 revenue a year requires similar time and resources to service as one hitting £1m, it may be time to let them go,” explains Martin.

The customer is king

Nurturing existing customers has certainly been driving success for entrepreneur Chris Stappard, co-founder of Newcastle-based mid-to-senior executive recruitment specialist Edward Reed. 

The nine-strong company has seen its customer base shoot from zero to 50 since 2013 and now boasts a client retention rate of 60% – and it continues to grow. 

Chris explains: “We started out with no clients and, as we’ve added each new client, we’ve worked really hard to cultivate our relationships, which are primarily at board and shareholder level. 

“This is achieved not only through good service, but by adding value. For us, that means encouraging regular personal contact and spending time with clients and listening to what they have to say, providing them with market insights and recruitment sector updates, and introducing them to other useful businesses and advisers.”

He concludes: “In my view, our approach of caring for our customers and taking the relationship beyond purely transactional processes is what has made us a go-to recruitment brand in the North East.”

 


 


 


1 Source: Harvard Business Review, October 2014

Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.

Is your business your pension?

Taking out an actual pension can diversify your risk and is a tax-efficient way to take money from your company

Is your business your pension?

Entrepreneurs often assume that their business will make enough money for a comfortable old age – but what if things don’t go to plan? If everything is tied up in your company and it fails or doesn’t perform as well as you’d hoped, you could be left with very little in later life.

With uncertain trading conditions over the next few years a pension could be a useful way to spread your risk and it is an extremely tax-efficient method of extracting cash from your business. That’s because of the very generous tax relief that companies enjoy on pension contributions.

Corporation tax is currently 19%, so for every £100 your company earns as profit, you’ll pay corporation tax of £19, reducing the amount you can take as a dividend to just £81. But when the company pays £100 into your pension it effectively only costs £81 because of a reduction in corporation tax. 

Reducing income tax

In addition, a pension allows you to take a comparatively large sum without being liable for higher rate income tax. You could, for example, pay yourself a dividend of £50,000 and the company could pay up to the annual tax-free allowance of £40,000 into your pension. In fact, you can carry forward any unused annual allowance from the previous three years, meaning that the company could pay you a pension contribution of up to £160,000 in a single year, with a corresponding reduction in corporation tax.

For the contributions to be an allowable expense, they would need to meet the “wholly and exclusively” test. Essentially, this means the contribution must be commensurate for the work undertaken by the individual receiving the pension payment.

Simon Martin, Technical Connection Consultant at St. James’s Place, explains: “A typical company founder might say ‘my business is my pension’. That’s fine as long as the business is doing well. But if it goes badly, not only may your lifestyle be affected, but your retirement will be hit as well. If you have a pension, even if your company fails at some point in the future, the pension funds can still be held for your retirement. It’s a way of protecting yourself and your future.”

Tax-efficient extraction

Pensions are not the only way of taking money from your business tax-efficiently. You could, for example, pay yourself a dividend and the resulting income tax charge. The dividend could then be invested into a high-risk investment such as a Venture Capital Trust or an Enterprise Investment Scheme (EIS). Because the government wants to encourage such investments you would effectively enjoy 30% income tax relief.

If you are a higher rate tax payer (32.5%), for example, and you are paid a dividend of £10,000, you’ll owe £3,250 in income tax. However, if you then put your £10,000 straight into an EIS you’ll get £3,000 back in income tax relief. While there’s no real limit to how much you can pay yourself, there is an even higher income tax rate of 38.1% once you earn more than £150,000, so the gap between the tax you pay and the amount you get back increases.

Another advantage of removing unnecessary money from your company is that it removes it from the company’s balance sheet. That’s helpful if you claim Entrepreneurs’ Relief when you eventually sell the company because too much unused cash on the books can lead HMRC to conclude that it is not a trading company and refuse the relief.

Taking a pension and removing money tax-efficiently require careful planning and for many people it’s a good idea to seek professional advice.


Venture Capital Trusts and Enterprise Investment Schemes are suitable only for experienced, sophisticated or high net worth investors who accept that they may get back significantly less than the original investment.
– These represent a much higher risk than investing in larger well established listed companies listed on the FTSE All Share Index and are inherently more illiquid.
– The legislation surrounding VCTs and EISs and, as a result, their tax treatment, is subject to individual circumstances, may change in the future and could apply retrospectively.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. Tax reliefs are dependent on individual circumstances.

Could you get R&D tax credit?

Think only scientists and technology companies qualify for Research and Development (R&D) Tax Credits? Then think again

Could you get R&D tax credit?

Zooming up and down the country filming sporting action sounds like a dream job for any fan. But for Richard Jackson, founder of CheersMate Productions, the challenge of getting the perfect football, rugby or school sports shot was the lack of height and the British weather.

“We used to stand on top of a Land Rover Discovery or carry large steps with us but we still had issues with height and the rain,” says Richard. “It would take time to put plastic covers over the cameras and plugs and I just thought there must be an easier way of doing this. We needed height and rain protection. I looked into remote control cars and talked to people who worked with them.”

The result was the wireless Hi-Mate Tripod – a waterproof telescopic tripod operated remotely. “The work we did on the camera solved a problem. It was what we needed, it made sense for the business,” adds Richard. “I never thought of it as being research and development.”

Innovation 

However, after receiving advice from specialist firm Breakthrough Group he discovered that he was carrying out innovative, unique work and was therefore eligible for HMRC’s R&D Tax Credits scheme.

The company claimed for an £18,000 cash rebate for its development work, re-investing it into further camera innovation. Their experience of the R&D scheme is exactly what the Government hoped for when it launched in 2000. It wanted to reward UK SMEs for investing in innovation and using their reclaimed funds to drive further new initiatives and hire staff.

They must be limited companies with less than 500 staff, eligible for corporation tax and with a turnover of under €100 million to be eligible.

How the scheme works

According to the HMRC to get R&D relief a company needs to explain how a self-funded project looked for an advance in science and technology in their industry and overcame uncertainty. The project must not be easily worked out by a professional and must research or develop a new process, product or service or improve on an existing one. It doesn’t even have to be a success to claim.

“Whatever you’ve done must be hard for other professionals to do. You must be advancing knowledge, capability and solving a problem in your sector,” explains Brady Last, managing director of Breakthrough. “When you start out the solution to the project must be unknown. You can’t build a new piece of software and know from the outset exactly how to do it. That’s not R&D. That uncertainty of how to do something must be present.”

From money to beer

Other examples of companies with eligible projects include Eris FX, which developed a real-time customer-facing platform allowing its clients to see and deal on streaming currency data, and Thornbridge Brewery, which used wild yeast and fruit to produce uniquely flavoured beers.

“We’ve been claiming regularly since 2014 and putting the cash back into refining the platform for new markets,” says Eris FX chief executive Helen Scott.

SMEs can claim up to 33p of every £1 spent on their R&D projects such as salary payments to staff or subcontractors, utility bills and cost of materials. They either receive a cash payment or more often a corporate tax reduction with the average claim coming to £53,876 in 2016-171.

HMRC aims to process the claims – which can be carried back two financial years –within 28 days.

Lack of awareness

Despite these rewards, according to tax specialist Catax, only 37% of SMEs have ever claimed R&D relief2.

“It is either not known about or misunderstood in the SME marketplace,” says Martin Brown, chief executive of business advisors Elephants Child. “An SME’s notion of what R&D is tends to be different from the Government’s definition.”

Brady agrees that it can be difficult for companies to define what is and isn’t eligible. “Most of our clients are in manufacturing, construction, software development and agriculture/food technology. But if you are creating new processes or products in any sector then we should be talking to you,” she says. “This is something firms should be claiming. It is money which could help spur further innovation and growth.”


The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, can change at any time. The value of any tax relief depends on individual circumstances.

1. https://forrestbrown.co.uk/news/hmrc-r-and-d-tax-credit-statistics-2018/

2. www.neechamber.co.uk/our-members/news/two-thirds-of-eligible-newcastle-firms-missing-out-on-valuable-rd-tax-credits

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Challenging the corporate bullies

Can SMEs do anything about big companies imposing unfair payment terms on them?

Challenging the corporate bullies

Thousands of small companies are being financially disadvantaged by larger firms that don’t play fair when it comes to paying invoices.

The Federation of Small Businesses (FSB) estimates that SMEs are owed an average of £6,142 due to practices such as late payment and argues if every payment was made on time 50,000 enterprises could be saved from closure annually1

Late payments are just one of the ways large corporates exploit SMEs when it comes to unfair practices that the FSB calls ‘supply chain bullying’. Some enterprises face unreasonable 120-day settlement terms or find their payment terms have been extended without warning or explanation.

Other tricks up the corporates’ sleeves include retrospective discounting where a reduction in the invoice payment is made for goods or services delivered or additional goods are demanded from the supplier to settle an existing invoice.

Then there’s imposing ‘fines’ for allegedly incorrect packaging. There are reports that some online retailers deliberately schedule clashing delivery slots into their depots to create queues, then fine suppliers for ‘late delivery’. 

“Supermarkets and other large retailers will demand a discount on the price of goods supplied or charge a fee to display or promote them in prime locations inside their stores or to reserve specific shelf space,” explains FSB Senior Policy Advisor Lorence Nye.

“In certain industries and situations longer payment terms can sometimes be justified commercially. Mostly it reflects the imbalance of power in the relationship between large and small firms and the inherent culture of some big players.” 

He adds: “Supply chain bullying tends to affect companies supplying products rather than services. The worst sectors are construction, manufacturing and online and high street retailing – although supermarkets seem to be more reasonable recently.”

All this seems extremely unfair but is there anything that can be done about it?

“Understandably, small firms don’t want to complain and risk losing business that could close them down,” Lorence explains. “Neither they, nor we, have the financial clout to take on corporate bullies in courts.

“It’s a good idea to thoroughly research potential buyers on the Government’s new Duty to Report website, which has statistics on the payment practices provided by firms themselves. 

“You can also talk to other suppliers who deal with your intended buyers and then make informed decisions, but that doesn’t present a real choice if you are tied to a limited number of customers,” says Lorence.

“It’s wise to put cash aside to ride income shortfalls caused by payment problems and it’s now easier to get loans from banks and financial institutions after the wake-up call of the Carillion collapse.”

The FSB is currently compiling league tables of good and bad payers and lobbying the Government on the late payment issue. It has welcomed last month’s announcement from the government that it intends to crack down on bigger businesses which have poor payment practices towards their smaller suppliers and contractors.

“Ministers have listened to FSB’s calls to make company boards accountable for their payment practices; to increase the powers of the Small Business Commissioner; and to strengthen the Prompt Payment Code,” says Lorence.

But for one entrepreneur, who asked not to be named, action cannot come soon enough. His small enterprise supplies specialised products to several large high street chains. One buyer switched his payment term from 30 to 75 days for payment with notice. They charge him 2.5% of the invoice value for making 'prompt payment' and regularly charge £250 for ‘delivery non-compliances’ which, he says, usually turn out to be compliant.

“It’s costing me thousands of pounds a year plus overdraft charges,” says the business owner. “To be honest, the only real answer is new legislation.”


1. FSB, 16 November 2016.

The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Ten changes to make at £1m turnover

As your business gets bigger you need to make some changes to stay ahead of the pack

Ten changes to make at £1m turnover

Reaching £1m turnover is an important milestone for any business but it should also be a time to review and refresh. You started your company because you saw a gap in the market and had the vision and energy to attack it. Yet, as time goes by, it is easy to become so busy with the day-to-day running of the business that issues for the future go unaddressed. So what potential changes do you need to consider as you plan for the next £1m? Here are ten ideas.

1) Performance - Measure and improve. For example, not managing cashflow can lead to failures of even profitable businesses. As the saying goes: “Sales are for vanity, profits for sanity and cash is for reality.” Do you have enough cash to keep growing your business and what does your capital structure look like going forward?

2) Protection - Shareholder protection and agreements, key person and directors and officers’ cover may have been neglected in the launch excitement but should not be further delayed. “The challenge in doing this later is that businesses get more complex and emotion based when bigger sums of money are involved as they get larger. This can affect mindsets, so it is key to get these vital insurances set up now,” says Martin Brown, chief executive of business growth advisers Elephants Child.

3) Plan for the next milestones - Businesses can hit glass ceilings or brick walls at levels of turnover of say £1m, £3m, £5m, £10m and £20m. This is a good time to think about how to grow the business valuably to provide future exit options and what barriers are likely to be encountered along the way. Assess your leadership, people, processes and technology and work on the business.

4) Purpose - Simply making money is no longer a sufficient aim, businesses must have a sense of purpose to appeal to staff, customers, suppliers and external stakeholders. Spend time devising your company’s values, vision and what you stand for. What is it that you are really trying to achieve? What does your business do differently? How is it sustainable over the long-term?

5) Possibilities - You started a business because you saw an opportunity, but do you have the business knowledge to understand what is the art of possible? “You need to know where you can take your business,” says Martin. “How much can you grow it? Do you need to raise funds to do so? How are you going to build value in the business and then realise it?”

6) Product or service life cycle - Are you refreshing your original business concept and strategy to ensure they are still relevant and sufficient for today’s fast-changing world? Can you avoid a “Kodak moment” by making sure you foresee industry changes and constantly refine and improve?

7) People - Ensure that you are recruiting the right talent and providing them with the training and mentoring they need to move the business on. “As you grow your business, you’re going to need to achieve results through other people,” says Martin. “If you don’t carry forward the business culture or delegate or plan well, the person who started the business can actually become its biggest constraint.”

8) Partners - Do you have the best advisers to challenge you and the business going forward? Just because they got you to £1m turnover does not mean they are the best people to take you to the next milestone. Are their skills still relevant? If not, do you need somebody else? 

9) Portfolio - Are you proactively managing the types of customers or clients that you are attracting? Are they still delivering value and profits for your business? Over the years, companies can collect suppliers and clients, but your business may need to not only grow existing clients and acquire new ones but also disengage from those that are no longer a good fit. 

10) Passion - Do you still love the business you began? Is it your passion? If not, should you be doing something else?


 


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Five things affecting exit valuation

Understanding and delivering what acquirers look for is key to achieving top dollar

Five things affecting exit valuation

Owners who have moulded their businesses to match what acquirers typically want are usually rewarded with a premium valuation. Those who don’t can be heavily penalised. 

Jeremy Furniss, partner at Livingstone, an international mergers and acquisitions advisory firm, shares his thoughts on the most important things entrepreneurs with an eye on exit should be focussing on:

1. Succession

Very rarely will an acquirer pay a high price for a business and agree to the founder disappearing off into the sunset, when that founder is still engaged in hand-to-hand combat in the trenches of the business. It would be lunacy.

But unfortunately, a common problem we come across is that entrepreneurs wrongly perceive an exit to be their succession plan. The reality is they will only achieve an exit if they have a succession plan, and that plan is at the very least partially implemented. 

Ideally, an entrepreneur will have ‘promoted themselves’ to chair, distanced themselves from day-to-day operational management, and appointed a CEO or MD who is demonstrably running the business successfully. Doing this six weeks before pressing the button on a sales process will look hopelessly superficial. Doing it a year or more before going to market demonstrates a sustainable and credible succession solution. 

2. Momentum

Without doubt, a business that has the wind in its sails and has enjoyed strong growth in the years leading up to a sale is going to be an interesting and exciting proposition to a buyer, and hence more valuable than a business that has been treading water for several years.

The key is being able to demonstrate an order book, pipeline, or contract base that is supporting visible growth into the future. You want to be selling the business when you have that visibility, and the buyer isn’t required to take a punt on you being able to sustain growth for the 12 or 24 months following the acquisition. The last thing buyers want to be worrying about is sales falling off a cliff a few months after paying a premium value for the business. 

3. Scale

Although the absolute size of the business isn’t something that can be changed quickly, it is nonetheless very important for entrepreneurs to realise that scale is a key driver of value. 

There are certain thresholds of business profitability – typically £1m EBITDA (earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation), £3m, £5m and £10m - that, when crossed, result in a much greater level of interest from acquirers.

More and more acquirers will become interested as each of these thresholds is crossed. Beneath £1m of profitability, you may struggle to attract significant interest from blue chip acquirers. Most acquirers would rather do one £50m deal than ten £5m deals. Just because a deal is small, doesn’t make it any less complex, time consuming, or expensive to execute in terms of advisory fees. 

There is also a clear trend of valuation multiples (the value of the business divided by the annual profit) being higher for businesses with larger profits, as scale generally indicates a more developed and robust business.

4. A competitive bidding process

Finding the right types of buyers can have a huge impact on value. Acquirers will value a business based on their own perspective of what the target company can do for them. 

In our experience, if we have three or four offers on the table from strategic acquirers, it’s common for the highest offer to be 50% more than the lowest, sometimes even 100% more. And that’s in a situation where all of those acquirers would have received an identical amount of information about the business.

You don’t want to talk to everyone; you want to talk to the five buyers who are really going to jump at the opportunity. That means being very thoughtful about who you approach, and being able to see the opportunity from their end of the telescope. This is an area where a good adviser can add a lot of value, narrowing the field of potential acquirers without having to speak to 20 or more.

5. Differentiation

‘Me too’ businesses rarely attract premium prices. In contrast, ‘differentiated’ businesses do. This could mean having an established and highly regarded brand; proprietary intellectual property; a proven research and development pipeline; unique products or services; or operating in a market with high barriers to entry (where it is difficult for new competitors to win over clients). 

A final point Jeremy stresses is to avoid ‘dependencies’, which can depress valuation. So in addition to avoiding a dependency on themselves, entrepreneurs should be trying to make sure their businesses are not overly dependent on a single or small group of clients (if a single client accounts for more than 20% of revenues, alarm bells will start ringing with most acquirers); a single supplier for a key product; or key staff members (as is typically the case in service businesses, where a small team of ‘heavy-hitters’ can often account for a disproportionately large percentage of sales).

A good place to start when you are preparing your business for sale is to fill in the St. James’s Place Entrepreneur Club app, which will give you a clear picture of your current position.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own and are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management.

Exit Strategies may include the referral to a service that is separate and distinct to those offered by St. James’s Place.

Playing the long game

Growing a business to sell a business

Playing the long game

What makes a successful entrepreneur? It’s quite literally the million-dollar question in the world of buying, growing and selling businesses…

Forbes1 describes the entrepreneurial spirit as “a mindset. It’s an attitude and approach to thinking that actively seeks out change, rather than waiting to adapt to change. It’s a mindset that embraces critical questioning, innovation, service and continuous improvement.”

Michael Kerr, an international business speaker and author, says “It’s about seeing the big picture …being agile, never resting on your laurels, shaking off the cloak of complacency and seeking out new opportunities.”

 

Always thinking ahead

That agility and hunger for momentum and change is why many entrepreneurs go down the route of buying and growing a business to sell. When they buy, their goal from the outset is to build a company that will have acquirers knocking down the door to buy it a few years down the line – and for a tidy sum.

Growing a business to sell at a later date is a long game with many considerations, but there are a few key things to be aware of if that’s where you want to channel your entrepreneurial spirit. As always, having a plan is everything.

 

Get to know your industry

Every sector has its own intricate machinery of key players, buying patterns, processes, important networks, major calendar dates/seasons, emerging trends – to name just a few of the moving parts. If you’re going to buy, grow and sell a business effectively then you need to understand all the ins and outs of the engine that drives it so that you can make smart investments.

Immerse yourself in market data as well as consumer reports and feedback, attend key conferences and networking events, and enrol on training courses to get the depth and breadth of knowledge and understanding required to succeed.

 

Nurture keystone elements to grow: customers, staff and the bottom line

Even if your ultimate plan is to exit the business, you must fully commit yourself to the quality of its core components as if it was your life’s work and great masterpiece. Those dependencies are the customers, staff and the bottom line.

Establish contracted, recurring revenue streams that will allow sustainable growth. Review assets and costs to see how you can automate or cut back to operate more effectively. When it comes to customers, nurture those both old and new by carefully monitoring the end-to-end customer journey. That goes for your main suppliers too. This will alert you to any issues that could damage the business, so they don’t end up affecting the saleability.

Remember, all your business dealings could bring opportunities to build useful relationships with influential people in your industry who could lead you to a sale in the future.

And don’t forget the obvious – your staff! Skilled, productive, loyal employees are the lifeblood in every business and something future acquirers will view as a major asset. Build a strong management team and incentivise them to nurture their teams in a way that makes the whole workforce a major selling point.

 

Refine processes and systems

No matter what sector you’re in, clear, well-documented and transparent processes and systems will allow you to show a buyer just what an attractive proposition your business is when you come to sell it.

The future business owner will be attracted to the reassurance that documented process brings. It means they and their staff can hit the ground running when they buy the business. After all, a disruption to customer service could cost them business at a critical point. Robust processes and systems help them mitigate that risk.

It’s good business practice to make sure that all financial and corporate records prove the same attention to detail. Any serious acquirer will do a thorough audit and they’ll be deterred by any nasty surprises – or even just by question marks in your paperwork.

 

Have a strong exit strategy

If you’ve just bought a business, an exit strategy might not be at the forefront of your mind. However, even if you aren’t thinking about selling for another 10 years or more – that exit strategy should act like a compass in everything you do.

Every decision you make could have a potential impact on the value of your business in the long run, so consider how it will influence your eventual goal of selling.


The opinions expressed by third parties are their own are not necessarily shared by St. James’s Place Wealth Management. This article has been provided courtesy of Entrepreneurs Hub (www.entrepreneurshub.co.uk)

Attack of the cyber criminals

Criminals are getting more sophisticated. SMEs need to keep up

Attack of the cyber criminals

According to latest figures from the Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport the number of businesses that suffered a cyber attack or breach in the last year fell from 43% to 32%. For small businesses the drop was from 47% to 40%1.

The findings from the Cyber Security Breaches Survey 2019 suggest one of the main reasons for the drop is that businesses are becoming more cyber secure following the introduction of GDPR legislation – which can result in heavy fines in the case of a breach.

But there are also worrying trends. For micro and small businesses that have suffered breaches, the average number of days to deal with these has jumped from 1.9 to 2.9, and the average cost has risen from £2,310 to £3,6501.

Chris Lennon of Stackhouse Poland, an insurance broker shortlisted for the Cyber Broker of the Year award in 2018, is concerned about complacency: “When we talk to our SME customers, we often find they don’t consider themselves to be a primary target for cyber criminals, thinking it is mainly a ‘big business’ problem. But that couldn’t be further from reality.”

Larger businesses spend a lot more money on cyber risks, he explains, and they have removed a lot of the easy-wins for cyber criminals, who are increasingly focusing their sights on SMEs.

The survey shows that by far the most common type of breach or attack is due to ‘phishing’ (fraudulent emails or being directed to fraudulent websites). Among organisations suffering a breach, 80% have experienced phishing attacks1.

Gareth Davies, senior lecturer in cyber security in the Faculty of Computing, Engineering and Science at the University of South Wales, spends half of his time working with law enforcement agencies and private companies on cyber security. He says: “The trend is away from sending out a standard email to thousands of random people, and towards very targeted attacks, such as ‘spear-phishing’ or ‘whaling’.”

Spear-phishing is when hackers target a specific individual, often by impersonating another person or organisation. They will conduct in-depth research to make their impersonation credible – gathering names and job titles, details of projects being worked on, and the exact format of company emails. Then, an email will be crafted to a target who is likely to believe it is genuine (for example, someone who has previously corresponded with the person being impersonated, with the email perhaps referring to a current project being worked on), and tempt him or her to click on a malicious link.

Whaling involves targeting a very senior person in an organisation, often the CEO. Because their devices or areas of network access are likely to hold the most sensitive and valuable data, they are lucrative targets. They are also seen as soft targets, because CEOs sometimes lack in-depth technical knowledge, are very busy, and have to deal with a large number of emails very quickly – often making them less proficient in spotting a phishing email.

Gareth also warns of ‘homoglyph attacks’, which are on the rise. This involves a fraudulent email being sent from an address that mimics a genuine one, by replacing a single character with a near-identical Unicode character, for example pɑypal.com versus paypal.com (look carefully).

After phishing and impersonation, the most common causes of breach or attack are viruses, spyware or malware; and ransomware1. Chris says these hacking tools are being sold on the dark web and are applied on an industrial scale: “Today, a hacker is not someone wearing a hoodie, sitting at home trying to work out what your password is. Sophisticated criminals are using sophisticated algorithms to continually fire billions of permutations of passwords at your server.”

If SMEs want to make sure they are following best practice, Gareth says the best starting point is to go through the ‘Cyber Essentials’ certification programme run by the National Cyber Security Centre. For £300, a business’s security and resilience to cyber crime will be tested, recommendations made, and a certificate issued once the business is compliant2.

He believes implementing the recommendations often costs less than £1,000 for smaller businesses. The certificate covers the technical aspects of cyber security (how to secure devices, the use of firewalls and anti-virus software), as well as the human aspects, such as staff training (awareness of phishing techniques, understanding cyber-risks, what to look out for).

Businesses should also consider cyber insurance, which is purchased by only 11% of businesses in the UK1. Chris says that most of these are larger businesses. Very few SMEs purchase cyber insurance. Good policies will cover loss of revenue (for example, if an on-line shop is unable to operate), the costs of fixing the breach, and perhaps more importantly, access to a suite of response services, paid for and arranged by the insurer – such as forensic IT, public relations, and legal services.

Chris says: “Think of a cyber policy as a sprinkler. Like a sprinkler won’t stop a fire starting, a policy won’t prevent a hack. But it will help to minimise the damage.”

Businesses can speak to their St. James’s Place Partner to find out how to protect themselves against cyber risks.


1. CyberSecurity Breaches Survey 2019; Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport

2. Cyber Essential Online, May 2019

Borrowing from friends and family

When entrepreneurs look to friends and family for investment, what are the benefits and challenges of mixing the personal and the professional?

Borrowing from friends and family

You can always count on your best man. From organising the stag do to adjusting your tie at the aisle. But investing in your start up business? That was the experience of Nick Farnsworth founder of toy business Little Sport Star when seeking investment to move online.

“We launched in 2012 and through a US licensing partner our products such as baby golf clubs were in huge retail stores,” Nick explains. “Unfortunately, the partner didn’t spot the online opportunity. I did but needed investment.”

Because the firm did not have an established online presence it struggled to get a bank loan. “I made a list of friends and family who might have the money,” he explains. “My best man had business experience so, despite feeling awkward, we discussed it over a beer.”

He invested £100,000 under the Enterprise Investment Scheme (EIS) tax relief programme and took an equity stake. 

Informal approach

One study, from peer-to-peer lender Thin Cats found that 1.6 million people have lent money – average £4,479 – to a friend or family member to help grow their business.1

Entrepreneurs benefit because friends and family are unlikely to demand high levels of interest, want limited security and often offer flexible repayment terms. Decisions are quicker because of less due diligence.

This informal approach can, however, create problems. If friends and family aren’t fully aware of the risks and lose money it can sour relationships.

“You may not be at a stage where you can raise thousands from people you don’t know but you can raise it from those you do,” says Anthony Rose, founder of SeedLegals.

“In the past you may have felt embarrassed in case the venture failed but thanks to Seed Enterprise Investment Scheme (SEIS) and EIS tax relief, those investors can deduct 50% (for SEIS) or 30% (for EIS) of that investment from their taxable income that tax year or the previous year, pay no capital gains tax when they sell the shares after three years, or write off their investment if things go wrong. It reduces the risk of them never talking to you again over Christmas dinner.”

Anthony says a friends and family investment often follows an initial bootstrapping process. “Normally an investor won’t give you cash straight off a pitch, so you have to put some of your own money in first,” he says. “Our data shows founders spend a median of £26,000 of their own money before they seek external investment.”

Bootstrapping

Bootstrapping, or funding your business yourself, gives time and space to build your design, marketing and communications. But it also means a lack of regular income and often seeing savings dry up.

Kate Bell, founder of maternity wear firm Zip Us In, is a former bootstrapper. “When we began in 2014, we had a lady in a garage with a sewing machine making small batches. We pulled whatever money we had into materials,” she explains. “We then sealed a deal with Boots and needed investment to manufacture at scale. We had gone through our savings.”

She looked for a bank loan but with only one year’s trading no offers emerged. “We went to family. They believed in what we were doing and because of the Boots order there wasn’t a huge investment risk,” she explains.

The result was a £25,000 loan from her parents at a 0.6% per month interest rate. “Payments were made as and when cash was available,” she says.  

Formal agreements

It is vital entrepreneurs create formal loan and shareholder agreements to avoid costly and emotional disputes. Nick took legal advice around the equity split. “It was the only time we negotiated against each other which proved difficult. But with a formal agreement in place we have firmly been on the same side,” he says. 

He is clear on the benefits. “If you have friends who invest then you don’t need to dedicate too much time to fundraising,” he says. “In addition, as I did not want to lose my friendship, I was more upfront about the risks. I was painfully transparent with no ambiguous answers to any questions he asked. That’s continued in the business as I don’t hesitate to share any bad news.” 

Kate shares strategy with her father. “He used to run his own business so has been my go-to to bounce ideas off. He is emotionally willing you to succeed,” she explains. Most mums and dads won’t be so clued up but may be as willing to give advice.

Anthony urges caution. “Amateur advisors overplay their opinions, so separate the roles of investor and advisor,” he says. In the end apart from business growth, success is judged on whether close relationships remain.

Kate has no concerns. “I felt some personal guilt and cut back on personal spending like holidays,” she says. “But when it works, we all benefit.”

Nick adds: “By separating the personal and the business our friendship is as strong as ever.”

 


1 www.talk-business.co.uk/2017/04/20/1-6-million-brits-helping-bridge-business-funding-gap

The information in this brochure is based on our current interpretation of the law and HMRC practice.

The levels and bases of taxation, and reliefs from taxation, are generally dependent on individual circumstances.

Taxation legislation and HMRC practice may be subject to unforeseen changes in the future.

Should you start again?

What you need to think about if you’re tempted by the thrill of launching a new enterprise after your first exit

Should you start again?

After selling a successful business many entrepreneurs miss the excitement and challenge of running the show and are tempted to start over again. But is it wise to plough your hard-won money back into a risky venture? 

Martin Brown, of SME growth adviser Elephants Child, says: “Just because you did well once doesn’t mean you can do it repeatedly. Don’t get carried away with making deals but consider all the steps you need to take strategically, clearly and always with commercial nous.

“Beware of your own ego, because previous success doesn’t mean you’ve got the expertise to succeed again. You cannot control everything in the mix – timing and luck are a big part. Many things will have changed very quickly – the market, the economy, technology, customers and clients will have moved on.

Getting carried away

It’s easy to get excited by your new business concept without looking at the hard facts. Don’t just appraise the potential value, carefully assess the fundamentals. What do the numbers say? What does the cashflow, profit and return on investment look like? Is this a good sector to be in and how likely is it that the business will grow? 

“If things don’t stack up then it’s high risk and you have to decide if you’re prepared to gamble,” advises Martin.

You also need to be aware of cognitive bias, which involves errors in thinking that influence how we make decisions, explains Martin. In business it can stop you making full and thorough appraisals.

“It shapes your thinking and can create blind spots, making you complacent and your due diligence less rigorous. Be aware of your cognitive bias or you could be in for a hard fall – ensure you ‘re-set’ yourself from the off.”

Finding good advisers

With a lot of money to invest from your exit and possibly a sense of judgement that needs fine tuning, surrounding yourself with people who are prepared to challenge you, to say ‘no’ and point out risk, is wise.

“Form a trusted inner circle of people you can take counsel from, like non-executive directors, peers, accountants, tax and business advisers,” Martin says. “They’ll help you apply the business rigour you need.”

He argues: “Ideally, investing in a new business should be part of a wider, balanced portfolio of investments. So, only set aside money you can afford to lose in a new venture and be mentally prepared to lose it.”

Take the example of entrepreneur Marc Trup, co-founder of successful cloud-based online property management platform and app Arthur Online.

Having founded a successful dentistry business in 1988 he sold it to BUPA and in 2000 co-founded a video-based educational delivery network for dentists – but the third-party video platform it was based on didn’t launch.

Marc didn’t lose money because the majority investment was underwritten by another organisation. Furthermore, he’d shared the risk with co-founders, a lesson he took on board when launching Arthur Online.

“Starting new businesses always carries risk, it’s inescapable," he says. "For me, it’s a better bet to reduce your exposure by owning a smaller piece of a big pie, than a big piece of small one."

Best of both worlds

Martin concludes: “Those who want the intellectual stimulation of running a business with lower risk can also invest some of their money in a business angel network.” 

“Your money is invested across a range of businesses whose boards you sit on as a non-executive director, so you get to run ventures again with less of a gamble.”


Where the opinions of third parties are offered, these may not necessarily reflect those of St. James’s Place.